Manual PDF

Mitsubishi Electric Air-conditioner Network System
- Advanced –
Maintenance Tool for .NET
Operating Manual
Contents Page
1 Foreword
1.1 Introduction of Maintenance Tool 1
1.2 Required Operating Environment 7
1.3 Installation 9
1.4 Starting and Ending the Application 16
2 Terms for Each Section
2.1 Design of Screen 33
2.2 Operating Method 33
3 On-Line Monitor Operation Method
3.1 On-Line Monitor Screen Transfer 34
3.2 Function Chart 35
3.3 Address Search Method 37
3.4 Main Screen 38
3.5 Function Selection Operations 41
3.6 Display Mode Change 41
3.7 Connecting Information 42
3.8 Operation Monitor 45
3.9 Malfunction Log 65
3.10 Optional Setting 67
3.11 Operation Control 85
3.12 OC Date / Time Setting 91
3.13 Free contact of indoor unit 92
3.14 Remote error notification 94
3.15 Setting and Monitoring DIDO/AI/PI Controllers
121
3.16 Setting the Values for Indoor unit Functions158
3.17 Compressor operating time monitor 160
3.18 Initial Settings and Monitoring AHC ADAPTER 162
3.19 Fixed value setting of compressor frequency 185
4 Off-Line Monitor Operating Method
4.1 Off-Line Monitor Screen Transfer 187
4.2 Function Chart 188
4.3 Operation Monitor 190
4.4 System Information 193
4.5 Monitoring of Pre-error Data 194
4.6 Compressor operating time monitor 195
4.7 Function common for each screen 196
4.8 Offline Analyze on Wide area access mode 201
4.9 Offline Analyze on Initial settings of AHC 202
5 File Names 203
6 How to change setting of Firewall 208
7 Troubleshooting 212
8 Explanation of Terminology 220
9 Connection table for M-series 454
10 Trademark and license 467
Before using Maintenance Tool, read this manual thoroughly to ensure correct operation.
WT03939X70
1 Foreword
1.1 Introduction of Maintenance Tool

The Maintenance Tool are comprised of the On-Line Monitor and the Off-Line Monitor.
The following four connection methods are available in the Online Monitoring.
(1) Monitoring by connecting the maintenance tool to MN converter (CMS-MNF,CMS-MNF-B,CMS-MNG-E)
via RS-232C.
(2) Monitoring by connecting the maintenance tool to MN converter (CMS-MNG-E) via USB.
(3) Monitoring through the Centralized Controller by connecting the maintenance tool to LAN. A brief
explanation of each of their function is provided here.Maintenance Tool is connectable to Centralized
Controllers and Remote Monitoring Controllers(CMS-RMD) via the LAN.
(4) Monitoring by connecting the maintenance tool to USB via USB/Serial conversion cable for P/M
series which is not connected to M-NET.
* “G(B)-50A / GB-24A / AG-150A / GB-50ADA / PAC-YG50ECA / EB-50GU / AE-200 / AE-50 / EW-50 /

PAC-YG50ECA” is referred to as “Centralized Controller”.
* “G(B)-50A Web / GB-24A Web / AG-150A Web / GB-50ADA Web / EB-50GU Web / AE-200 Web / AE-50
Web / EW-50 Web” is referred to as “Centralized Controller Web”.
To use the maintenance tool via Centralized Controller(Network), license registration for the Centralized
Controller to be used is necessary.
Purchasing the license No. for each Centralized Controller be used, conduct the license registration through
the Web browser (http://[IP address of the Centralized Controller]/ administrator.html). After selecting
"Maintenance tool" of the optional function on the Web Browser Screen displayed, enter the purchased
license No.
Refer to the following chapters in the “Web Browser Operation Manual” for detailed information about license
registration.
Centralized Controller G-50A, AG-150A or GB-50ADA:Cahpter4 [Registering a License for Optional
Functions]
Centralized Controller EB-50GU, AE-200, AE-50 or EW-50:Cahpter10 [License registration for optional
functions]
When connecting maintenance tool via Expansion Controller,register the license in AG-150A connected
by the Expansion Controller. (Only when AG-150A that registers the license is normally connected,
it is possible to connect via Expansion Controller.)
1
1.1.1 On-Line Monitor(via MN converter)
The On-Line Monitor is connected to the unit by a MN Converter (CMS-MNF,CMS-MNF-B,CMS-MNG-E)
and can monitor such areas as system data, unit data and operating data.
(1) In case for local connection (via RS-232C)

Connecting PC installed with the maintenance tool to M-NET transmission line via MN Converter allows
conducting various monitoring and setting from the Maintenance Tool.
RS-232C M-NET
M-NET
cross
Maintenance MN Converter
Tool PC
NOTE:
 When the MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) is being used in Remote Error Notification mode (see section
3.13), you cannot connect to the MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) via RS-232C. Connect via USB.
Maintenance
Tool PC RS-232C
MN Converter
Maintenance (CMS-MNG-E)
Tool PC USB
NOTE:
 You cannot connect to the MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) via RS-232C and USB at the same
time.Doing so may result in malfunctions.
(2) In case for local connection (via USB) (CMS-MNG-E)

Connecting PC installed with the Maintenance Tool to M-NET transmission line via MN Converter allows
conducting various monitoring and setting from the Maintenance Tool.
M-NET
USB M-NET
Maintenance MN Converter
Tool PC (CMS-MNG-E)
NOTE:
 To connect to the MN Converter via USB, the USB serial driver must be installed on the Maintenance
Tool PC. [Refer to 1.3.4]
NOTE:
 You cannot connect to the MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) via RS-232C and USB at the same time.
Doing so may result in malfunctions.
2
(3) In case for remote connection
Using a modem and remotely connecting PC installed with the Maintenance Tool to MN Converter via public
telephone circuit allow conducting various monitoring and setting as same in the case of local connection.
Public RS-232C
network straight M-NET
RS-232C
MN Converter
Maintenance MODEM MODEM
Tool PC
*For the remote connection utilizing MN Converter, an isolator is required to be inserted between
the modem and MN Converter.(except CMS-MNG-E)
For detail, please see Installation Manual-annexing of MN Converter (CMS-MNF-B).
Public RS-232C
network straight
USB
RS-232C
Maintenance
MODEM MODEM MN Converter Tool PC
Maintenance (CMS-MNG-E)
Tool PC
NOTE:
 You cannot use the Maintenance Tool via RS-232C remote connection and via USB at the same
time. Doing so may result in malfunctions.
You can use the Maintenance Tool for error notification setting via USB when the Maintenance
Tool is not used via RS-232C remote connection.
(Used when connecting via MN converter CMS-MNG-E.)
3
1.1.2 On-Line Monitor(via Centralized Controller)
The On-Line Monitor is connected to the unit by the Centralized Controller and can monitor
areas as system data, unit data and operating data.
NOTE:
When connecting AG-150A with Expansion Controller(PAC-YG50ECA),
connect maintenance tool not AG-150A but via Expansion Controller.
AG-150A Ver2.45 or more and Expansion Controller Ver1.45 or more are necessary
for the connection via Expansion Controller.
(1) In case for local connection

By directly connecting the PC installed with Maintenance Tool and Centralized Controller through LAN,
various monitoring/setting can be performed from the Maintenance Tool.
LAN M-NET
Maintenance HUB Centralized

Tool PC Controller
(1)-2 In case for local connection for AG-150A connection with the Expansion Controller
(PAC-YG50ECA)
LAN
Maintenance HUB
PAC-YG50ECA
Tool PC
AG-150A
(2)-1 In case for remote connection (Dialup connection mode)

By connecting the PC installed with Maintenance Tool and Centralized Controller through public network
remotely, various monitoring/setting can be performed from the Maintenance Tool.
LAN M-NET
MODEM etc
Public Dial-up HUB
Maintenance Router Centralized
network Controller
Tool PC
4
1.1.3 On-Line Monitor(via USB/Serial conversion cable) for M or P-series
The On-Line Monitor is connected to the unit by the USB/Serial conversion cable
and it can monitor unit data and operating data.
M or P-series
Outdoor Unit
USB/Serial
conversion cable
Relay cable
Maintenance
Tool PC
<Connectable Models and Relay cable correspondence table>
Connectable Models Relay cable type Connection point of Outdoor unit
P-series PUY/PUZ etc Type P CNMNT
M-series MXZ-2～6 without Branch Box Type AD/B/C *2 CN605/606/806/861 *2
*1 MUY/MUZ/MUFZ
SUZ/SUHZ
*1 Please refer to chapter 9 for detailed applicable models.
*2 Relay cable and Connection point are different to each model. [Refer to chapter 9]
NOTE:
 To connect to the USB/Serial conversion cable via USB,
the USB serial driver must be installed on the Maintenance Tool PC. [Refer to 1.3.4.2]
Maintenance USB/Serial
Tool PC conversion cable
MN Converter etc
NOTE:
 You cannot use the Maintenance Tool via MN converter/Modem/HUB and USB/Serial conversion cable at
the same time.
5
1.1.4 Off-Line Monitor
The Off-Line Monitor can display, print information obtained by the On-Line Monitor.
In the case of connection monitoring utilizing Centralized Controller, the operation monitor data collected by
Centralized Controller will be transmitted to remote mail servers periodically if the [Operation monitor - mail
communication mode] of online mode is adapted.
Using this function allows to collect and monitor the operation monitor data without continually connecting the
maintenance tool.
*For the setting of the [Operation monitor - mail communication mode], refer to 3.7.1 and 4.3.2 description.
*Image of the [Operation monitor - mail communication mode]
Operation monitor mail

data acquisition
Provider1
Mail server
Collecting the operation
Provider2 monitoring data of
Mail server LAN air conditioners
MODEM etc Operation monitor data

Provider 1
automatic mail transmit
Maintenance Access point
Tool PC Centralized
Internet
Controller
Dial-up
Provider 2 Router
Public
Access point
network
1.1.5 Wide area access mode

Under the "Wide area access mode," the access method for remote connection can be registered to the
database of each customer enabling easy online connection with the air conditioning system of the customer
desired to be accessed.
[Remote access method]

- LAN : Accessing by directly connecting Maintenance Tool PC and Centralized Controller with LAN
(WAN).
- Dialup : Accessing by dialup connection to Centralized Controller via public network.
- E-mail : Accessing by E-mail communication to Centralized Controller via mail server.
- Modem (MN Converter) : Accessing by connecting Modem to MN Converter via public telephone circuit.
After the online connection performed by any of the above methods, you may use the similar function as that
obtainable in the normal online connection.
While under the offline mode, customer information will be provided to the monitored data enabling only to
select a specified customer for display.
6
1.2 Required Operating Environment
This manual refers to Windows® 7 as Windows 7, and Windows® 8.1 as Windows 8.1, and Windows® 10 as
Windows 10.
1.2.1 Hardware Requirements

The computer must be IBM compatible on DOS/V and capable of satisfying the following requirements.
Windows 7/8.1/10
* Required environment
- OS .............…...... Windows 7 (Except Starter Edition)/8.1/10
(Recommended English version *1)
- CPU …................. 2GHz or faster
- RAM .............…… Minimum 1 GB
- HDD ….............…. Available space 40GB or more *2
- LCD ............…….. Display resolution:1024x768
- Serial port ............ 1 RS232C serial port (Used when connecting via MN converter)
- USB port ............ 1 USB port (Used when connecting via MN converter CMS-MNG-E) *4
- LAN port............... 1 LAN port (10BASE-T)
- Pointing device..... Mouse or track ball or any other pointing device
* Recommended environment
- OS ....……........... Windows 7 (Except Starter Edition)/8.1/10
(Recommended English version *1)
- CPU …................. 2GHz or faster
- RAM .....……........ 2GB or more
- HDD …................. Available space 120 GB or more *2
- LCD .......……....... Display resolution:1366x768 or more
- Serial port.........… 1 RS-232C serial port (Used when connecting via MN converter)
- USB port ............ 1 USB port (Used when connecting via MN converter CMS-MNG-E) *4
- LAN port .............. 1 LAN port (10BASE-T or faster) *3
- Pointing device..... Mouse or track ball or any other pointing device
*1 About OS
Fundamentally, it corresponds to OS of each country. However, separators of time and date differ in
each language. This separator may affect a maintenance tool.
It recommends using it by English OS and Regional options setup, changing into English area form. Or
it recommends using it, changing date separator into [/] and time separator into [:].
*2 About Hard Disk Space
The hard disk space recommended above is only the amount required for installing the maintenance
application. Additional space will be required if the operating data is also to be stored on the hard disk.
Accordingly, there may not be enough memory to store operating data if the maintenance system is
installed in a computer with limited hard disk memory.
*3 About LAN port
An LAN port of G-50 is 10BASE-T. Centralized Controller except for G-50 is 100BASE-T.
*4 About USB port
USB port of MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) and USB/Serial conversion cable are USB1.1.
NOTE:
TG-2000A and Maintenance Tool cannot operate with the same personal computer.
Caution:
Maintenance Tool doesn’t correspond to “Windows 7 Starter Edition”.
7
1.2.2 Required Materials
The following materials are needed for operating the Maintenance Tool :
(1) In case of routing via MN converter

MN Converter (CMS-MNF,CMS-MNF-B,CMS-MNG-E), Personal Computer, RS-232C cross cable, USB
cable(CMS-MNG-E) and modem in the case of remote connection, are required. RS-232C is to be straight
cable in this case.
For detail, please see Installation Manual-annexing of MN Converter.
(2) In case of routing via Centralized Controller

Centralized Controller, personal computer, LAN cable (Straight) and HUB.
A dial-up router is required for remote communication. For the dial-up router to be used, employ that
allowing data communication by receiving external telephone transmission.
(3) In case of routing via USB/Serial conversion cable.

USB/Serial conversion cable and Relay cable 【Service parts No: M21 EC0 397】,
and Personal Computer.
8
1.3 Installation Caution:
Ver5.** is not an upgrade, but a totally new version. Please refer to also 1.3.3 Change
* Ver5.00 & Ver4.** can both be installed on the same PC of computer name on PC.
* The data of Ver4.** can be exported & then inported into Ver5.**
However, Ver5.** data can't be used in Ver4.**.
1.3.1 Setting Up the Maintenance Tool (New setup)
Caution:
 Before setting up, be sure to login with the login name authorized as administrator.
 Before setting up, please confirm the following points.
・The check 'Compress drive to save disk space' of LocalDisk(C:) Properties must be removed.
When not satisfying it, the error occurs when installing it and the installation is discontinued.
(1)Starting the setup program

Execute “Setup.exe” located in folder(It name is "New") on
CD-ROM.（Not click on any other files.）
Double clicking on “Setup.exe” with the explorer displays
the application install screen.
NOTE：
・The number of applications installed by the OS is
different, but just click on [install] button.
（Right Figure is Screen of Windows 8.1.）
Caution:
 It takes 1 minutes to install the application.
NOTE:
.NETFramework 3.5SP1 is not installed. Please start and install a
certain InstDotnetFx35.BAT in the dotNETFramework35sp1
folder of CD-ROM when it is displayed.
9
(2)Installing the Maintenance Tool
When the installation of the application software is
finished, the installation screen of the Maintenance Tool is
displayed. Confirm the display contents, and if no problem
was found on the content, click [Next] button.
* To stop setting up, click on [Cancel] button.
(3)Ready to the installation start

Confirm the starting and select an [Install] button.
Click on [Install] button starts installation.
* Clicking on [Cancel] button stops installation.
Caution:
・When a screen such as the right figure was displayed
without installation start preparations screen being
displayed, Select [Remove], and please click a [Next]
button.
・Click [Remove] with the next screen, click on [Finish],

and be completed.
・Install the Maintenance Tool program.
10
(4)Confirming the completion of Maintenance Tool setup
1) Select [Finish] button.
Click on [Finish] button on the Installation Complete
screen.
Now the installation of the Maintenance Tool is complete.
After completing installation, restart your computer.
Store the CD-ROM in a safe place.
Caution:
After installing Maintenance Tool, be sure to restart your computer.
(5)Setting up other software (Only using USB/Serial conversion cable)

When connecting to M / P-series via USB / Serial Conversion cable, you need to install the
following software additionally.
1) Install rewriting software for USB/Serial conversion cable

Install the rewriting software (FT_PROG) from the following FTDI site.
http://www.ftdichip.com/Support/Utilities.htm
NOTE：
・The operation of FT_PROG requires Microsoft .NET Framework version 4.0 or later.
2) Install Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable for Visual Studio 2015

Install the Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable for Visual Studio 2015
from the following Microsoft site.
https://www.microsoft.com/en-US/download/details.aspx?id=48145
NOTE：
・Even for 64bit PC ,you need to install 32bit software (vc_redist.x86.exe).
3) Install USB driver

For the install method, refer to 1.3.4.2 “For USB/Serial conversion cable”.
11
1.3.2 Uninstalling the Maintenance Tool
It explains the method of uninstalling the Maintenance Tool as follows.
[ In the case of Windows 7]
(1) Confirm the ending of Maintenance Tool.

Confirm that Maintenance Tool program has been ended.
If not, end the program.
*For the ending method, refer to Chapter 1.4.7.
(2) Start [Add/Remove Programs].

Click on [Add/Remove Programs] from [Control panel] to
start.
(3) Select [Maintenance Tool for .NET] and

press [Change & Remove] button.
Select [Maintenance Tool for .NET] from the application, and click on [Remove] button.
The deletion of Maintenance Tool application starts.
NOTE:
 Recommend not to delete the common components.
 There are folders and files that can not be deleted with this uninstalling.
(Example:C:¥MnttoolNetEA)
 If you do not need the installed software to use USB / Serial conversion cable, please uninstall it.
Please refer to each software manual for the uninstallation method.
(4) Ending the [Add/Remove Programs].

After ending the deletion of application, end [Add/Remove Programs].
Select [Maintenance Tool for .NET] from the application, and click on [Remove] button.
The deletion of Maintenance Tool application starts.
12
[ In the case of Windows8.1]

(2) Open [Uninstall a program]

(a) By using a mouse
Place the mouse pointer in the top or bottom right
corner of the screen to access the Charm Bar.
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, click [Control
Panel], and then click [Uninstall a program]
(b) From the touch panel

Swipe the screen from the right edge to access the
Charm Bar.
Tap [Settings] on the Charm Bar, tap [Control
Panel], and then tap [Uninstall a program]
(3) Select [Maintenance Tool for .NET]

Slelct [Maintenance Tool for .NET] from a list of
applications that appears, and delete [Maintenance
Tool for .NET]
(4) Exit [Uninstall a program].

When done deleting the program, exit the [Uninstall a program] window.
NOTE:
Caution:
 After uninstalling Maintenance Tool program, be sure to restart your computer.
13
[ In the case of Windows10]

(2) Open [Control Panel]

Right click on the [Start button] on a taskbar. And select
[Control Panel] form the Start menu.
Control Panel
Start button
(3) Open [Uninstall a program]

The [Control Panel] window will appear.Click [Uninstall a
program]
Uninstall a program
(4) Select [Maintenance Tool for .NET]

Select [Maintenance Tool for .NET] from a list of
applications that appears, and delete [Maintenance
Tool for .NET]
(5) Exit [Uninstall a program].

When done deleting the program, exit the [Uninstall a program] window.
NOTE:
.
Caution:
 After uninstalling Maintenance Tool program, be sure to restart your computer.
14
1.3.3 Change of computer name on PC
Do not change the computer name after the Maintenance Tool has been setup.
Maintenance Tool will not run properly if changed, and may require the OS to be installed again.
1.3.4 USB Serial driver installation
1.3.4.1 For MN Converter

To connect the Maintenance Tool to the MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) via USB and then use the tool, the
USB serial driver must be installed on the Maintenance Tool PC.
(1) Execute the batch file in the respective folder that corresponds to the OS of your PC. (See the table
below.)
Windows7 Windows8.1 Windows10

CMS-MNG_Driver CMS-MNG_Driver CMS-MNG_Driver
Driver folder
(win7_x86_x64) (win8_x86_x64) (win10_x86_x64)
Driver file Win7DriverInst.bat Win8DriverInst.bat Win10DriverInst.bat
(2) A window appears asking you to install the driver.

Select [Install this driver software anyway].
Repeat this step twice.
(3) Connect a USB cable to the USB port of the MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E).
This completes USB serial driver (CMS-MNG) installation.

Check that the driver is running correctly in the Device Manager window.
1.3.4.2 For USB/Serial conversion cable

To connect the Maintenance Tool to the USB/Serial conversion cable via USB and then use the tool, the
USB serial driver must be installed on the Maintenance Tool PC.
(1)Install the latest USB driver (D2XX) from the following FTDI site.
http://www.ftdichip.com/Drivers/Ds2XX.htm
・Please connect USB/Serial conversion cable and install from Device Maneger window etc.
・Check that the driver is running correctly in the Device Manager window.
15
1.4 Starting and Ending the Application
1.4.1 Starting the Maintenance Tool
(1) Connect the computer and Centralized Controller and air conditioner.
* When using the USB / serial conversion cable, please do not connect it to the air conditioner side yet.
(2) Click on “Start”, and then click on ”Programs”.
(3) Click on “Maintenance Tool for .NET”
in the “Maintenance Tool” folder.
(4) The Title Screen will soon appear.
(5) The “Select units of measurement” screen is displayed.

Select the method of displaying the Temperature, the Pressure
and the capacity.
a) Temperature
- If the “Degrees Celsius” is checked, the temperature display
becomes a celsius.
- If the “Degrees Fahrenheit” is checked, the temperature display
becomes a fahrenheit.
b) Pressure
- If the “Kilogram/cm2” is checked, the pressure display becomes
a Kilogram/cm2.
- If the “Pound/inch2” is checked, the pressure display becomes
a Pound/inch2.
c) Capacity
- If the “Capacity Code” is checked.
・The capacity item name of the Unit Information Display Columns becomes “Capacity”,
and indoor unit capacity code is displayed.
・The QJ item name of the operation monitor becomes “QJ”,
and indoor unit capacity code is displayed.
- If the “UL-Model Number” is checked.
・The capacity item name of the Unit Information Display Columns becomes “UL-Model”,
and indoor unit UL-Model number is displayed.
・The QJ item name of the operation monitor becomes “Model”,
and indoor unit UL-Model number is displayed.
16
d) If the “Don’t show this window again.” is checked, this window will not appear again.
(However, it is possible to select it from "Select Monitor Mode" screen.)
e) If the button selected, this screen is closed.
*The capacity to store the data obtained by the maintenance tool
counts for 2G-bite maximum. When the remaining storage capacity is
insufficient at starting,Warning Screen will appear. In this case, move
to OFF- Line Screen to delete unnecessary data.
(6) Thereafter, the selection screen of Monitor mode is displayed.

Selecting the mode to be adapted.
Normal mode
a) ON LINE MODE
- MN CONVERTER
When on-line monitoring is adapted to air conditioning
system by connecting MN Converter [Refer to 1.4.2.1.]
Further select Remote connection to conduct remote
connection. [Refer to 1.4.2.2.]
- Centralized Controller (LAN)
system via Centralized Controller by
connecting the Maintenance Tool to LAN. [Refer to 1.4.4.1.]
For remote connection, select either “Dialup connection mode”
or “E-mail connection mode”. [Refer to 1.4.4.2., 1.4.4.3.]
- USB/Serial conversion cable
system by connecting USB/Serial conversion cable[Refer to 1.4.3.1.].
b) OFF LINE MODE
- Offline analysis
When offline analysis is adapted to the data collected under
ON-LINE MODE [Refer to 1.4.5.]
c) When button is selected, the “Select units of measurement” screen is displayed.
[Refer to （５）]
17
1.4.2 Starting the On-Line Monitor(MN Converter connection)
1.4.2.1 In case for local connection
This will be used when online monitoring is adapted to air conditioning system by connecting the
maintenance tool and MN Converter locally. The maintenance tool, MN Converter and air conditioning
system should be connected beforehand.
(1) Clicking "MN CONVERTER" on the selection screen of

Monitor mode selects "Local connection" simultaneously.
Select the model name of the connected MN Converter and
the COM port No. of the connected RS-232C. Last
click .
* When MN Converter model is ”CMS-MNG-E “, and it is

connected via USB, USB COM port No. is displayed.
Select the USB COM port No. of the connected USB.
1.4.2.2 In case for remote connection

This will be used when online monitoring is adapted to air conditioning system by using a modem, and
connecting the maintenance tool and MN Converter with public telephone circuit remotely. The setting up
of the modem for Windows (modem at the remote site side) and the initial setting up (modem connecting
MN Converter at the local side. For detail, refer to (3).) are previously required. The connection of the
modem, public telephone circuit and local MN Converter is necessary.
* For a description of the on-site air conditioner system connection method, refer to the MN Converter
Operation Manual.
* If communication does not have for 10 minutes in remote connection, "Timeout occurred!" will be
displayed, if O.K. is pushed, a telephone circuit will be cut automatically and the Maintenance tool will be
ended.
(1) After clicking "MN CONVERTER" on the selection screen of

Monitor mode, and click "REMOTE CONNECTION." For
MN Converter, "CMS-MNF-B"",”CMS-MNG-E” will
automatically be selected. Then select COM port No. of RS-232C
connected with equipment (like a modem) for connection to public
telephone line.Last click .
*MN Converter to be locally installed should be

"CMS-MNF-B",”CMS-MNG-E”.
Remote connection can not be performed with
"CMS-MNF."
(2) Next the screen to set remote connection will appear.

In order to conduct the initial setting (AT command setting)
of the modem to be used, click , and to initiate
remote connection, click .
*Insert an isolator between the local MN Converter and

modem for insulation. Inserting the isolator reduces the number of lines used by the internal wiring of
RS-323C. For this reason, it is required to select before the remote connection to
change the setting information on the modem to be installed at the local side.
For detail, see Installation Manual-annexing of MN Converter (CMS-MNF).
18
(3) Initial setting of modem
For the modem to be installed at the local side (MN Converter side), initial setting should be applied
before connecting remotely. To apply the initial setting of the modem, click on the
remote setting screen.
The Connection Modem Initial Setting Screen will appear. A modem that is already initialized does
not have to be re-initialized.
The explanation of the operation only is described here. For the detail of the setting content, see
Installation Manual-annexing of MN Converter (CMS-MNF).
(a) Explanation of screen

-Select a registered modem setup file at the Select
Initial Settings File Box. The contents of the selected
file will be listed below the selection box.
-Click on and the modem will be set up

according to the contents selected at the selection
box.
(AT commands are sent to the modem.)
Check if transfer with the modem is normal at the
Transfer with Modem Status Screen.
- Click on to initialize another modem.

Send the initialize command and register the transfer
contents for the modem at the AT Command
Transmit Screen. [Refer to (b)]
- Click on to delete the selected modem

settings from the registered settings. When the
number of registrations limit is exceeded, delete the unwanted contents. [Refer to (b)]
- Click on to return to the Connection Setting Screen.
(b) Perform new modem setup.

- Enter the command (you want to set) you want to
send to the modem at the AT command input text.
Then click on to send the entered AT
command to the modem. The response from the
modem will appear below the entered AT command.
Check the contents.
- After transmission to the modem is complete, click

on . The contents sent to the modem will be
registered as an initialize file. (Registered in the setup
file list of the Connection Modem Initial Setting
Screen.) At this time, do not forget to enter the registration name. Up to ten items can be
registered. If ten items are already registered, new items cannot be registered. Delete unwanted
items using the Connection Modem Initial Setting Screen.
- Click on to return to the Connection Modem Initial Setting Screen.
19
(4) Initiating the remote connection
To initiate the remote connection, click
on the remote setting screen.
The Customer Selection Screen will appear. This screen
connects to the on-site remote modem.
(a) When the addressee has already been registered, select

the customer name to be connected in "Select customer
name box" and then click to initiate
connection.
In the case of initial connection or to change to a new addressee, click .

Then the Customer Information Registration Screen will appear.
(b) Enter Customer name of the field addressee, enter the type of the telephone circuit to be used and
the telephone number of the addressee, and click . The set content will be registered.
* The contents transmitted to the modem vary in the

chosen Line type.
Pay attention to the following.
When PB is chosen, "ATDT" is added before the
telephone number.
For example, when a telephone number is
0123456789,
"ATDT0123456789" is transmitted to the modem.
It becomes the following when "DP", "NONE" are
chosen in the same way.
DP --- ATDP0123456789
NONE --- ATD0123456789
When a circuit connection is impossible in the case
of above three which as well, "ELSE" is used.
When "ELSE" is chosen, nothing is added to before the telephone number.
Input a command for the circuit connection from the beginning.
For example, "ATD0,0123456789" is transmitted to the modem when "ATD0,0123456789" is
inputted in the telephone number column.
When the one except for the "ELSE” is chosen, only a number can be inputted in the telephone
number column.
The information for up to 100 customers can be registered. When the information for 100
customers has been registered, new customer information cannot be registered. Delete the
unwanted customer information using the customer selection screen.
(c) Check the contents, then click on .

The Connection Status Indication Screen will appear.
Connect the line. When you want to disconnect the line,
click on .
The line will be disconnected.
20
1.4.3 Starting the On-Line Monitor(USB/Serial conversion cable connection)
This will be used when online monitoring is adapted to air conditioning system by connecting the
Maintenance tool and USB/Serial conversion cable locally.
After turning off the power supply(circuit breaker) of air conditioning system, connect the USB / Serial
conversion cable to the air conditioning system.
Caution:
・There is a danger of electric shock, please connect/disconnect the USB / Serial conversion cable after
turn off the power supply(circuit breaker) of air conditioning system.
・For safety, Please put the junction bord(Heat shrink tube part) of the USB/Serial conversion cable
inside the outdoor unit and close the cover of the outdoor unit before turn on the power supply.
・Do not put the USB / serial conversion cable in a humid place.Do not get it wet.
・Do not pull or twist the USB / serial conversion cable.
Doino so may result in fire or malfunction.
(1) Clicking "USB/Serial conversion cable" on the selection screen of

Monitor mode selects “P-series" or ”M-series” simultaneously.
Select the COM port No. of the connected USB.
Last click .
* By pre-inserting the USB/Serial conversion cable in the USB port,

the USB COM port number will be displayed.
(2) Case of P-series select

Please turn on the power supply(circuit breaker) of air conditioning system after the following
Title screen is displayed.
After acquiring the information of air conditioning system, it automatically changes to the Operation
Monitor screen.
NOTE:
 If you mistake Series selection ,you can return to the Select monitor mode screen by selecting
"Return" button.
The FAN of the outdoor unit turns automatically after air conditioning system startup,
but it is not abnormal. This mode will be canceled by operating the unit with a remote controller etc.
21
(3) Case of M-series select
Please turn on the power supply(circuit breaker) of air conditioning system after the following
Title screen is displayed.
Select Country and the model / series name of the Outdoor unit to be connected and select
"OK"button.
At this time, by entering the model name in the Model input field, it is possible to narrow down the
model of the pull down list.
After acquiring the information of the unit, it automatically changes to the monitor screen.
NOTE:
 If you mistake Series selection ,you can return to the Select monitor mode screen by selecting
"Return" button.
22
1.4.4 Starting the On-Line Monitor(Centralized Controller connection)
To use the maintenance tool via Centralized Controller(Network), license registration for the Centralized
Controller to be used is necessary.
Purchasing the license No. for each Centralized Controller be used, conduct the license registration through
the Web browser (http://[IP address of the Centralized Controller]/ administrator.html). After selecting
"Maintenance tool" of the optional function on the Web Browser Screen displayed, enter the purchased
license No.
Refer to the following chapters in the “Web Browser Operation Manual” for detailed information about license
registration.
Centralized Controller G-50A, AG-150A or GB-50ADA:Cahpter4 [Registering a License for Optional
Functions]
Centralized Controller EB-50GU, AE-200, AE-50 or EW-50:Cahpter10 [License registration for optional
functions]
When connecting maintenance tool via Expansion Controller,register the license in AG-150A connected
by the Expansion Controller. (Only when AG-150A that registers the license is normally connected,
it is possible to connect via Expansion Controller.)
* To use the maintenance tool via Centralized Controller (Only for LAN mode and Dialup connection mode),
please check a setup of Internet Connection Firewall of PC. If the FIREWALL function is used,
communication will be normally impossible with Centralized Controller, and normal data will not be
displayed.
For detail, please refer to [6. How to change setting of Firewall].
In the case of permanently installing an anti-virus software and always started under this environment, the
fire wall function of this software may be activated sometimes. In such case, The normal communication
with Centralized Controller will be hindered not displaying data normally. When operating Maintenance Tool,
finish the anti-virus software once or remove the fire wall function.
23
In the case when on line monitoring is applied to air conditioning system via Centralized Controller by
connecting the Maintenance Tool to LAN locally.
NOTE:
・Though the warning shown on the right
appears, this is not a problem.
Simply click [Unblock] or
[Allow access].
(1) Clicking " Centralized Controller (Network)" on the selection

screen of Monitor mode selects "Local connection"
simultaneously. Last click " “.
24
(2) A message will appear prompting you to unblock
[MonitorManager].
If [MonitorManager] is already unblocked, check
the checkbox next To [Do not show this message
again] to not show this message.
Click [Close] to close the popup window.
(3) Next IP address input screen is displayed. Here,input IP

address of Centralized Controller connected to the air
conditioning sy stem of which operating
information is desired to monitor, and click on .
NOTE:
 It is required to set to the IP address in the same system
with Centralized Controller to be connected to Maintenance
Tool PC from [Control Panel].
25
1.4.4.2 In case for remote connection (Dialup)
In the case when on line monitoring is applied to local air conditioning system
(with Centralized Controller installed) from the maintenance tool in the remote place via public telephone
circuit.
* When utilizing Remote connection (Dialup),please prepare MODEM and DIAL-UP ROUTER (of a type
allowing data communication by receiving external telephone transmission) for the connection with the
public circuit in addition to the components used by Local connection (LAN).
For the system composition, please refer to the system diagram of (2)-1 in 1.1.2.
To use Remote connection (Dialup), it is previously required to register MODEM onto Windows and set
the information on the receiver (the dial-up router at Centralized Controller in the field) of the telephone
transmission onto the dial-up connection screen.
* If communication does not have for 10 minutes in remote connection, "Timeout occurred!" will be
displayed, if O.K. is pushed, a telephone circuit will be cut automatically and the Maintenance tool will be
ended.
(1) After clicking "Centralized Controller(Network)" on the

selection screen of Monitor mode, and click
"REMOTECONNECTION(Dialup)."
Last click " ".
(2) Next Remote Monitor screen is displayed.

Here select the connection name of the dial-up router
at Centralized Controller in the field
desired to be remotely connected.
It is being set previously on the dial-up connection screen.
Then input Dial-up user name and Dial-up password to
connect with the dial-up router,and click on .
After connecting to the telephone circuit, on-line monitoring

can be performed as same as the case when connected
with LAN.
26
1.4.5 Starting the Off-Line Monitor
When offline analysis is adapted to the data collected under ONLINE MODE.
(1) Clicking "Offline Analyze" on the selection screen of Monitor

mode.
Last click " ".
1.4.6 Using the Wide area access mode

Under the "Wide area access mode," the access method for remote connection can be registered to the
database of each customer enabling easy online connection with the air conditioning system of the customer
desired to be accessed.
[Remote access method]

- LAN : Accessing by directly connecting Maintenance Tool PC and Centralized Controller with LAN
(WAN).
- Dialup : Accessing by dialup connection to Centralized Controller via public network.
- Modem (MN Converter) : Accessing by connecting Modem to MN Converter via public telephone circuit.
After the online connection performed by any of the above methods, you may use the similar function as that
obtainable in the normal online connection.
While under the offline mode, customer information will be provided to the monitored data enabling only to
select a specified customer for display.
NOTE:
Even when connecting under the wide area access mode, cautions will be applied as same as under the
normal connection mode. You are kindly requested to observe the cautions described in the connection
method under normal mode as well. (1.4.1 - 1.4.4)
27
1.4.6.1 Online Connection
(1) Clicking “Online Connection (Wide area access mode)” on the

section screen of Monitor mode.
Last click " ".
(2) The customer registration screen will be displayed.

Register customer information in the order of
[1] -> [2] -> [3] hierarchically.
[1] Area name

[2] Customer name
[3] Air conditioning system name
& connection method
(a) Creating the [Area name] folder

1) When [Wide Area] is being focussed, the
sub-menu will be displayed by right-clicking.
2) Select [Add Area].
3) As the screen to enter the AREA name appears,
set a proper Area name and press [OK] to create
the Area folder.
(b) Creating the [Customer name] folder

1) Right-clicking the [Area name folder] to be
registered displays the sub-menu.
2) Select [Add Custormer].
3) As the screen to enter the Customer name
appears, set a proper customer name.
* In addition to the above mouse operation, the creation of [AREA name] and [Customer name] can be
set from the menu bar (File) or tool bar (Figure).
By applying the same operation procedure(right-clicking, menu bar, tool bar), each folder can be
deleted. Also the name of each folder can be changed.
28
Caution:
If a folder is deleted, all information (customer name, air conditioning system name, etc.) will be
deleted similarly.
(c) Setting the [Air conditioning system name]

1) Under the state when the [Customer name folder]
desired to be set on the air conditioning system is
focussed, the sub-menu will be displayed by
right-clicking the air conditioning system list at the
right screen.
2) Selecting [Create ...] displays [Setting screen of air
conditioning system].
[Setting screen of air conditioning system]
1) Set the system name.

2) Select the method to connect with the system.
- To connect by using LAN (WAN), enter the IP
address of Centralized Controller to be
connected. (Same as 1.4.4.1)
- To connect by using Dial-up, select the
[Connection name] of dialup router of the local
Centralized Controller being previously set on
the dialup connection screen of Windows. And
enter [User name] and [Password] for the
connection with the dialup router, and lastly
enter the IP address of Centralized Controller.
(Same as1.4.4.2)
- To connect remotely with MN Converter and Modem, select [Modem(MN Converter)].
3) Enter special notes if any on the comment column.
After entering and selecting the above, press [OK].
Set various information as required by repeating the items

(a)~(c) above.
Using the area selecting section allows you to extract the
only area desired to display.
29
(3) Focussing on the air conditioning system desired to be
connected and pressing [Connect] will start the
procedure for connection. After completing the normal
connection, the screen moves to the online main screen
allowing normal online operation.
However when the connection method uses
[Modem(MN Converter)], the screen of the Modem
remote connection will appear. In this case, select the
Modem to be connected and proceed the connection
procedure.(Refer to 1.4.2.2.)
1.4.6.2 Offline Analyze
(1) Clicking “Offline Analyze (Wide area access mode)” on the

section screen of Monitor mode.
Last click " ".
30
1.4.7 Ending the Maintenance Tool
1.4.7.1 Ending the On-Line Monitor
(1) Open the Main Screen.
(2) Click on [File] on the menu bar.
(3) Click on [Return] in the sub-menu.
(4) The message “Are you sure you want to finish

maintenance tool?” will appear.
Click on .
The On-Line Monitor will end and the Windows screen will
appear.
*At ending of Maintenance Tool, the telephone circuit will

automatically be disconnected.
* Clicking returns to the [selection screen of Monitor mode].
NOTE:
In case of connection using USB / Serial conversion cable, Main screen is not displayed and,
the Select Monitor mode screen is displayed instead. Please refer to 1.4.7.3.
1.4.7.2 Ending the Off-Line Monitor
(1) Open the Off-line Analyze Screen.
(2) Click on .
(3) The message “Are you sure you want to finish

maintenance tool?” will appear.
Click on .
* When finishing Offline Screen immediately after deleting data,

a message of "Finishing Maintenance Tool !!" may
sometime be displayed. The internal data is now under
arrangement. Offline Screen will automatically be finished
after completing this process. Please wait a while.
* Clicking returns to the [selection screen of Monitor mode].
31
1.4.7.3 Ending the Mode select Monitor
(1) Open the Select Monitor Mode screen.
(2) Click on .
32
2 Terms for Each Section
2.1 Design of Screen

The design of the screen is shown below.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
System Diagram
Function Display /
Operating Section
- Title Bar
Displays the title of the screen.
- Menu Bar
Displays the functions that can be performed using the current
screen.
Click on an item and a sub-menu or message screen will appear, as
shown in the illustration.
If a sub-menu appears, further function selections can be made.

(Example of what the screen looks like
when option is clicked.)
- Function Display / Operating Section
Displays the contents of the screen and the operation to be performed.
NOTE:
In case of connection using USB / Serial conversion cable, this screen is not displayed.
2.2 Operating Method

The following operations are performed by mouse.
(1) Click
Align the mouse pointer with the desired button and press the left button on the mouse. This is known as
a click.
In general, all Maintenance Tool operations are performed with click operations.
(2) Drag
A drag is when the mouse pointer is moved while the left button is held down.
If you desired to check the bottom screen when two or more screens are being displayed on top of each
other, align the mouse pointer with the title bar of the top screen and drag it. The bottom screen can now
be seen.
33
3 On-Line Monitor Operating Method
3.1 On-Line Monitor Screen Transfer Remote error notification
Title Screen
Setting and Monitoring
Main Screen DIDO/AI/PI controllers
Setting the Values for

Indoor Unit Functions
Connecting Information Malfunction Log Optional Setting
Operation Monitor Pre-error Data Operation Control
NOTE:
In case of connection using USB / Serial conversion cable, Operation monitor is displayed after Title screen.
34
3.2 Function Chart
Connecting Information --------------------------------------- [Refer to 3.7]
This allows monitoring of the indoor units connected to the outdoor unit and of the interlock units and
the operation group SC connected to indoor units.
Or this allows monitoring of a network information of the Expansion Controller (PAC-YG50ECA-J) and
that upper controller's connection informations.
Operation Monitor ----------------------------------------------- [Refer to 3.8]

This allows monitoring of the operating condition of the unit and operating data. The operation data
obtained will be shown in the form of a graph.
This also allows the display of the refrigerant circuit diagram.
Utilizing the mail communication mode in addition, the operation monitoring data collected by
Centralized Controller can periodically be transmitted to remote mail servers, and it can be referred as
the off-line data later.
*The Mail communication mode can not be used with MN Converter connected.
Malfunction Log --------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 3.9]

This allows monitoring of the ten most recent errors of the unit.
Optional Setting --------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 3.10]

This allows use of functions such as self-diagnosis monitoring, operation control, and DipSW Monitor
.
Operation Control ------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 3.11]
This allows the same operation as with the remote controller.
OC Date / Time Setting ------------------------------------------ [Refer to 3.12]

A setup of the present time can be performed to all outdoor units at the same time.
Free contact of indoor unit ------------------------------------- [Refer to 3.13]

When utilizing the [Indoor unit free contact mode] which uses the external input/output of Free Plan
indoor unit (Building-Multi) together with Centralized Controller and TG 2000A, the contact action of the
indoor unit can be tested with this function.
Remote error notification ---------------------------------------- [Refer to 3.14]

When an error occurs in the air conditioning unit, the remote error notification function allows previously
registered destinations to be automatically notified of the error via telephone lines. (This function can only
be used with the MN Converter CMS-MNG-E.)
Setting and Monitoring DIDO/AI/PI Controllers ---------- [Refer to 3.15]

Settings and monitoring DIDO Controller (PAC-YG66DCA), AI Controller (PAC-YG63MCA), and PI
Controller (PAC-YG60MCA) can be made. (PI Controllers can be used only for monitoring.)
DIDO Controllers and AI Controllers have an interlock control function.
DIDO Controllers can also change the operation status of M-NET devices (such as indoor units, DIDO
Controllers) by sending operation commands. DIDO Controllers can output contacts on DIDO Controllers
themselves depending on the change in input contact status.
AI Controllers can change the operation status of M-NET devices (such as indoor units, DIDO
Controllers) by sending operation commands depending on the change in measurement values.
“Interlock operation conditions” for the “interlock control function” can be set on Maintenance Tool.
Setting the Values for Indoor Unit Functions ------------- [Refer to 3.16]
The preset settings for each function of the connected indoor units can be displayed, set, or changed.
Compressor operating time monitor ------------------------- [Refer to 3.17]

The compressor operating time of the outdoor unit can be monitored.
35
Initial Settings and Monitoring AHC ADAPTER ------------------------ [Refer to 3.18]
Initial settings and monitoring AHC ADAPTER
Fixed value setting of compressor frequency -------------------------- [Refer to 3.19]

This allows lock the compressor to a fixed frequency.
-Connecting to P/M-series
In case of connection using USB / Serial conversion cable, the applicable items are following.
・Operation Monitor[Refer to 3.8]
・Operation Control [Refer to 3.11].
36
3.3 Address Search Method
3.3.1 Address Search Method Selection
(1) Start the M-NET Maintenance Tool and the Select The Address Searching Method Screen will appear
after the Title Screen.
(2) Click on either or to select the address

search method.
* Automatic Search
The Maintenance Tool automatically searches for
and displays information about units connected to
the M-Net transmission line.
* Manual Search
The user optionally searches for the units connect to the
M-Net transmission line.
3.3.2 Automatic Searching

(1) Click on and the Automatic Address
Searching Screen will appear.
- The time required to complete the automatic search
will depend on the PC.
- The address currently being searched for is
displayed as [Address]. Up to 250 addresses can
be searched for.
- Click on to end automatic search.
The Main Screen will appear.
(2) When automatic search has ended, the Main

Screen will appear.
Returning to the Main Screen enables the [Function Buttons].
3.3.3 Manual Searching

(1) Click on and the Main Screen will appear.
(2) Click on the [Button] of the address desired and

searching will begin.
NOTE:
When a system is changed, please search an address after re-starting a Maintenance tool and
Centralized Controller.
37
3.4 Main Screen
The operations in 3.3 Address Search Method have made information about the units known.
The [Unit Attributes] are displayed on top of the address buttons.
The Function Buttons are now enabled at this time.
(1) When the cursor is set to the address where the attribute is displayed, the unit information and
refrigeration chart will be displayed in the [Unit Information Displya Columns].
Unit Information Display Columns
* There are the following restrictions in the refrigeration chart.

-Corresponding units are OC(OS) , BC(BS) , IC , LC(Lossnay) , FU(Fresh Master) & RC(Remote
Controller). Other units are not displayed.
-The refrigeration chart is reproduced based on the connection information of each unit. It is different from
the actual piping connections & transmission lines.
-The heavy line in the refrigeration chart shows connections between outdoor units , indoor units &
BCcontrollers.
-The thin line in the refrigeration chart shows the connections between indoor units , remote controllers &
system controllers.
-The double line in the refrigeration chart shows interlocking connections between indoor units , fresh
master units & Lossnay units.
-Only the refrigeration chart for the selected outdoor unit is displayed.
-Unless the addresses for all units have been retrieved , the refrigeration chart will not be displayed fully.
NOTE:
The colors in which some attributes (OC, OS, IC, LC, and FU) are displayed change according to the
changes in the operation status. They will be displayed in black when the units are stopped; red, when
they are in error; and green, in all other status (i.e., in operation).
Some models (freezers, Mr. Slim etc.) do not support this function, in which case the attributes will be
displayed in gray.
Stopped Error Other status Unsupported
38
If the error code is displayed in blue, you can view the troubleshooting (PDF document) by clicking the
error code
Click
Note
・Only some City Multi models support the troubleshooting
function.
Non-City Multi models such as refrigerators and chillers do
not support the function.
・To use the troubleshooting function, Adobe Acrobat Reader
must be installed on your PC.
The troubleshooting function will not work properly on a PC
without Adobe Acrobat Reader installed.
・To display the troubleshooting for PUMY-series units, click the
error code, and select the model name in the model selection
screen.
If the model name is not selected, the troubleshooting will not
be displayed.
39
(2)The menu bar will display [File], [Option] ,[Print] and [Help].
- Click on [File] and ”Save System Information” and “Return” sub-menu can be selected.
Click on “Save System Information” and the message “Are you sure you want to save the System
Information?” will appear.
Clicking displays the screen to save data. Change the data name as required and save it.
You may enter your comment also.
Click on to return to the Main Screen.
[Refer to 5.1 System Information Data.]
Click on “Return” to end the operation of the On-line monitor.

[Refer to 1.4.6.1 Ending the On-Line Monitor ]
- Click on [Option] and “Automatic searching” and the “Stop mail communication” sub-menus can be
selected. * At the connection of MN Converter, “Stop mail communication” is not displayed.
Click on “Automatic searching ” and the message “Start the automatic searching. Is it OK?” will
appear.
Click on to perform automatic searching or click on to return to the Main Screen.
For more information about automatic searching, refer to [3.3 Address Search Method 3.3.2 Automatic
Searching].
Click on “Stop mail communication” ,and the Stop mail communication Screen will appear.
Clicking on stops the mail transfer processing of operation
monotor data to remote mail servers.
After a while, the setting completion message appears. Clicking on
returns to the main screen.
Clicking on returns to the main screen directly.
- Clicking on [Print] prints out the display currently shown on the screen.
- Click on [Help] and "Explanation of Terminology" and "Operation Method" sub-menus can be
selected.
[Refer to 3.6.1 Connecting Information of outdoor units 3.6.1.2 (2) ”Menu Bar”]
NOTE:
"Stop mail communication" is a function to stop the operation monitor mail transmission of Centralized
Controller under [mail communication mode] set in Chapter 3.7. It has no relation with (2)-2 E-mail
connection mode of 1.1.2 On-line Monitor (via Centralized Controller).
40
3.5 Function Selection Operations
(1) First, click on the desired [Function Selection
Button].
(2) Next, click on the Unit to Operate.
(3) The screen will move to the various operation

screens.
(4) If the wrong function selection button is clicked, click

on that button once again and the other function
selection buttons will be enabled.
3.6 Display Mode Change

(1)Click on .
“List mode” then “Classic mode” then “Diagram mode” and then “List mode” and changes the screen.
(2) The menu display mode, "List mode", "classic mode" ," Diagram mode ", and each can be switched.
List mode
Diagram mode Classic mode
41
3.7 Connecting Information
* Items Performed Here
- Indoor units connected to outdoor units, interlock units and the operation group SC (such as system
controller and remote controller) connected to indoor units can be monitored here.
(Refer to 3.7.1 Connecting Information of the outdoor unit)
- Network information of the Expansion Controller (PAC-YG50ECA-J) and that Centralized Controller's
connection informations can be monitored here.
(Refer to 3.7.2 Connecting Information of the Centralized Controller and Expansion Controller)
3.7.1 Connecting Information of the outdoor unit
･Indoor units connected to outdoor units, interlock units and the operation group SC (such as system
controller and remote controller) connected to indoor units can be monitored here.
･Select and double-click the interlock units and operation group SC (remote controller only), the
Connecting Information Screen will display as a pop-up menu.
The screen displays addresses and attributes of the units connected to the select unit.
3.7.1.1 Screen Transfer Operation
(1) Click on on the Main Screen.
(2) Click on the for the outdoor unit to be monitored.

- Only outdoor units and the Expansion Controller
(PAC-YG50ECA-J) can be selected.
(3) Momentarily, the message “Monitoring! Please wait

for a moment.” will appear.
NOTE:
Even with the direct expansion type, when units other than the outdoor unit and other than
the Expansion Controller(PAC-YG50ECA-J) are selected by (2), the screen returns to the
Main Screen (where it waits for function selection input).
3.7.2(2)
(4) Momentarily, the Connecting Information Screen will
appear.
(5) Click on to end the Connecting Information

Screen.
(6) The message ”Finish the Connecting Information”

will appear.
Click on to end or click on to continue.
Click on and the Main Screen appears.
(5)
42
3.7.1.2 Screen Functions and Operation
(1) Double-click on the interlock unit and operation group

SC (such as system controller and remote controller),
the Operation System SC Connecting Information
Screen (in case operation group SC) will appear as a
pop-up menu.
The screen displays addresses and attributes of each connected unit.
NOTE:
The BC controller(BC),Subsidiary outdoor unit(OS) are indicated in the outdoor unit column.
(2) "Menu Bar"

[Return] and [Help] appear in the menu bar.
Click on [Return] to end the Connecting Information Screen and return to the Main Screen.
Click on [Help] and the Help Screen appear.
- Click on "Contents" and the index for the Help Screen

appear.
- Click on "Back" and the unit returns to its previous operating
state.
- Click on "Print" and the currently displayed screen is printed.
(Caution: Do not print while on-line. There is a chance that
it could interfere with operation.)
- Click on "Term" and Explanation of Terminology Screen
appear.
Abbreviations, codes and other terms are explained on the
explanation of terminology screen.
43
3.7.2 Connecting Information of the Centralized Controller and Expansion Controller
･Network information of the Expansion Controller (PAC-YG50ECA-J) and that Centralized Controller 's
connection informations can be monitored here.
3.7.2.1 Screen Transfer Operation
(2) Click on the for the Expansion Controller or the Centralized Controller to be monitored.
NOTE:
Even with the direct expansion type, when units other than the outdoor unit and other than
the Expansion Controller(PAC-YG50ECA-J) are selected by (2), the screen returns to the
Main Screen (where it waits for function selection input).
(3) Momentarily, the ECL Connecting Information Screen

will appear. 3.7.2.2(1)
The monitor result to the Expansion Controller is
displayed. 3.7.2.2(2)
Refer to [3.7.2.2 Content of the Display Item] for
the content of the display item.
(4) Click on to end the ECL Connecting

Information Screen. (4)
3.7.2.2 Content of the Display Item
(1) Content of the "EC" Item

Selected Expansion Controller's Network informations is displayed.
･IP Address ：The Expansion Controller's Internet protocol address.
･Subnet Mask ：Subnet mask value to the Expansion Controller's Internet Protocol address.
･Gateway Address ：Gateway address on network where Expansion Controller is connected.
･S/W Version ：The Expansion controller's software version number.
･DB No. ：The Expansion controller's DB No..
(2) Content of the " Centralized Controller " Item

Connection informations of selected Expansion Controller's upper controller is displayed.
(The setting value of the Expansion Controller is displayed, excluding Connection Column.)
･IP Address ：The upper controller's Internet protocol address.
･Attribute ：The upper controller's attribute data.
･DB No. ：The upper controller's database number.
･Connection ：Connected state at upper controller and the Expansion Controller.
Connectting ：The Expansion Controller and the upper controller is
connecting now.
Waiting for connection ：The Expansion Controller and the upper controller is
not connecting now.
Unconnectting ：The Expansion Controller doesn't have the upper controller's
registration.
* When the Connection Column is a "Unconnectting", that are displayed by the blank, excluding it.
44
3.8 Operation Monitor
- Monitors the operating condition and operating data of the current units every minute.
This information can be displayed and saved.
* When an excessively large number of the objective unit for monitoring exists, the monitoring interval
may exceed 1 minute (70s, 80s, ---).
* When the remaining storage capacity is getting insufficient during Operation Monitoring, Warning
Screen will appear.
In this case, suspend the Operation Monitoring, move to Offline screen and delete
unnecessary data to keep a proper capacity.
* In case of connection using USB / Serial conversion cable, Operation monitor is displayed after Title
screen. For this reason, Screen Transfer Operation[Refer to 3.8.1] and Operative diagnostic [Refer to
3.8.4] is not displayed.
3.8.1 Screen Transfer Operation

(2) Click on the unit to be monitored.

If only outdoor unit is selected here, the operating data for the units connected to the outdoor unit
will be automatically monitored.
The maximum number which can carry out a monitor changes with selected models.
An error message will appear if the limited number of units is exceeded.
(3) After the units to be monitored have been selected,

click on .
(4) The message “Monitoring! Please wait for a moment.” will

appear.
After a while, the screen to select monitor method appears.
When it is judged that monitoring with one minute cycle may
not be performed because of many units to be monitored, a
message of [The monitoring cycle will be [* *] seconds
due to too many IC units for monitoring. ---] will be
displayed automatically. To continue the monitoring, click
[Yes], while to suspend it once to reduce the quantity of units
for monitoring, click [NO]. Reduction of one IC can minimize
the cycle time by about one second.
* In "MN converter connection", it shifts to (7).
(5) When desiring to observe the operation data immediately,

select [Realtime Monitor Mode] and then click on .
Select [Mail communication Mode] to observe the operation
data by the off-line monitor later, after mail-transmitting the operation
data beforehand by using the mail transmission function.
45
When [Mail communication Mode] is selected, the setting items of
mail communication will be displayed.
- From: Mail Address

Set the mail address of the
Centralized Controller in the
[From: Mail Address] field. When sending mail via an ISP,
set the mail address allocated by the ISP. When the mail server
resides on the LAN, obtain the mail address from the LAN
administrator.
* When sending mail via an ISP, a user contract with the ISP is required.
- To: Mail Address

Set the mail addresses of the recipients to which mail is sent.
* The mail address of recipient (To:) acquires and sets up the address only for Maintenance Tool.
- SMTP Server IP
Set the mail server IP address in the Mail Server Information [SMTP Server IP] field. When sending
mail via an ISP, set the ISP address of the ISP mail server. When the mail server resides on the
LAN, obtain the IP address from the LAN administrator.
* If the only information available on the ISP mail server is a domain name, use a PC to connect to
the Internet, open a DOS prompt and type “ping domain name”. Set the IP address that is displayed
as the ping response.
- Monitor Finish Data

Set the date of monitor data transmit period.
- Mail Sending Interval

Set the transmit interval of monitor data (max 240 min).
Then click on .
After a while, it returns to the main screen, but the mail transmission to remote receivers will be
performed by Centralized Controller automatically.
* At the connection of MN Converter “the screen to select monitor method” is not displayed. Real-time
Monitor Mode is always commenced not allowing to use [Mail communication Mode].
(6) In the case of real time monitoring, the message “Monitoring. Please wait for a moment.” will appear
again.
(7) Momentarily, the Operation Status Monitor Screen

will appear.
46
(8) Click on to end the Operating Status Monitor Screen.
The message “Finish the operation status monitor” will appear.
Click on to end or click on to not end.
Clicking displays the screen to save data.
Change the data name as required and save it. You may
enter your comment also.
Clicking does not allow the data to be saved.
Returning to the main screen.
3.8.2 Screen Functions and Operations

- The operating condition and operating data are displayed every minute.
- The [Current Time] is displayed. The [Monitor ID] is displayed when saving data.
[Refer to 5.2 Operation Status Monitor Data]
(1) ”Operation Buttons”

allows operation in the same manner as a remote controller.
[Refer to 3. 11 Operation Control]
Click on to end the operation status monitor and return to the Main Screen.
[Refer to 3.8.1(8)]
(2) ”Menu Bar”

[Return], [Time Search], [Print], [View], [Option],[Drive Operation], [Graph],[Window] and [Help] are
displayed on the menu bar.
- Click on [Return] to end the Operation Status Monitor

and return to the Main Screen.
NOTE:
・In case of connecting to M-series with USB/Serial
conversion cable, Click on [Return] button,the screen
return to the selection screen of monitor mode.
- Clicking [Time Search] open the “Time Searching”
- Click on [Print] and an explanation about “Print” and

“Copy to Clipboard” will be displayed.
- Clicking [Graph] open the “Spreadsheet and Graph

Setting”.
- Clicking [Drive Operation] open the “Operation Control Screen”.

NOTE:
・In case of connecting to M-series with USB/Serial conversion cable, the Drive
Operation is not displayed on the menu bar.
- Click on [View] and then select "Switch Trend Form" or "Switch Classic Form" from the sub-menu.
Change the display format.
NOTE:
・In case of connection using USB/Serial conversion cable, the View is not displayed on
the menu bar.
- Click on [Help] and an explanation about "Terminology" and "Operation Method" will be displayed.
47
(3) “ Buttons”
Toggles the display of the retrieved data.

This feature is only form the trend.
This feature is supported in the "Operation Data"
screen only.
- Clicking In the data obtained shows the oldest data.
- Clicking Display the previous data.

Direction keys on the keyboard can be used
for switching.
- Clicking Display the next data.

Direction keys on the keyboard can be used
for switching.
- Clicking Data obtained in the most recent data show.
48
- Operating Status Monitor Screen(For MN Converter/Centralized Controller connection)
This screen displays the operation status and the operation data every minute.
The Operating Status Monitor Screen consists of multiple sub windows. As shown below, each sub
window either displays the operation status of a single unit or of multiple units.
Sub windows can be maximized, minimized, or moved.
The operation status of multiple units are displayed on a single sub window.
Each row displays the status of a unit.
A scroll bar will appear if a sub window contains more units than can be displayed all at once.
The operation status of a single unit is displayed on a single sub window.

The operation status of the unit is displayed in multiple rows.
49
Clicking the [View] button in the menu bar will switch between the two display formats: [Trend] screen
and [Classic] screen.
[Trend] screen [Classic] screen
Note
On the [Trend] screen, a selected cell can be highlighted in different color.
Clicking a cell will change its color between green and white.
The selection will be cleared when the operation monitoring is cancelled.
Note
Some models do not support the display of data in the Trend display format. If the Trend display
format is selected on the models that do not support this function, data will be displayed in the
Classic display format.
50
- Operating Status Monitor Screen(For USB/Serial converter cable connection)
After displaying the title screen, the screen will change to the Operation Monitor screen.
The display screen when P / M-series is connected is as follows.
<P-series>
Note
・Refer to 3.8.2 “Screen Functions and Operations for the operation” about operation on
the Operation monitor screen.
・Refer to 8“Explanation of Terminology” about the official name of the display items.
<M-series>
Outdoor unit
information
Note
・In case of RAC,SUZ, the indoor unit and the outdoor unit information are displayed in one window.
・In case of MXZ,
-Outdoor unit information is displayed duplicately in each indoor unit window.
-The window is line up in order of A room ,B room,・・・ from the top.
- Regardless of the number of connected indoor units,
Windows is displayed the maximum number of outdoor units that can be connected
・Depending on the timing of monitoring, it may take invalid value when monitoring at the first time.
・Refer to 3.8.2 “Screen Functions and Operations for the operation” about operation on
the Operation monitor screen.( It does not correspond to some functions such as operation)
・Refer to 8“Explanation of Terminology” about the official name of the display items.
・Depending on the model, Monitorable data is different.
And unmonitorable data is shown as blank.
51
3.8.3 Refrigerant circuit diagram
- Some City Multi models support the display of the refrigerant circuit diagram.
The display formats of the operation status and the operation data can be switched by using tabs.
The refrigerant circuit diagram tab displays the operation status and the operation data along with a
refrigerant circuit diagram.
Tab
Select the Operation data tab Select the Refrigerant Circuit Diagram
tab
Note
・Only some City Multi models support the display of the refrigerant circuit diagram.
Non-City Multi models such as refrigerators and chillers do not support the display of the
diagram.
If none of the units monitored support the display of the diagram, the tabs of the display
formats will not appear, and the operation status and the operation data will be displayed in a
chart.
・The refrigerant circuit diagram will be displayed when [Display refrigerant circuit diagram] in
[Option] in the main screen is set to [Active].
When [Display refrigerant circuit diagram] is set to [Inactive], the tabs of the display formats
will not appear, and the operation status and the operation data will be displayed in a chart.
・The refrigerant circuit diagram is displayed only when the Operation Status Monitor Screen
is accessed by selecting an OC.
・Only one refrigerant system can be displayed in the refrigerant circuit diagram. If two or
more refrigerant systems are monitored, only a refrigerant system with the lowest OC address
will be displayed.
・Only units that are monitored in the main screen are displayed in the refrigerant circuit diagram
of ICs connected to OCs.
・The refrigerant circuit diagram indicates the refrigerant flow and actuator status in animation or
color. These animations and colors only represent the normal unit operation and may differ
from the actual unit operation.
52
Caution
・To display the refrigerant circuit diagram of PUMY-series
units, open the model selection screen from [Model
Selection] in the operation monitor screen, and select
the model name of the PUMY-series units.
If the model name is not selected, the refrigerant
circuit diagram of the PUMY-series units will not be
displayed.
・When [Display refrigerant circuit diagram] in [Option]
in the main screen is set to [Inactive], the [Model
Selection] tab will not be displayed, and the model
name of the PUMY-series units cannot be selected.
53
- When the refrigerant circuit diagram tab is selected
This tab displays the operation status and the operation data along with a refrigerant circuit
diagram.
When the Y/WY series or PUMY series units are monitored, the tab displays the outdoor units on
the left side and the indoor units on the right side of the screen.
When the R2/WR2 series units are monitored, the tab displays the outdoor units on the left side, the
BC controllers in the center, and the indoor units on the right side of the screen.
Y/WY series or PUMY series that switch cooling and heating
Outdoor units Indoor units

R2/WR2 series that allow simultaneous cooling and heating
Outdoor units BC Controllers Indoor units
54
In the refregerant circuit diagram screen, each part of the unit is displayed in animation or color that
represents the following status.
Part Status
Refrigerant An animation will be shown of changes in the refrigerant flow according to the pressure.
pipe
High pressure Low pressure Intermediate pressure
Note
An animation of the refrigerant flow represents the flow in an ideal pressure
condition corresponding to the control mode of the outdoor unit. The actual
pressure condition and refrigerant flow may differ from the animation.
Solenoid The opening status of the solenoid valve is indicated in the following colors.
valve
Open Closed
Heat A color of the heat exchanger changes according to the operation status of the outdoor unit.
exchanger
High pressure Low pressure Stopping mode
Fan An animation of the fan operation status changes as follows.
Stopped In operation
(The fun rotates.)
55
The refrigerant circuit diagram can be enlarged and reduced by using a slider at the bottom right of
the screen.
Slider
Move the slider to the left to reduce the diagram. Move the slider to the right to enlarge the diagram.
56
A scroll bar will appear when the enlarged refrigerant circuit diagram does not fit the screen. Scroll
the window to see the rest of the diagram.
The scroll bar will appear beside the

Enlarge the diagram indoor unit area when the Y/WY series
or PUMY series units are monitoired,
or beside the BC controller and the
indoor unit areas when the R2/WR2
series units are monitored.
The screen can be scrolled vertically
by using the scroll bar at the right of the
screen, and scrolled horizontally by
using the scroll bar at the bottom.
The scroll bar will appear beside the outdoor unit area when
the diagram is enlarged further.
The screen can be scrolled vertically by using the scroll bar
at the left of the screen.
57
* About LM ADAPTER
Operation Monitor
Item Performed Here
Operation status of LM ADAPTER, current values of network variable and configration property,setting status of
switch or the like.
[Refer to 3.7 Operation Monitor]
1. Screen Transfer Operation

To move to the screen monitoring LM ADAPTER operation,
select LM ADAPTER from the main screen.
(LM ADAPTER is expressed by )
When LM ADAPTER is selected,you may not monitor
other units.
Same operation procedure as that of other units is applicable
to other main screens.
2. Screen Functions and Operations

- The operating condition and operating data are displayed every minute.
- [Current time] will be displayed.During a time when saving data,[Monitor ID] will also be displayed.
[Refer to 5.2 Operation Status Monitor Data.]
Menu Bar
(1) [Operation Button]
[Operation control] will not be displayed.
Click on [Return] to end the operation status monitor
and return to the Main Screen.
[Refer to 3.7.1(8)]
(2) [Menu Bar]

[Return] , [Print] , [Graph] and [Help] are displayed
on the menu bar.
Neither [Graph] nor [Ref.] may be used.
Other menus are same as that of other units.
Operation Button
58
3. Introduction to the screen
Display Contents
<Function set switch>
Set status of function selector switch
0:OFF setting 1:ON setting
<Extension switch>
Set status of extension function selector switch
0:OFF setting 1:ON setting
<M-NET address switch>
Set status of M-NET address switch on LM ADAPTER
SWU1:The units digit SWU2:The tens digit
<Control flag>
Internal processing status of LM ADAPTER
FLAG:Control flag status
ERROR:Error flag status
[M]:M-NET communication processing flag
[LON]:LonWorks communication processing flag
0:Reset 1:Set
<General input>
General input status of LM ADAPTER
0:Normal 1:Detecting
<Power failure flag>
Indicating power failure detecting status of LM
ADAPTER
0:Powering 1:Interrupting
<Binding status : nvoOnOff_n>
Unit address Binding information on operation command input
(Unit digit) 0:No binding
1:Binding
Unit address(Tens digit)
59
Display Contents
<Binding status : nvoOnOff_n>
Unit address Binding information on operation status output
(Unit digit) 0:No binding
1:Binding
<IC connection status>

Unit address Connection status of air conditioner(indoor unit)
(Unit digit) 0:Not connected
1:Connected

Unit address <nv Transmitting/receiving data>
(Tens digit) Latest value of network variables
[Rcv] Received value of operation command input
[Snd] Output value of operation status
St : state field data
V1 : value field data
Unit address(Unit digit)
Display example
[Rcv] [Snd]
St Vl St Vl
stopping 00 00 00 00
Operating 01 C8 01 C8
<nci set value>

Set value of configuration property
60
3.8.3 Trend graph
Click on [graph] open the "Spreadsheet and Graph Setting".
NOTE:
This function can only operate when the online mode.
- Display Items -
(a) Select the unit you want to see in the graph.
(b) Select the data you want to see in the graph.
(c) Threshold for each data set.
- Graphs –
(d) Select the data you want to graph.
(e) Set the upper line and lower line of the graph.
(f) Click the save button to export Display Items.

The exported file is an archive with the file extension “gds”.
Click the load button and select “gds”file to import Display Items.
(g) Click the OK button to display a spreadsheet

and graph.
61
3.8.4 Operative Diagnostic Test Function for the SVB on the BC Unit Solenoid Valve
Block
- With respect to the information provided in the Service Technical News (SWE12040), diagnostic test is run
to automatically determine whether the SVB on the BC unit solenoid valve block is operating normally.
• On the main screen, select the only OC of the system which is the target of diagnosis, and start an
operation monitor.
To run diagnostics for multiple systems at the same time, select the OC for each system.
*If the Operation Monitor is started with only an OC selected, the Operation Monitor will monitor operation
for all units connected to the selected OC.
• Check the Operation Status Monitor screen to ensure that all units connected to the selected OC appear.
62
• [BC Auto Diagnosis] button is clicked from the option of a menu bar to open the [BC Unit Diagnostic
Function] screen.
It will take approximately 30 minutes for the diagnostic test to complete.
Click on the [Start] button to start the BC diagnostic test.
• When all the units connected to OC are not displayed on an operation monitoring screen, the following
screens are displayed and diagnosis is not started.
• The screen shown below will appear while the BC diagnostic test is running.
Click on the [Cancel] button to stop and exit the BC diagnostic test.
63
• The test results page appears once the BC diagnostics test has finished.
A “OK” result is listed in the Result column for solenoid valves that are operating normally.
A “NG” result is listed in the Result column for solenoid valves that are not operating normally.
A “—“ result is listed in the Result column for solenoid valves that could not be tested properly due to a
communications error.
A “judgment is impossible “ result is listed in the Result column for solenoid valves that could not be tested
properly due to ctrl mode changed to the [stop] or [error] or [defrost] or [off] during diagnosis.
A “Diagnosis is interrupted “ result is listed in the Result column for solenoid valves that could not be tested.
When "Diagnosis is interrupted" fails in the unit stop processing at the time of a diagnostic start, it is
displayed.
The results of the diagnostic test are saved automatically.

The name of the file is “BCAutoDiagResult_[Test Date and Time].CSV”, where “Test Date and Time” is
replaced with the actual date and time of the test in numeric format.
Click and hold down the [Return] button to end the diagnostic test function.
Once the diagnostic test function has ended, the Operation Monitor data is saved and the Operation Monitor
closed.
NOTICE
• There are four types of units to be tested, IC, FU, AU and BU.
• Only the solenoid valve of the sub port to which the unit being monitored by the Operation
Monitor is connected will be checked during the diagnostic test.
• Once the diagnostic test has ended, make sure to close the Operation Monitor and save
the Operation Monitor data.
• The actuators are locked while the BC diagnostic test is running.
Always make sure to use the proper procedures when closing the Maintenance Tool.
If the Maintenance Tool is not closed properly, the actuators will remain in the locked
position, which could cause the air-conditioning equipment to malfunction.
• Do not attempt to change the operating status of any of the devices in the indoor units by a
remote controller or other means while the diagnostics test is running.
Diagnostic test results may not be accurate if operating status or conditions are changed
during the test.
• Turn the Scheduler function OFF if there is a system controller connected.
• Setting of a unit is changed during the diagnosis and it will not switch back to the original
setting after the diagnosis is completed.
Write down the settings before starting the diagnosis, if necessary.
IC and FU : Change the operation mode “Heating” and the fan speed “High”.
BU : Change the set temperature 70℃.
*Do not set up the preset temperature limit by the external input of BU
Diagnostic test results may not be accurate.
• Should the diagnostic test end and close out partway through due to the PC freezing,
restart the diagnostic test function.
64
3.9 Malfunction Log
- The malfunction log of the most recent 10 cases (except operation group SC)
(1) Click on from the function selection buttons on the Main Screen.
(2) Click on the units to be monitored (except operation group SC).
(3) The message “Monitoring. Please wait for a moment.” will appear.
(4) Momentarily, the Malfunction Log Screen will appear. 3.9.2(3) 3.9.2(1)
If the number of incidents in the malfunction log is
less than ten, [--] will appear in the attribute column
and [FFFF] will appear in the code column.
* Code
If the error code is displayed in blue, you can view
the troubleshooting (PDF document) by clicking the
error code
[Refer to 3.4 Main Screen.]
* Error detailed No.

Error detailed No. may be displayed on the right of an
error code by the model which carries out a monitor.
Refer to the service handbook for the implications of 3.9.2(2)
detailed No.
* When the monitor of the unit with a simple clock

function is carried out, the time which malfunction
generated, or the time when it was integrated to
unusual generating is displayed.
- When the unit has received a setup of time: The time which malfunction generated is displayed.
- When the unit has not received the setup of time: The addition time from a power supply injection
when malfunction occur is displayed.
NOTE:
While the power supply of a unit turns off, time does not count the simple clock function of a unit.
Therefore, the display of the time which malfunction generated, and addition time will be a mere
rough standard.
Whether the power of the unit turned off or not can be checked on the flag display.
* About a flag display

- When a flag is “1” : The state which the power supply does not turn off after receiving a setup of
time.
- When a flag is “0” : A setup of time is not received. Or the state which the power failure generated
after receiving a setup of time.
65
* About PC Time/Unit Time
- PC Time : The present time set as the Maintenance Tool PC.
- Unit Time : The present time which carried out the monitor from the unit with a simple clock function.
NOTE:
When the system controller which transmits a setup of time to a unit periodically is not connected, a
year and moon data are not updated. In this case, the date column of unit time maybe counted up till
the 9999th.
(5) Click on to end the Malfuncion Log Screen.

The message “Close the malfunction log display? ” will be displayed.
Click on to end or click on to not end.
is clicked, the Main Screen is returned.
NOTE:
When Centralized Controller is connected to the system, the malfunction log of OC is eliminated.
Please check the malfunction log in Centralized Controller to check the malfunction log of OC.
3.9.2 Screen Functions and Operations
(1) Click on and the Address Change Screen appear.

Click on to change the address.
The unit attributes are displayed at this time.
(If there is no unit at the address given, the attributes are not given.)
Once the address has been set, click on .

The units are changed.
If there is no unit at the address given, the message “Unit doesn’t

exist in this address. Retry again.” will appear.
Click on to return to the Address Change Screen.
(2) Click on and the message “Clear the malfunction log. Is it OK?” will appear.
Click on to clear or click on to not clear.
(3) ”Menu Bar”

The menu bar displays [File] and [Help].
- By clicking [File] and then selecting “Save as …” from the sub-menu, the Malfunction Log data will be
output and saved in the CSV format. This data can not be viewed on the offline screen.
- Click on [File] and then select “Return“ from the sub-menu to end the Malfunction Log Screen and
return to the Main Screen.
- Click on [Help] and an explanation about "Terminology" and "Operation Method" will be appear.
* The error history being memorized by Centralized Controller can also be monitor-displayed.
(Display can not be performed when connecting with MN Converter.)
The system controllers other than Centralized Controller can not provide the monitoring of error history.
66
3.10 Optional Setting
- Self-Diagnosis Monitoring : The self-diagnosis function (LED for service monitor) to be performed
with Dip-SW on the circuit board of the outdoor unit can be monitored.
- Operation Control : Controlling of unit operation can be performed in the same manner as a
remote controller.
- Forced Operation : Changes the starting order of compressors.
- Sending Command : Allows to monitor the response for any M-NET command transmitted
to the unit.
- Monitoring of Pre-error Data : The operation status of the unit (OC/OS) until generating an error can
be monitored in a unit of minute.
- Date / Time Setting : A setup of the present time can be performed to outdoor unit.
(It is used for the time when abnormalities occurred.)
- Unit Function setting : A setup and monitor of a function can be performed to unit.
- DipSW Monitor : You can monitor the DipSW.
- LOSSNAY Function Setting Monitoring : Monitors function-item settings for LOSSNAY units.
(2) Click on the units to be monitored or operated.
(3) The Optional Setting Screen will be appear.

Click on [Item] to be monitored or operated.
- Click on and the Address Change Screen
appears.
[Refer to 3.9 Malfunction Log 3.9.2 (1)]
- The sending/receiving data are displayed on the
[Lower Column].
(4) Click on to end the Optional Setting Screen and

3.10.1 Self-Diagnosis Monitoring

(1) Click on and the Self-Diagnosis Monitoring
Screen will appear.
(2) Set the self-diagnosis SW value with .

For the set value, use the No. on the List of LED monitor
display of the Service Handbook for each unit.
* The displaying digit number is different on the model.
(There is a model that doesn't display the digit of 1000.)
(3) After setting the set value, click on .

The self-diagnosis LED display will be shown with flag or
numerial value.
If the unit other than the outdoor unit or the set value being not
corresponded is sended, the characters “Not corresponded”
and “Attribute and Version” are displayed.
(4) Click on to end the Self-Diagnosis Monitoring Screen and return to the Optional
Setting Screen.
67
3.10.2 Operation Control
[Refer to 3.11 Operation Control]
3.10.3 Sending Command

(1) Click on and the Sending
Command Screen will appear.
(2) Input M-NET command desired to transmit by

clicking on the button.
Direct input from the keyboard is also possible.
(3) After inputting command, click on .

Response command is displayed on [Answer] column.
(4) Click on to end the Sending

Command Screen and return to the Optional Setting Screen.
NOTE:
Use this function after obtaining the knowledge of M-NET command.
3.10.4 Monitoring of Pre-error Data

(1) Click on and the Pre-error Data
Screen will appear.
- When it chooses except the outdoor unit or

constant speed unit (OS), the message of
“This model doesn’t have the function of
Monitoring of Pre-error.” is displayed not allowing
operation.
(2) As the screen opens, the monitoring of the data of

the selected unit before error occurred will
automatically be started.
Outdoor Unit
(3) After ending the monitoring, the data of the selected
unit before error occurred is displayed in a unit of
minute on Pre-error Data Screen.
Each figure on the upper column indicates a number
of minute before generating an error respectively.
The change of the display content is performed with
Up/down, left/right scroll bar.
The number of displayed items and that of the stored

data (per minute) differ depending on the selected
item.
Indoor Unit
68
(4) ”Menu Bar”
The menu bar displays [Return] and [Help].
- Click on [Return] to end the Pre-error Data Screen and return to the Optional Setting Screen.
As the screen to save data will appear, change the data name
as required and save it. You may enter your comment also.
After saving, return to the Optional Setting Screen.
- Click on [Help] and an explanation about "Terminology" and

"Operation Method" will be displayed.
[Refer to 3.7 Connecting Information 3.7.2 (2)]
69
3.10.5 Date / Time Setting
(1) Click on . The Date / Time Setting

Screen opens and the present time of PC is displayed.
* When the unit which does not correspond to a setup of

time is chosen, the message of "This function is not
available" is displayed, and it cannot set up.
(2) A click of sets the time currently displayed to a unit.

* The time to set up can also be changed on a screen. Cursor is united with a change point and
a numerical value is inputted.
(3) Click on to end the Date / Time Setting Screen and return to the Main Screen.
3.10.6 Unit Function setting

< IC Function Setting>
(1) Click [Unit Function Setting] on the [Optional Setting].
[IC Function Setting Menu] screen appear.
(2) Click [IC Function Setting] on the [IC Function Setting Menu].
[IC Function Setting] screen appear.
NOTE:
If a unit is selected that does not support the above
function, a message [Not available the IC Function
setting] will appear, and the settings cannot be set.
(3) Set the values.
(4) Click [Set] to send the input data.
(5) Click [Monitor] to acquire the current settings and display the
results.
(6) Click [Save to File] to export the current settings to

anexternal file.External files are saved with the extension
“.fsb”.
(7) Click [Load from file] and select an fsb file to import the
settings.
(8) Click [Change] to access the [Change address]

window.Refer to section 3.9.2(1) under section 3.9 Error
History for how to change the addresses.
(9) Click [Return] to exit the [IC Function Setting] screen.
70
< IC Function-Item Setting>
(2) Click [IC Function-Item Setting] on the [IC Function Setting Menu].
[IC Function-Item Setting] screen appear.
NOTE:
If a unit is selected that does not support the above
function, a message [Not available the IC
Function-Item Setting] will appear, and the settings
cannot be set.
(3) Click [Monitor] to acquire the current settings and display the results.
(4) Enter the item No. you wish to set in [Item No.] and the value in [Item Value].
(5) To set multiple indoor units at the same time, click [Set Selected Address]. When [Set Selected
Address] is clicked, the [Select Address] screen appears to the right of the [IC Function-Item
Setting] screen.
Select the M-NET address of the indoor units to set.
NOTE:
When [Set Selected Address] is selected, the [Change] and [Monitor] buttons are disabled.
71
(6) Click [Set] to send the currently entered
data. A progress bar is displayed while
sending. Click [Stop] to stop the setting
process.
(7) When setting completes, a completion

message appears. After selecting [Set
Selected Address], if an M-NET address of
a unit that does not exist is selected or the
target unit does not support the function, an
error message appears.
(8) Click [Change] to access the [Change address] window.Refer to section 3.9.2(1) under section 3.9
Error History for how to change the addresses.
(9) Click [Close] to exit the [IC Function-Item Setting] screen.
72
< Indoor Unit Function Setting>
(2) Click [Indoor Unit Function Setting] on the [IC Function

Setting Menu].[Indoor Unit Function Setting] screen
appear.Refer to [3.16 Setting the Values for Indoor unit
Functions ]
73
<OC>
(1) Click [Unit Function setting] on the
[Optional setting] screen.
The [OC Function setting] screen will appear.
NOTE:
If a unit is selected that does not support the function
described in this section, the message "The settings
for the selected unit cannot be set" will appear.
(2) Click the button to change the settings for the

items in the list.
(3) Click [Set] to send the input data.
(4) Click [Monitor] to acquire the current settings and

display the results.
(5) Click [Export] to save the current settings in an external file.External files are saved with the extension
“.fsb”.
(6) Click [Import] and select the fsb file to import the monitor results.
(7) Click [Output to Text File] to export the monitor results in a text file in the CSV format.The message
will appear that notifies the user of process completion, and the saved file will automatically open.
(8) Click [Change Address] to access the [Address Change] screen.Refer to Item 3.9.2 (1) in Section
"3.9 Error History" for how to change the addresses.
(9) Click [Close] to exit the [OC Function Setting] screen and go back to the
[Optional Setting] screen.
74
<CE/CL>
(1) Click [Unit Function Setting] on the [Optional Setting].[Chiller / Hot water Setting] screen appear.
Note
If a unit that does not support the “Chiller / Hot water Setting” is selected, the message [Not available] will
appear, and the settings for such unit cannot be made.
(10) (2)
(2) Click the [System Setting], [Unit Initialize
Setting], [Drive Operation Setting], or[Service
Setting] tab on the [Chiller / Hot water Setting]
window to change its settings.
Click the [System Setting] tab to set the system

settings.
Click the [Unit Initialize Setting] tab to set the
initial settings.
Ckick the [Drive Operation Setting] tab to set the
operation mode settings. (4)
Click the [Service Setting] tab to set the
maintenance-related settings. (3) (5) (7) (6) (8) (9)
Note
Refer to the Installation/Operation Manual for the details of each setting item.
Not all functions are supported on all models,

and nothing will appear on the tabs that
correspond to unsupported functions.
75
-Monitoring -
(3) Click [Monitor]. The message [Do you want to start monitoring?] will appear.Click [Yes] on the popup
window to acquire the current setting values and display the results in the [Monitor] value display
section.
Note
If data acquisition fails due to a communication error, the message [Monitor is failed.] will
appear. Check the communication status and try again.
-Settings-
(4) Enter the setting value for the [Value] column corresponding to each [Name]. The values that can be
entered in the [Value] column are the values between the [Min] value and the [Max] value.
(5) Click [Set]. The message [Do you want to apply the settings?] will appear. Click [Yes] on the popup
window to send the values entered in the [Value] column.The message [Setting is succeeded.] will
appear upon successful completion of data transmission.
Note
If a setting error occurs due to a communication error, The message [Setting is failed.] will appear.
Check the communication status and try again.
-Importing/Exporting files-
(6) Click [Export] to save the current settings in an external file. External files are saved with the extension
“.set”.
(7) Click [Import] and select a “.set” file to import the settings.
(8) Click [File Output] to save the current settings in a text file (CSV format).
-Miscellaneous items-
(9) Click [Return] to exit the [Chiller/Water heater settings] window.
(10) Click [Change] to access the [Change address] window. Refer to section 3.9.2(1) under section 3.9
Error History for how to change the addresses.
76
3.10.7 DipSW Monitor
(1) Click on .
DipSW monitor screen appears.
NOTE:
*Title of DipSW on the circuit board has
the difference depending on the model.
*Please refer to the Conversion-table of
help about SWA/SWB.
(2) Click to ,
the monitoring results to a text file (CSV) file name extension.
(3) Click on and the Address Change Screen appears.

77
3.10.8 LOSSNAY Function Setting Monitor
(1) In the [Optional Setting] screen, click [LOSSNAY

Function Setting Monitor].
The [LOSSNAY Function Setting Monitor] screen
appears.
On the [LOSSNAY Function Setting Monitor] screen,
the LOSSNAY function setting status can be
monitored.
NOTE:
If you selected a unit that does not support the
LOSSNAY Function Setting Monitor function, a
"This model does not support the LOSSNAY
Function setting monitor" message appears.
The LOSSNAY Function Setting Monitor function
can only be used for some LOSSNAY models.
(2) Click [Monitor] to monitor the current set values and

display the result on the screen.
(3) Clicking [Change] opens the [Change] screen.

For operation method, refer to “3.9.2 Screen Functions and Operations”.
(4) Clicking [Close] closes the [LOSSNAY Function

Setting Monitor] screen.
78
3.10.9 Forced Operation
(1) On the [Optional Setting] screen, click [Forced

Operation].The [Forced Operation] screen
appears.
On the [Forced Operation] screen, you can
forcefully change the starting order of
compressors when starting the air conditioning
system.
NOTE:
When a unit that does not support the forced operation
function is selected, a "This model does not support the
forced operation function" message appears.
The forced operation function can only be used for some
outdoor unit models.
(2) Click the pull-down menu to display a list of compressors. From the list, select the compressor you wish
to start first when the air conditioning system is started.
(3) Clicking [Set] to change the starting order of compressors. After the setting completes, a "Setting is
completed" message appears.
(4) Clicking [Close] closes the [Forced Operation] screen.
79
3.10.10 Operation restriction from the remote controller
(1) Click [Operation restriction from the remote controller] on the [Optional Set] window to display the
[Operation restriction from the remote controller] window. Using the [Operation restriction from the
remote controller] window, the operation from the remote controller can be disabled. To use this function,
first set the address selection, operation restriction time, and operation restriction item selection.
Address selection
Operation restriction time
Operation restriction
item selection
80
Item Details
Address Select an address to be targeted for the operation restriction. There are three methods of
selection selecting the address: [Set All], [Set System], and [Set Individual].
[Set All]
When [Set All] is selected, all the remote controllers are selected as targets for the operation
restriction.
[Set System] Outdoor unit address selection

When [Set System] is selected, the outdoor
unit address can be selected within the
range from 51 to 100. Remote controllers
that exist in the outdoor unit system of the
designated address are selected as targets
for the operation restriction.
[Set Individual] Indoor unit address selection

When [Set Individual] is selected, the
indoor unit address can be selected within
the range from 1 to 50. Remote controllers
that exist in the indoor unit system of the
designated address are selected as targets
for the operation restriction.
Note
When setting the target address using [Set Individual], select the address of the main
unit or of both the main and sub units in the group. If only the address of the sub unit is
selected, the operation of the remote controller can not be restricted.
Operation Set the operation restriction time. The operation restriction from the remote controller is
restriction time cancelled after the specified time period has elapsed. The operation restriction time can be set
within the range from 10 minutes to 120 minutes.
Operation Set the operation restriction item. Six operations of ON/OFF, temperature setting, operation
restriction item mode, air flow direction, fan speed, and timer (restriction of the schedule set by the remote
selection controller) can be restricted.
(2) After setting the address selection, operation

restriction time, and operation restriction item
selection, click the [Set] button. If there is an unset
item, the [Set] button is grayed out and cannot be
clicked.
Set
81
(3) The progress bar will appear, and then the
confirmation messsage will appear. Click the [OK]
button.
OK
Note
The confirmation message will appear as follows.
Confirmation message Meaning
Operation of the units with the following Appears when the operation restriction can be enabled
addresses from the remote controllers for the selected address using the Maintenance Tool.
will be restricted. When the [OK] button is clicked, the operation of the
remote controller conntected to the indoor unit having the
designated address is restricted.
Operation of the units with the following Appears when the operation restriction cannot be
addresses cannot be restricted from the enabled for the selected address using the Maintenance
Maintenance Tool. Tool.
Operation from the remote controller cannot be restricted
using the Maintenance Tool for some indoor unit models.
The following addresses do not have Appears when there is no unit in the selected address.
corresponding units.
82
(4) The Maintenance Tool sends the operation restriction
command to the target address. The progress bar will
appear, and then the confirmation message will
appear.
Click the [OK] button to close the confirmation
message.
OK
Note
The confirmation message will appear as follows.
Confirmation message Meaning
Settings for the following units have Appears when the operation restriction settings have
been completed. been made properly.
Setting was cancelled. Settings for the Appears when the [Cancel] button on the progress bar is
following units have not been clicked.
completed.
Failed to set the following units. Appears when the setting has failed due to a
Communication error may have communication error. Check the communication status
occurred. and make the setting again.
(5) After completion of the setting, click the [Restriction

status check] button.
Restriction
status check
83
(6) The progress bar will appear, and then the
[Operation restriction status] window will appear. The
restriction status of each item is displayed on the
[Operaton restriction status] window. Check that the
restriction settings have been made properly.
Items being restricted are highlighted in red.
Note
Items that can be restricted vary depending on the indoor unit model. Items that cannot be restricted are
displayed as “Cancel” on the [Operation restriction status] window.
(7) Click the [Close] button to close the [Operation

restriction from the remote controller] window.
Close
84
3.11 Operation Control
You can start/stop units and operate the operation mode, set temperature, air volume, damper, humidifier,
filter sign reset, and actuator.
The operable range differs depending on the model.
*In the P-series,the item of Damper/Hummidifer/actuator can not be operated.
*In the M-series, can not use the Operation Control.
(2) Click on the unit to be controled.
(3) The Operation Control Screen will be appear. This display shows the current conditions.
3.11.2 Screen Functions and Operation (Indoor unit, LOSSNAY unit)

(5) (2)
(1) Set each desired [Item].
(6)
NOTE:
In case of connecting to P-series with
USB/Serial conversion cable,
items of (2),(5) are not displayed.
(4)
(2) Set the operation range. Select [Set Individual (7)

(3)
Unit/Monitor], [Set Selected Address] , or [Set All]
mode.
[Set Individual Unit/Monitor]

Operates the operation status of the selected indoor
units.
[Set Selected Address]

When [Set Selected Address] is selected, the [Select
Address] screen appears on the lower right corner of
the [Operation] screen.
Operates the operation status of the indoor unit of the
M-NET address selected using the [Select Address]
screen.
[Set All]
Operates the operation status of all indoor units that
exist.
NOTE:
・ Using the batch operation for [Set Selected Address] and [Set All], four items can be
set, i.e. start/stop, operation mode, set temperature, 4-levels of air volume.
However, settings that are not supported by the specific model are not sent. (Mode
operation for LC, etc.)
85
(3) After setting the operation item, click on .
* The item will not be transmitted if a "check" is removed. Please remove a check if needed.
* Click on and the command which resets a filter sign will transmit.
* When [Set Selected Address] or [Set All] is selected, the send targets are searched . After searching,
the messeage screen appears. Click [Yes] to batch send the settings to the targets. Click [No] to not
send settings.
86
(4) The operation mode and temperature settings are set as follows.
Mode
Fan … Indoor unit operation mode will be set to the FAN mode.
Dry … Indoor unit operation mode will be set to the DRY mode.
Cool … Indoor unit operation mode will be set to the COOLING mode.
Heat … Indoor unit operation mode will be set to the HEATING mode.
Auto … Indoor unit operation mode will be set to the AUTO mode.
Two types of value settings(single set point and dual set points) are available.
(changeable from the function settings menu)
Setback … Indoor unit operation mode will be set to the SETBACK mode.
AUTO (dual set point) mode:

In AUTO (dual set point) mode, the preset temperatures can be set for cooling and heating, and
operation can be switched automatically between cooling and heating depending on the room
temperature.
The preset temperatures for cooling and heating set in AUTO (dual set point) mode will be reflected
to the temperature setting for COOL/DRYING and HEAT modes.
NOTE:
・ Temperature settings for Cooling and Heating in the AUTO (dual set point) mode can be
set to the temperatures that meet the following formula:
“Preset cooling temperature – Preset heating temperature
≥ Minimum temperature difference”
*If the temperatures for Cooling and Heating are set too close to each other, the
temperatures for both the Cooling and Heating will automatically be changed to meet the
minimum temperature difference requirement. Minimum temperature difference
requirement varies with the indoor unit settings.
SETBACK mode:
The SETBACK function automatically switches the operation mode between cooling and heating to
maintain the room temperature within the set temperature range.
The preset temperatures for cooling and heating set in SETBACK mode can be different from the
preset temperatures for other modes.
Temperature settings
The method of setting the set temperature differs depending on the indoor unit model.
・If multiple input fields are displayed for the set temperature, it is possible to set the set temperature
for each mode of the target indoor units. Set the set temperatures for each mode.
・If multiple input fields for the set temperature are not displayed, it is not possible to set the set
temperature for each mode of the target indoor units. Set the set temperatures that is common with
different modes.
Mode based setting supported model
Mode based setting unsupported model
87
(5) Click on and the Address Change Screen will appear.
(6) ”Menu Bar”

[Help] appears in the menu bar. Click on [Help] and an explanation of the "Operation Method" will
appear.
(7) Click on to end the Operation Control Screen.The Main Screen will return.
NOTE:
When LEV OPENING is changed, to prevent failure to release the LEV opening after test run, close
the operation control screen. This release the LEV opening on this screen automatically.
However when moving to the operation control screen from the operation monitor screen, the LEV
opening will be retained even by closing this screen.
At a timing when finishing the operation monitor screen, the LEV opening can be released.
88
3.11.3 Screen Functions and Operation (Booster Unit, Water HEX Unit)
Screen when Booster Unit is selected. Screen when Water HEX Unit is selected.
(4) (4)
(3) (3)
(2) (2)
(5)
(2)
(5)
(2)
(1) Set each desired [Item].
(2) After setting the operation item, click on .

* The item will not be transmitted if a "check" is removed. Please remove a check if needed.
* Click on and the command which resets a water exchange signal will transmit.
(3) Click on and the Address Change Screen will appear.

(4) ”Menu Bar”

[Help] appears in the menu bar.
Click on [Help] and an explanation of the "Operation Method" will appear.
(5) Click on to end the Operation Control Screen.The Main Screen will return.
89
3.11.4 Screen Functions and Operation(BC Controller)
(1) Click on the button corresponding to the valve number
you want to change.
“0” represents “close” and “1” represents “open”.
To change the valve setting, perform
“Fix Release” --> “Fix”
(2) After setting, click on .
(3) Click on to check the current conditions.
(4) Change the LEV opening with . Set to the LEV

opening.
Click on to send the setup contents.
(5) After adjustment by solenoid valve and LEV opening change is complete, click on .
The Main Screen will return. At this time, the contents set at this screen become invalid.
NOTE:
To prevent failure to release the status set after test run, close the operation control screen of
BC/BS controller.
This releases all the content set on this screen automatically.
However when moving to the operation control screen of BC/BS controller from the operation monitor
screen,
the set content will be retained even by closing this screen.
At a timing when finishing the operation monitor screen, the set content can be released.
3.11.5 Screen functions and operation (Hot Water Heat Pump Unit (QAHV))
(１) Set the addresses.

(4) (１)
Refer to Section 3.9 Malfunction Log for how
to set the addresses. When making the ON/OFF
setting for the Hot Water Heat Pump Unit (QAHV),
select the main unit (because the setting is made
for the entire system and not individual units).
(２) Set the items to be operated.

Uncheck the box to exclude items from being sent.
(３) When done making the settings, click [Send]. (3)
(４) [Menu bar]

The Help menu is located on the menu bar. Click [Help] to open the Help window.
90
3.12 OC Date / Time Setting
- A setup of the present time can be performed to all outdoor units at the same time.
3.12.1 Starting of this function
(1) Screen moving operation and its method

a) Clicking [Option] of the menu bar on the main screen and
then clicking [OC Date/Time Setting] of the sub-menu.
The searching about outdoor unit connected will begin.
NOTE:
When there is no operation object, Warning Message
is displayed and processing is interrupted.
b) The [OC Date/Time Setting] Screen opens and

the present time of PC is displayed
3.12.2 OC Date / Time Setting
(1) The present time of PC is displayed on

the [OC Date/Time Setting] Screen in the beginning.
(2) The time to set up can also be changed on a screen.

Cursor is united with a change point and a numerical
value is inputted.
(3) A click of sets the time currently displayed to a unit.
NOTE:
If it failed, Error Message and th error-generated address are displayed.
(4) When the transmission is completed, Completion Message is displayed.
(5) Click on to end the [OC Date/Time Setting] Screen and

91
3.13 Free contact of indoor unit
- When utilizing the [Indoor unit free contact mode] which uses the external input/output of Free Plan indoor
unit (Building-Multi) together with Centralized Controller and TG 2000A, the contact action of the indoor
unit can be tested with this function.

(1) Screen moving operation and its method
a) Clicking [Option] of the menu bar on the main screen and
then clicking [IC free contact …] of the sub-menu will
display the screen for the free contact of indoor unit.
NOTE:
[IC free contact …] can be chosen only when
G-50A is Ver.2.60 or more.
In the case when connected via Centralized Controller,

the screen shown right will appear once.
Now the necessary information is under collecting
from Centralized Controller.
3.13.2 Monitoring of contact status

(1) Manual monitoring
To manually check the contact status of indoor units
at each address, select the [Manual monitor] mode.
a) Click the [Manual monitor] button on the mode

selection section.
b) Click the [Address button] of the unit desired to
be monitored. The contact status will be monitored
from the unit for display.
[Attribute]
The unit attribute will be displayed.
[Indoor unit contact mode]
The contact mode being set will be monitored,
and a check mark will be affixed on the applied
mode.
[Input contact (monitor)]
The ON/OFF status of each input contact will be monitored for display.
[Output contact (monitor/operation)]
The ON/OFF status of each output contact will be monitored for display.
In the case of output contacts, the status shown with bold letter represents the present status.
*In the case of non-objective attribute, and when the contact mode is under normal control,
the above monitor display will be [ - ].
92
(2) Automatic monitoring
To automatically monitor the contact status of indoor
units of No.1 ~ 50 repeatedly,
select the [Auto monitor] mode.
a) Click the [Auto monitor] button on the mode

selection section.
The contact status of indoor units of No.1 ~ 50 will
automatically be monitored, and this operation will
be repeated.
The display for [Attribute], [Indoor unit contact

mode], [Input contact (monitor)] and [Output
contact (monitor/operation)] are identical to that in
the manual monitoring.
* In the case to terminate the auto mode, selecting other mode will stop the monitoring.
3.13.3 Operation of output contact

(1) Contact operation
To operate for the ON/OFF selection of the output
contact of indoor units, select the [Operation contact]
mode.
a) Click the [Operation contact] button on the mode

selection section.
b) Click the [Output contact (ON/OFF)] button of the
unit for which the ON/OFF of the output contact
is desired to be selected for change.
*The state where the button is being depressed

(with bold letter) displays the present output status.
[Option] function
Affixing a check mark to [It checks before
transmission] displays the warning screen as
shown right before transmitting actual transmission
command at the operation of output contact.
To continue the transmission, click [Yes].
When a check mark is not affixed, the transmission

command will be transmitted at the clicking of the
[Output contact (ON/OFF)] button simultaneously.
3.13.4 Termination of this function

(1) Clicking the [Close] button will close this screen and return to the main screen display.
93
3.14 Remote error notification
The “Remote error notification" has been located starting from Ver4.20.
- The MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) has a built-in remote error notification function.
When an error occurs in an air conditioning unit, the remote error notification function allows previously
registered destinations to be automatically notified of the error via telephone lines.
To use the remote error notification function in the MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E), you must first specify
the remote error notification settings from the Maintenance Tool.
The MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) has the following 2 modes:
(1) Maintenance mode
In this mode, the MN Converter can only be used as a normal converter.
(2) Remote error notification mode
This mode allows both the normal MN Converter functions and the remote error notification
function to be used.
Use the Maintenance Tool to switch between these 2 modes.
To use the remote error notification function, connect the MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) to a modem via the
RS-232C port and then connect the modem to the telephone outlet, as shown in the figure below.
For details, refer to the Installation Manual of MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E).
The dedicated server software or other dedicated software Tool run on the remote monitoring PC.
RS-232C
Public M-NET
straight
RS-232C network
MODEM MODEM
MN Converter
Remote monitoring PC (CMS-MNG-E)
(Runs dedicated server software
or other dedicated software Tool.)
To specify the remote error notification function settings using the Maintenance Tool, connect the MN
Converter (CMS-MNG-E) to the Maintenance Tool PC via USB, as shown in the figure below.
RS-232C
Public straight
RS-232C network
MODEM MODEM
Remote monitoring PC
(Runs dedicated server
M-NET
software or other
dedicated software USB
Tool.)
Maintenance
Tool PC MN Converter
(CMS-MNG-E)
NOTE:
• When setting remote error notification, connect to the MN Converter via USB.
94
(1) Click [Option] in the menu bar and

select [Error notification mode] -> [Error
notification mode setting/cancellation...] in
the sub-menu.
The function starts searching for units to be notified

of errors and displays a message to that effect.
(2) When the search is completed, the Error notification

mode setting/cancellation screen appears.
95
3.14.2 Design of Screen
There are two kinds of following screens to the Error notification mode setting/cancellation screen.
(1) Maintenance mode -- When the MN Converter is in maintenance mode
(2) Remote error notification mode -- When the MN Converter is in remote error notification mode
[Maintenance mode screen]

All the settings are blank and the [Settings contents monitor], [Test report] and [Send cancel all]
buttons are disabled.
[Remote error notification mode screen]

Monitors and displays the settings from the MN Converter.
If the connection status monitor has not been implemented, “ * ” appears in the "Units targeted for error
monitoring" fields.
96
(1)
(2)
(3) (10)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(11)
(12)
(7)
(13)
(8)
(9)
(14) (15) (16) (17)
- (1) Site name - (3) Telephone tone mode

Name of the system being monitored Telephone line dial type
- (2) Notification contact TEL - (4) MN Converter address
M-NET address of the MN converter
Telephone number of the notification contact
- (5) Phone line disconnection setting(Inactivity timeout)
Specifies how soon an inactive telephone line is disconnected.
- (6) Error codes targeted for notification
Specifies which errors are notified.
- (7) Error codes targeted for notification masking
Specifies the error codes that are not notified (masked) when an error occurs.
- (8) System information settings
Specifies whether or not an upstream system controller is connected.
- (9) Settings contents monitor
Monitors the MN Converter settings.
- (10) Units targeted for error monitoring
Selects the units to be notified when an error occurs.
- (11) Connection status monitor
Monitors the connection information for the remote error notification unit.
- (12) Select all / Deselect all
Selects or deselects all the units for error notification.
- (13)Connecting information
Displays the connection information for the selected unit.
- (14)MN Converter version/mode
Displays the version of the connected MN Converter and its current mode.
- (15)Test report
Actually calls the notification contacts and sends a test message to test notification operations.
- (16)Send cancel all/Send settings
Sends either the settings or a cancel all settings instruction to the MN Converter.
- (17)Close
Closes the screen.
97
3.14.3 Selecting remote error notification mode
Specify the settings below to enable the remote error notification function on the MN Converter.
(1) Enter the site name.

Enter the name of the air conditioning system to be
monitored.
E.g.) MITSUBISHI BUILDING
The remote monitoring PC is notified of this site name.

To enable the remote monitoring PC to monitor multiple air conditioning systems at the same time,
you should assign a unique site name to each system.
Site names can consist of up to 20 uppercase letters (A to Z), numbers (0 to 9) and some symbols,
but may not contain the following symbols : “ + “ or ” ; “
(2) Enter the notification contact telephone number.

Take care to enter the contact telephone number
correctly.
E.g.) For 012-345-6789
Enter the number as 0123456789.

The number cannot include hyphens (-).
Numbers can consist of up to 20 digits (0 to 9). However, when the Inactivity Timeout function is used,
numbers may be no longer than 14 digits.
Caution:
Take care to enter the telephone number correctly. If the number contains an error, notification may
be sent to an unrelated number and cause problems.
Note that Mitsubishi Electric accepts no liability whatsoever for any problems resulting from incorrect
telephone number input.
NOTE:
When select the telephone tone type to “ELSE”, you can enter AT command in this field.
(3) Select the tone type for the telephone.

Select one of the following telephone tone types:
PB -- Tone (push-button line)
Sends ATDT plus the telephone number
to the modem.
DP -- Pulse (dial line)
Sends ATDP plus the telephone number
to the modem.
None -- Sends ATD plus the telephone number to the modem.
Else -- Nothing is added to before the telephone number.
Check your telephone line to determined which tone type is used.
98
(4) Enter the MN Converter address.
Enter the M-NET address for the MN Converter.
You can enter any number between 201 and 250.
Ensure that you do not enter the same address as
another unit.
The default is 250.
(5) Specify the setting for the Inactivity Timeout function.

The Inactivity Timeout function is a modem function
that automatically disconnects telephone lines when
there has been no communication on a connected
line for a set period during error notification.
If power to the MN Converter is turned off due to a

power failure or any other cause while a telephone
line is connected for error notification, the
telephone line remains connected unless this function
is enabled.
This function can be used to release connected lines
in this situation.
The S-register setting used with the Inactivity Timeout function differs depending on the modem model.
Read the modem's instruction manual carefully to ensure that you use the correct setting.
-disconnect Use the Inactivity Timeout function.
S-register number Modem S-register number that sets Inactivity Timeout.

Inactivity timeout Time for which inactivity is monitored
-Do not disconnect Do not use the Inactivity Timeout function (default).
Caution:
If you do not use the Inactivity Timeout function, bear in mind that telephone lines may remain
connected.
If you do not use the Inactivity Timeout function, or if the modem settings are not specified correctly,
Mitsubishi Electric accepts no liability whatsoever for any faults or damage arising from the continued
connection of telephone lines.
Before use, always check that the Inactivity Timeout function is working correctly.
NOTE:
*The Inactivity Timeout function setting differs according to the modem model.
(The S-register number and the units and setting range for inactivity timeout differ.)
Read the modem's instruction manual carefully (AT commands) to ensure that you use the
correct settings.
*If the Maintenance Tool is used to remotely connect to the MN Converter via a telephone line while
the Inactivity Timeout function is being used, the Inactivity Timeout function may disconnect the
telephone line when the Maintenance Tool is not being used.
If you use the Maintenance Tool to remotely connect to the MN Converter via a telephone line,
consider carefully whether to use the Inactivity Timeout function and the length of timeout delay when
specifying the settings.
*When changed this setting, the setting of “Notification contact TEL” is cleared.
99
(6) Specify the error codes targeted for notification.
You can use this setting to specify which of the errors
that occur in air conditioning units will be reported.
You can choose from the following 3 options:
[All]
Reports all error codes.
[A.C. unit only (no delay)]
Error delay codes are not reported.
[Set error codes]
Only the specified error codes are reported.
If you selected "Set error codes", enter the target error
codes.
You can specify up to 10 error codes.
You can also specify wildcards. However, if you specify a wildcard in an error code, all the subsequent
digits are also taken as wildcards.
Note that you cannot enter a wildcard at the beginning of the code.
E.g.) 2* -- All error codes from 2000 to 2999

2*50 -- Illegal specification.
**01 -- Illegal specification.
(7) Specify the error codes that will be masked from error
notification.
You can use this to specify error codes that will not be
reported (that will be masked) when errors occur in
an air conditioning unit.
You can specify up to 10 error codes.

You can also specify wildcards. However, if you specify
a wildcard in an error code, all the subsequent digits
are also taken as wildcards.
Note that you cannot enter a wildcard at the beginning of the code.
E.g.) 2* -- All error codes from 2000 to 2999

2*50 -- Illegal specification.
**01 -- Illegal specification.
NOTE:
If the error codes targeted for notification and the masked error codes include the same error codes,
the message shown below appears.
If there is an overlap, the masking specification has priority.
If necessary, specify the settings again correctly.
100
(8) Select the system information settings.
This option selects whether a host system controller is
connected in the M-NET system to which the MN
Converter is connected.
The host system controller is the G-50A, G(B)-50A,
or AG-150A, etc.
When an error occurs in an air conditioning unit, in

order for the unit where the error occurred to notify the
MN Converter of the error, the MN Converter address
information must first be registered in the unit targeted
for notification.
This system information setting (Connection/No connection with host SC) specifies the source from
which the address information is registered.
[Connection with host SC]
The MN Converter address information is registered/deleted in the notification target unit from the
host SC. (Refer to the host SC instruction manual for details.)
[No connection with host SC]
The MN Converter registers/deletes its own address information in the notification target unit.
(To register or delete address information, click [Send settings] in this screen.)
(9) Specify the units to be monitored for errors.

Use this to select the units for which notification is
provided when an error occurs.
If a unit is not selected here, no notification is given when
an error occurs on that unit.
When you click a unit, the name is bolded to indicate that
it has been selected (will be monitored for errors).
Clicking the unit name again returns it to normal text and
deselects the unit (excluded from monitoring).
Click the units to be monitored for errors so that they are
selected (displayed in bold). To select all the units for
monitoring, click [Select all].
To deselect all the units for monitoring, click [Deselect all].
The meanings of the different types of display are as follows:
Pale gray ----- There is no error notification function on this model.

This model cannot be selected.
Models that cannot be monitored are as follows:
Models other than IC, DC or OC.
Bold ----- Selected as a unit targeted for error monitoring.
Currently set as a unit to be monitored for errors by the
MN Converter or selected ready to be set as such.
Normal text ----- Available for selection as a unit to be monitored for errors.
Not currently set in the MN Converter as a unit to be monitored
for errors.
In addition to the above, units may be displayed in blue. The meaning of this is as follows:
Blue ----- Not currently set in the MN Converter as a unit to be monitored
for errors, but the MN Converter's connection data is registered
in the unit.
101
(10) Send the settings.
Click [Send settings].
When the Settings will be sent. OK? message appears,

click [Yes].
Setting begins.
When setting is completed, the Settings have been sent

message appears.
Click [OK].
The MN Converter switches to remote error notification mode.
Caution:
After specifying the error notification settings, always run the error notification test to check
that notification is correctly provided to the correct addresses.
[See section 3.14.4].
NOTE:
If you selected "Connection with host SC", you must register the address of the MN Converter
on the host SC.
NOTE:
MN Converter is registered with a unit targeted for error monitoring as attribute SC. When five
SC is already register with a unit targeted for error monitoring, the following messages are
displayed and you cannot register MN Converter with a unit. Please confirm connection
relations.
102
3.14.4 Error notification testing
After setting the MN Converter to remote error notification mode, run the error notification test to check that
notification is implemented correctly.
Caution:
After specifying the error notification settings, always run the error notification test to check that notification
is correctly provided to the correct addresses during the error notification test, always check that errors are
posted correctly on the remote monitoring PC.
NOTE:
Before running the error notification test, check whether the software running on the remote monitoring PC
is the dedicated server software or another software tool. Then refer to "3.14.8 Option settings" to ensure
that you specify the correct server or Toolettings.
(1) In the Error notification mode setting/cancellation

screen, click [Test report].
(2) The test notification begins.

A confirmation window is displayed.
Check the contact number and then click [Yes].
NOTE:
When error notification is in progress, the following messages are displayed, and the test report cannot be
performed. Please wait and try again.
In addition, when a modem is not connected, the following messages are displayed.
Please try again after connecting a modem definitely.
(3) After a few moments, the results are displayed.

Check the message and then click [OK].
[In the case of success] [In the case of failure]
(* The actual message differs depending on the error.)

The error messages are shown below.
If an error occurs, check the connections, etc.
103
Error message When Test report
Error message Meaning/Cause Repair
A test report failed Modem connection error
(Modem no-response error) The MN Converter cannot
communicate with the modem.
Probable causes are:
* The cable between the MN * Check the connections on the
Converter and the modem is not cable between the MN
connected properly. Converter and the modem.
* The modem is not turned on. * Turn the modem on.

A test report failed Phone line connection error.
(Phone connection error) A call was made via the modem, but
no connection with the contact could
be established.
Probable causes are:
* The cable between the modem * Check the connections on the
and the telephone line is not cable between the modem and
connected properly. the telephone line.
* The other party's telephone is not * Check that the other party's
responding. modem is set to auto receive.
* The contact phone number is * Check the contact phone

wrong. number.
* The telephone line itself is * Check with the connecting
damaged. telephone exchange.
A test report failed Contact server no-response error.
(Server no-response error) Communication was established
with the other party's modem, but
there is no response (REP) from the
* Only when "Server" is contact server.
selected in "Option * The contact server is not * Check the operation status of
settings". connected or the dedicated server the contact server.
software is not running.
A test report failed No response from the MN
(No-response timeout) Converter.
The software cannot communicate
with the MN Converter.
* The MN Converter cable is * Check the connection to the
disconnected or broken. MN Converter.
* Power to the MN Converter has * Check that the MN Converter

failed. is powered up.
(4) Also check that notification is provided correctly on the remote monitoring PC.
For information on the message format used for test notification, see section “3.14.9 Error notification
data format".
(5) Click [Close] to exit the setting/cancellation screen.
104
3.14.5 Report log
A log of past error notifications is saved in the MN Converter.

You can use the Maintenance Tool to view and check the Report log stored on the MN Converter.
The log shows the reported error codes, the address of the unit on which the error occurred and the report
result (OK/NG).
NOTE:
A maximum of 50 notification log entries are stored on the MN Converter.
Once the limit of 50 entries is exceeded, the oldest entries in the log are deleted sequentially.
3.14.5.1 Viewing the Report log
(1) Click [Option] in the main menu bar and then

select [Error notification mode] ->
[Report log display] in the sub-menu.
The Report log screen appears.

Report log entries are displayed in chronological
order with the most recent entry at the top.
(2) Click [Close] to exit the Report log screen.
NOTE:
If the notification log stored on the MN Converter includes entries where the report result is "NG", the
STATUS LED (yellow) on the front of the MN Converter repeatedly lights for 2 seconds and turns off
for 0.5 seconds to show that notification failed.
To reset the flashing LED, display the Report STATUS/POWER log using the Maintenance Tool.
(See section 3.13.10 for more information on the STATUS LED display.)
If a failed notification is logged, check the error code (P.106 (5)) for the log entry and ensure that
future notification is carried out correctly.
105
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Latest
Scroll bar
(7) (8) (9)
- (1) Site name

Name of the system being monitored [see section 3.14.3 (1)]
- (2) Report result
Results notified
OK --- Notification succeeded
NG(**) ----Notification failed
** : Error code (see below)
01:Modem no-response -- There was no response from the modem.
10:Phone connection error-- A telephone line connection could not be established.
11:Server no-response -- There was no response from the server software.
(Only applies when "Server" is selected in "Option
setting" (see section 3.14.8).)
- (3) No.
Notification number
A number assigned sequentially for each notification. [See section 3.14.9 for details.]
- (4) Address
M-NET address of the unit in which the error occurred.
- (5) Error code
Code for the error that occurred.
- (6) Error contents
Details of the error.
- (7) Log clear
Clears the Report log.
- (8) File output
Saves the Report log as a CSV-format file. [See section 3.14.5.3.]
- (9) Close
Closes the Report log screen.
106
3.14.5.2 Clearing the Report log
(1) Click the [Log clear] button in the Report log

screen.
(2) Click [Yes].
(3) The Report log is cleared. Click [OK].
NOTE:
When you clear the Report log, the notification number is reset and restarts from 1 in the next report.
3.14.5.3 Saving the Report log in CSV format

You can save the Report log as a CSV-format file on the Maintenance Tool PC.
(1) Click the [File output] button in the Report log

screen.
107
(2) Select CSV format and click [OK].
Use , -- Uses a comma (,) as the delimiter in
the CSV file.
Use ; -- Uses a semicolon (;) as the delimiter in
the CSV file.
(3) The log is saved in CSV format and a folder

display window opens. The folder name is
C:¥MntToolEA¥Data.
[See section 5.5.]
108
3.14.6 Changing the error notification settings
NOTE:
If you change the units targeted for error monitoring or change the MN Converter address, the MN
Converter will be reset by the change. This will erase the previous error data stored on the MN
Converter.
When the data is erased, notification also stops and no error report log is kept.
To retain the error data, set the Minimum reporting period in the Option settings to 0 minutes before
sending the settings to forcibly report the error data currently stored on the MN Converter.
You can check whether there is currently error data stored on the MN Converter by the STATUS LED,
which will blink at 0.5-second intervals if there is data stored.
For details, see section 3.14.10 "MN Converter LED display" (pattern 4).

[Error notification mode setting/cancellation]
in the sub-menu.
(2) The information set in the MN Converter is loaded

and the Error notification mode
setting/cancellation screen appears.
Units set on the MN Converter as targets for

error monitoring are marked with an asterisk (*).
(3) Change the desired items in the Error notification

mode setting/cancellation screen.
To change the units targeted for error monitoring,

you have to run the Connection status monitor.
Click [Connection status monitor] to collect the
connection information.

Click [Yes].
Connection status monitor begins.
109
(4) Select System information settings.
(5) Click [Send settings].

Click [Yes].
Setting begins.
(6) If you change the units targeted for error monitoring or change the MN Converter address, the message
shown below appears.
The MN Converter is reset by the change. This erases the previous error data stored on the MN
Converter. Reporting also stops and no error report log is kept.
Set the “Minimum reporting period” in the Option settings to 0 minutes before sending the settings to
forcibly report the error data currently stored on the MN Converter,
and click [Yes].
Setting begins.
(7) The Settings have been sent message appears and setting
is completed. Click [OK].
(8) If you add the units targeted for error monitoring, the message shown below appears.
Click [OK].
110
(9) Click [Close] to close the Error notification mode setting/cancellation screen.
Caution:
If you have changed the telephone number, you must run the error notification test.
[See section 3.14.4.]
NOTE:
*If you change the units to be monitored for errors when "Connection with host SC" is
selected, you must add or delete the MN Converter address in the corresponding unit
connection data on the host SC.
*To remove the MN Converter, delete MN Converter from the connection information of the
units targeted for error monitoring using “Send cancel all” function of this Maintenance Tool.
*The units that are deleted from the connection information of MN Converter returned to the
start/stop condition.
3.14.7 Canceling error notification mode

This procedure cancels error notification mode and returns the MN Converter to maintenance mode.
(1) In the Error notification mode

setting/cancellation screen, click [Send cancel
all].
(2) A confirmation window is displayed.

Click [Yes].
Cancellation begins.
111
(3) When setting is completed, the All settings have been cancelled
message appears.
Click [OK].
The MN Converter switches to maintenance mode, and

the message below appears.Click [OK].
NOTE:
After cancellation, check the start/stop condition of the unit for confirmation
(4) Click [Close] to close the Error notification mode setting/cancellation screen.
NOTE:
If you selected "Connection with host SC", you must delete the address of the MN Converter
from the connection data for the corresponding unit on the host SC.
3.14.8 Option settings

Use the procedure below to specify the settings for remote error notification mode.

[Option setting] in the sub-menu.
(2) The Option setting screen appears.
(3) Change the settings as desired and click [Transmission].
112
(4) The new settings are applied on the MN Converter and the window shown below appears.
NOTE:
If the MN Converter is reporting an error, the message shown below appears and the settings
cannot be applied. Wait a few moments until error notification ends and then resend the settings.
113
The various settings are explained below.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6) (5)
(7)
(8)
- (1) Minimum reporting period (mins.) (Default = 10 min.)

Set a period between 0 and 60 minutes in 1-minute increments as the error reporting interval.
Errors that occur during this period are all reported together when the end of the specified period is
reached.
After the errors are reported, the next notification occurs at the end of the next reporting period.
If no errors occur during this period, none are reported.
Counting of the reporting period begins when the setting is specified.
If the MN Converter is reset due to an event such as a change to the error notification setting, the
counting for the minimum reporting period is also reset and errors are reported as soon as the
countdown restarts.
Report error A and B Report error C
Error A occurred
Reset MN Converter
Error B occurred
Error C occurred
Minimum reporting period Minimum reporting period Minimum reporting period
NOTE:
The maximum number of errors that the MN Converter can store during the minimum reporting
period is 50.
Once the limit of 50 errors is exceeded, the oldest entries in the log are deleted.
When more than 50 errors occur, only the number of excess errors is reported.
- (2) Call duration (secs.) (Default = 60 sec.)

Set a period between 30 and 99 seconds in 1-second increments as the time for which the MN
Converter continues dialing a contact telephone number once it has started the notification process.
If the contact telephone does not answer before this period expires, dialing is cancelled and notification
fails. This function prevents long periods of continuous dialing.
NOTE:
Some modem models have a similar function. If this is the case and the modem's continuous
dialing period is shorter than the Maintenance Tooletting, dialing stops after the period set on the
modem.
Refer to your modem's instruction manual for details.
114
- (3) Redial interval (secs.) (Default = 30 sec.)
If the MN Converter dials a notification contact but the contact telephone does not answer, the
converter redials the number for the number of times specified in "(4) Number of redials" below.
In this setting, specify a period between 30 and 99 seconds in 1-second increments as the interval
between redials.
- (4) Number of redials (times) (Default = 3 times)

Set a number between 0 and 10 as the number of redials when the MN Converter dials a notification
contact but the contact telephone does not answer.
If you set this number to 0, the converter does not redial the number.
- (5) Redial again (Default = Not selected)

If you tick this option, when the MN Converter redials a number for the number of times specified in
"(4) Number of redials" and there is still no reply, the converter again attempts to report the same
notification data after the period specified in "(1) Minimum reporting period" has passed.
It repeats this process until notification succeeds.
If this option is not ticked and redialing fails to establish contact, the result is stored in the error report
log as a failure and that notification process ends. If this option is ticked, the result is not logged as a
failure and notification is retried.
- (6) Server/Tool (Default = Server)

Choose whether the software running on the remote monitoring PC connected to the notification
contact is the dedicated server software or another software tool.
Server ------------ The MN Converter waits until it receives a "REP" character string from the remote
monitoring PC in response to a notification.
If "REP" is received, the notification result is stored in the MN Converter's Report log
as a success.
If no response is received after a set time, the notification result is stored in the MN
Converter's Report log as a failure.
Tool ----------- Without waiting for a response from the remote monitoring PC, the MN Converter
stores the notification result in its Report log as a success when the notification from
the MN Converter is completed.
When a notification test is run, this setting is also used to identify the notification contact and determine
whether notification was a success or a failure.
- (7) Response timeout (secs.) (Default = 10 sec.)

When "Server" is selected in "(6) Server/Tool" above, use this setting to specify a period between 10
and 60 seconds in 1-second increments as the time for which the MN Converter waits for a "REP"
response from the server.
When "Tool" is selected, this setting is disabled.
- (8) Number of the data retransmission (times) (Default = 5 times)

When "Server" is selected in "(6) Server/Tool" above and no "REP" response is received from the
server in the time set in "(7) Response timeout" above, use this setting to specify a number between
0 and 10 as the number of times the MN Converter retries server notification.
If you set this number to 0, the MN Converter does not retry notification.
When "Tool" is selected, this setting is disabled.
115
The figure below summarizes these settings.
[If the notification contact telephone does not answer]
(1) Minimum reporting period

Error oc
curred
(A)
Dial * The contact telephone
normally answers during this
(2) Call duration
period.
Contact telephone:
No answer
(3) Redial interval
duration
Dial
(4) Number of redials

Contact telephone: interval duration
No answer
(3) Redial interval
duration
Dial
Contact telephone:
No answer
(5) Redial again (1) Minimum reporting period
Not selected Selected
Result stored in the error report log as a

notification failure.
To (A)
116
[If the notification contact telephone answers]
Error occurred
(1) Minimum reporting period
Dial
* "REP" response normally received
Contact telephone: Notification details sent during this period and notification is
Answer successful.
(6) Server/Tool
Toolelected Server selected (7) Response timeout
Notification details: Resent

notification success.
(7) Response timeout (8) Number of
the data
retransmission
Notification details:
Resent

notification failure.
117
3.14.9 Error notification data format
The notification data sent from the MN Converter to the remote monitoring PC via the telephone lines is in
the format shown below. The remote monitoring PC receives and processes this data in the dedicated server
software or another dedicated software tool. Prior to notification, up to 50 items of error data are stored on
the MN Converter. No more than 50 items of error data can be reported each time (each dialing).
If there are more than 50 errors, only the number of excess errors is reported.
The 50 items are divided into blocks of up to 20 items for transmission.
[Data format]
NO10 -- Notification number
MITSUBISHI ELEC BUILDING -- Site name
0312502
0346607 -- Error data (up to 20 items)
0352503
*
*
*
(20 or more items)
0362502
0352504
*
*
*
(40 or more items)
0362502
0352504
*
*
*
OVER12 -- Number of items in excess of 50 (if there are more than 50 items)
- Notification number
NO + notification number
The number increments by 1 for each item up to 50 items. When 50 is reached, numbering restarts at 1.
If there are more than 20 items of error data, the notification is divided and the notification number
increments by 1 for each item. The notification number displayed by the Maintenance Tool matches the
error report log number on the MN Converter. When the log is cleared in the Maintenance Tool error
report log screen, the numbering restarts from 1. The notification number for a test notification is 0.
- Site name
Site name
The site name specified in the Error notification mode setting/cancellation screen.
- Error data
Address of unit on which the error occurred (3 digits) + error code (4 digits)
For a test notification, the unit where the error occurred is "MN Converter’s address" and the error code
(1 only) is "0000".
- Number of errors in excess of 50

OVER + the number of errors in excess of 50
118
3.14.10 MN Converter LED display
The MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) has a STATUS LED (yellow) that displays the converter status.
STATUS LED (Yellow)
MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E)
STATUS/POWER
The STATUS LED blinking patterns are shown below.

[Maintenance mode]
Lit: Ready for operation. (normal)
Unlit: Not ready for operation. (error)
[Remote error notification mode]

Lit: Ready for operation. (normal)
Unlit: Not ready for operation. (error)
Blink: When the remote error notification activates, the LED light blinks according to the following
blink patterns:
··Lit (Unit: second)

Pattern Explanation Priority* Blinking pattern Operation status
High
1 Slow blink Modem error
0.5 2.0 0.5

2 Long blink Remote error notification failed
Low 0.2-0.1-0.2-0.5
0.5
3 Double blink Redialing
2.0 0.5 2.0
4 Blinking Air-conditioner error
Pattern
1----------Modem error
Unable to communicate with the modem. The MN Converter is not connected to the modem
or the modem is not turned on.
0.5Check the connection to the modem and that the modem is
turned on.
(*When all of the operation statuses occur at a time, the status with the highest priority is displayed.)
2----------Remote error notification failed

A failed notification result is saved in the Report log stored on the MN Converter. [See
section 3.14.5.]
If the LED is displaying this pattern, check the Report log in the Maintenance Tool and
eliminate the cause of the failure.
When the Report log is displayed, the software recognizes that the log has been "checked
by a person" and resets the display pattern.
When it reaches the limit of 50 items stored in the Report log, and the oldest entries that
exceed the 50 limits are deleted. The display is reset when there are no failure results in the
Report log.
3----------Redialing
The LED blinks in this pattern while the MN Converter is redialing after there is no answer
from a notification contact telephone.
119
4----------Air-conditioner error
The LED blinks in this pattern when an error requiring notification has occurred in one of the
units being monitored for errors and the MN Converter is storing the error data. If an error
occurs in a unit that is not being monitored for errors, or if the error code is masked or does
not require notification, the LED does not blink. This display is reset when error notification is
carried out.
120
3.15 Setting and Monitoring DIDO/AI/PI Controllers
The “Setting and Monitoring DIDO/AI/PI Controllers" has been located starting from Ver4.20.
- Settings and monitoring DIDO Controller (PAC-YG66DCA), AI Controller (PAC-YG63MCA), and
PI Controller (PAC-YG60MCA) can be made. (PI Controllers can be used only for monitoring.)
- DIDO Controllers and AI Controllers have an interlock control function.
DIDO Controllers can also change the operation status of M-NET devices (such as indoor units, DIDO
Controllers) by sending operation commands. DIDO Controllers can output contacts on DIDO Controllers
themselves depending on the change in input contact status.
AI Controllers can change the operation status of M-NET devices (such as indoor units, DIDO
Controllers) by sending operation commands depending on the change in measurement values.
“Interlock operation conditions” for the “interlock control function” can be set on Maintenance
Tool.
NOTE:
Before using the interlock control function, plan carefully how the air-conditioners will be used.
If the interlock control function is used without thorough consideration, unexpected operation
may result.
3.15.1 Setting and Monitoring DIDO Controllers (66DC)

DIDO Controller(PAC-YG66DCA) can be used in combination with a system controller (Centralized
Controller or TG-2000A) to operate/stop general-purpose equipment, as well as to monitor the operating
status and error status.
Furthermore, DIDO Controller is equipped with two sets (channels 1 and 2) of standard terminals and four
sets of expansion connectors as the input/output terminals.
(a) ON/OFF, (ON) output

(b) (OFF) output
(c) ON/OFF input
(d) Error/Normal input
Standard: Terminal block (for 2 units)
Expansion: Connectors (for 4 units)
Total: 6 units
Centralized DIDO controller

Controller M-NET
M-NET
Hub 24 VDC
Outdoor unit Power supply
(a)(b) (c) (d)

Indoor units
TG-2000A
Centralized
Controller Web Max. 6 units
General-purpose equipments
121
The function allotment of DIDO Controller, Centralized Controller Web Browser, TG-2000A and Maintenance
Tool is as follows.
[Note]S:Setting possibility, M:Monitoring only, -:None

Function name DIDO Controller Centralized TG-2000A Maintenance Tool
Controller
Web
Address setting S*1 - - M
Output method S*1 - - M
(Level/pulse) setting
Error input logic (a S*1 - - M
contact/b contact) setting
Group registration - S S -
Operation and monitoring - S S M
(Compulsion operation is
possible.)
Time setting - S S M
(Operation is possible)*2
*1 It is set with Dip switch of DIDO Controller.
*2 When Centralized Controller or TG-2000A is connected, the time setting must be made on Centralized Controller Web
Browser or TG-2000A.
The following settings and monitoring can be made on DIDO Controllers (PAC-YG66DCA).
Set the current time before using the DIDO Controller.
When Centralized Controller or TG-2000A is connected, the time setting must be made on
Centralized Controller Web or TG-2000A.
When neither of them is connected, refer to section [3.15.1.1 Time setting on DIDO Controllers].
(a) Operation
*Contact output
*Operation time reset
(b) Monitoring
*Input/output status
*Operation time (contact ON/OFF hours)
*Dip switch settings
122
3.15.1.1 Time setting on DIDO Controllers
NOTE:
When Centralized Controller or TG-2000A is connected, the time setting must be made on Centralized
Controller Web or TG-2000A.

select [DIDO/AI/PI] -> [DIDO setting] in
the sub-menu.
(2) Click of the unit (DIDO Controller)

to be set or monitored on the Main screen.
(3) DIDO controller (66DC) input/output status

monitoring screen will appear.
(4) Click [Date/Time setting] in the

DIDO controller (66DC) input/output status
monitoring screen.
(5) The current time is monitored, and

Date/Time setting screen will appear.
(6) Set the current date and time.
(8) The message ”Are you sure you want to send the
Date/Time setting?” will appear. Click [Yes].
(9) Time is set to DIDO Controller, and the message

“Settings have been sent.” will appear.
Click [OK].
(10) Click [Close] to return to the

DIDO controller (66DC) input/output status monitoring screen.
123
3.15.1.2 Monitoring input/output status on DIDO Controllers (66DC)
select [DIDO/AI/PI] -> [DIDO setting] in
the sub-menu.

(3) The input/output status is monitored, and

DIDO controller (66DC) input/output status
[Operation output status]

[Operation input status]
The ON/OFF status for each contact is
monitored and displayed.
[Error input status]
The error input status for each contact is
monitored and displayed.
[Operation output time(min.)]

[Operation input time(min.)]
The integrated operation time for operation
ON/OFF time is monitored and displayed.
(4) Click [Monitor update] to update the monitoring status.
(5) Click [File output] to save the monitored information as a CSV file.
1) Click [File output].
2) The message “Please select symbols for use as
delimiters.” will appear. Click [Use ,] or [Use ;].
3) [File] is output and saved.
The output destination folder path will be displayed.
The folder name is
C:MntToolEA¥Data.
[See section 5.6.]
124
3.15.1.3 Output control
(1) Click [Output control] in the DIDO
controller (66DC) input/output status
monitoring screen.
(2) The current output status is monitored, and

Output control screen will appear.
* The pressed (sunken) button shows

the current status.
(3) Check the checkbox of the channel to be output.
(4) Click [Operation] or [Stop].
(6) The message ”Settings will be sent. OK?” will appear, click [Yes].
The setting will be applied to the unit.
(7) The message ”Settings have been sent.” will appear, click [OK].
(8) Click [Close] to return to the DIDO controller (66DC) input/output status monitoring screen.
125
3.15.1.4 Monitoring Dip switch setting of DIDO Controllers
(1) Click [Option] in the DIDO controller (66DC)
input/output status monitoring screen and
select [DIP switch setting monitoring] in
the sub-menu.
(2) The DIP switch setting is monitored, and

DIP switch setting monitoring screen
will appear.

the current status.
Refer to section [3.14.1.2 Monitoring input/output status on DIDO Controllers (66DC) (5)].
The folder name is
[See section 5.6.]
3.15.1.5 Operation time reset

(1) Click [Option] in the DIDO controller (66DC)
input/output status monitoring screen and
select [Operation time reset] in the sub-menu.
(2) Operation time reset screen will appear.
(3) Check the checkbox of to reset the operation time of the selected channel.
(6) The message ”Settings have been sent.”will appear, click [OK].
126
3.15.2 Setting and Monitoring AI Controllers (63MC)
AI Controller (PAC-YG63MCA) is capable of measuring the temperature and humidity.
Trend displays of measurement data can be shown on the Centralized Controller Web Browser and
TG-2000A. Furthermore, an alarm can be output if measurement data exceeds a preset upper or lower limit.
(1) Channel 1 temperature or humidity sensor input

(2) Channel 2 temperature or humidity sensor input
(3) Channel 1 upper/lower limit alarm output
(4) Channel 2 upper/lower limit alarm output
Centralized AI controller
Controller M-NET
M-NET
Hub 24 VDC
(1)(2) (3)(4)
Indoor units
TG-2000A Centralized Max.
Controller Web Temperature 1
Temperature sensor,
Humidity 1
Humidity sensor, etc
The function allotment of AI Controller, Centralized Controller Web Browser,TG-2000A and Maintenance
Tool is as follows.
[Note] S:Setting possibility, M:Monitoring only, -:None
Function name AI Controller Centralized TG-2000A Maintenance Tool
Controller
Web
Setting of the input to use S*1 - - M
Setting of the analog input S*1 - - M
type
Range and category - S S M
setting of sensor (Operation is possible)*2
Setting of upper/lower limit S*1 - - M
alarm interlock output use
Range setting of - S S M
Upper/Lower limit alarm (Operation is possible)*2
Monitoring and trend - S S M
displays of measurement (Monitoring only)
data
(Operation is possible)*2
127
The following settings and monitoring can be made on AI Controllers (PAC-YG63MCA).
When Centralized Controller or TG-2000A is connected, the setting must be made on Centralized
Controller Web Browser or TG-2000A.
(a) Settings
*Current time
*Measurement category (temperature, humidity)
*Measurement range (upper limit, lower limit, correction value)
*Out-of limit alarm value (alarm threshold, alarm-off threshold)
(b) Monitoring
*Current measurement value
*Current out-of-limit alarm status
*Correction value for Pt100 detection
*Dip switch setting
*Measurement value history
*History of out-of-limit alarm/alarm-off
*Change history of measurement category (temperature or humidity)
NOTE:
The temperature is displayed in the unit (°C or °F) that has been selected at Maintenance Tool startup
3.15.2.1 Monitoring measurement value on AI Controllers (63MC)

select [DIDO/AI/PI] -> [AI/PI setting] in
the sub-menu.
(2) Click of the unit (AI Controller)

(3) The current measurement value is monitored, and

AI controller (63MC) measurement value
[Measurement value]
The current measurement value of
each channel is shown.
[Alarm status]
The current out-of-limit alarm status is shown.
[Upper detection] [Upper cancellation]
[Lower detection] [Lower cancellation]
The preset alarm detection value and
alarm cancellation value are shown.
(4) Click [Monitor update] to update the monitoring status.
The folder name is
[See section 5.7.]
128
3.15.2.2 Setting for AI Controllers (63MC)
NOTE:
When Centralized Controller or TG-2000A is connected, the setting must be made on Centralized
Controller Web Browser or TG-2000A.
When the settings are made on Maintenance Tool, the setting change is not applied to Centralized
Controller or TG-2000A.
(1) Click [Setting contents] in the AI controller

(63MC) measurement value monitoring
screen.
(2) The setting details are monitored, and, AI controller (63MC) setting screen will appear.
[Category]
The measurement category (temperature or
humidity) is shown.
[Upper limit value][Lower limit value]
The upper/lower limits of the measurement
range are shown.
<Settable range>
In case of temperature:-100.0°C to 100.0°C
(-148.0°F to 212.0°F)
In case of humidity:0.0% to 100.0%
Note that the range must be fixed between
–30.0°C and 60.0°C (-22.0°F and 140.0°F)
when the temperature sensor for Pt100 detection
(Ch1 only) is used.
[Correction value]
The correction value is shown.
< Settable range >
In case of temperature:-10.0°C to 10.0°C (-18.0°F to 18.0°F)
In case of humidity:-10.0% to 10.0%
[Upper limit alarm detection] [Upper limit alarm cancellation]
[Lower limit alarm cancellation] [Lower limit alarm detection]
The alarm detection value and the alarm cancellation value are shown.
[Time setting]
The current date and time is shown.
(3) Check the checkbox of the channel to be output and

the check box of [Time setting] (when time setting is needed).
(4) Change the settings.
129
(7) The message ”Settings have been sent.” will appear, click [OK].
(8) Click [Close] to return to the AI controller (63MC) measurement value monitoring screen.
NOTE:
When you use Fahrenheit for the unit, there might be differences of the plus or minus 0.1 °F in the set
value and the value monitored after it sets it.
3.15.2.3 Monitoring Dip switch setting of AI Controllers

(1) Click [Option] in the AI controller (63MC)
measurement value monitoring screen and
the sub-menu.

will appear.

the current status.
The folder name is
[See section 5.7.]
3.15.2.4 Monitoring of the correction value for Pt100 detection

(1) Click [Option] in the AI controller (63MC) measurement
value monitoring screen, and select [Monitoring of the
correction value for Pt100 detection] in the sub-menu.
130
(2) The correction value for Pt100 detection is monitored,
and Monitoring of the correction value for Pt100
detection screen will appear.
[Correction value]
The correction value for each Reference correction
point No. is shown.
(3) Click [File output] to save the monitored information

as a CSV file.
The folder name is
[See section 5.7.]
3.15.2.5 Measured value history

The measurement values in the past are displayed. Up to 120 of the latest data can be displayed.

value monitoring screen and
select [Measured value history] in the sub-menu.
(2) The measured value history is monitored, and

Measured value history screen will appear.
[Date/Time]
The date and time when the
measurement is made is shown.
[Ch.1 Measurement value]
[Ch.2 Measurement value]
The measurement value of each channel
is shown.
The folder name is
[See section 5.7.]
131
3.15.2.6 Out-of-limit alarm history
The history of out-of-limit alarm/alarm-off is displayed. Up to 100 of the latest data can be displayed.

value monitoring screen, and
select [Out-of-limit alarm history] in the sub-menu.
(2) The out-of-limit alarm history is monitored, and

Out-of-limit alarm historyscreen will appear.
[Date/Time]
The date and time when the alarm is
activated/deactivated is shown.
[Interlock signal contact output]
The output status of interlock signal contact is
shown.
[Alarm status]
The alarm status (out-of-limit alarm ON or OFF)
is shown.
[Measurement value]
The measurement value when an alarm is
detection/cancellation is shown.
(3) Select the channel [Ch1] or [Ch2] to be monitored using the pulldown.
(4) Click [History clear] to clear the history of out-of-limit alarm/alarm-off.

1)Click [History clear].
2)The message ”Do you want to clear the history?”
will appear, and click [Yes] .
3) The message ”The history was cleared.”

will appear., and click [OK].
The folder name is
[See section 5.7.]
132
3.15.2.7 Measurement category setting history
The change history of measurement category (temperature or humidity) is displayed. Up to 10 of the latest
data
can be displayed.
select [Measurement category setting history] in the
sub-menu.
(2) The measurement category setting history is monitored,

and Measurement category setting history screen
will appear.
[Date/Time]
The date and time when the measurement
category is changed is shown.
[Ch No.]
The channel on which the measurement category
is changed is shown.
[Measurement Category]
The measurement category after the change has been made is shown.
The folder name is
[See section 5.7.]
133
3.15.3 Monitoring PI Controllers (60MC)
PI Controller (PAC-YG60MCA) counts pulses from a power meter, gas meter, water meter, and calorimeter.
The combined use of the Centralized Controller and TG-2000A allows for calculating the charges for each
unit
and performing peak-cut operation (demand control).
Centralized PI controller
Controller M-NET
M-NET
Hub 24 VDC
Indoor units
TG-2000A Centralized Up to 4 contacts
Controller Web Watt-hour meter with
pulse transmitter, etc.
The function allotment of PI Controller, Centralized Controller Web Browser,TG-2000A and Maintenance
Tool is as follows.
[Note] S:Setting possibility, M:Monitoring only, -:None
Function name PI Controller Centralized TG-2000A Maintenance Tool
Controller
Web
Use of input contact setting S*1 - - M
Pulse weight value setting S*1 S*2 S*2 M
- - S M
Charge time zone setting
The following monitors of PI Controllers (PAC-YG60MCA) can be done.
NOTE:
The setting must be made on Centralized Controller Web Browser or TG-2000A.
*Current measurement value

*Measurement data history (cumulative value) (for the last 7 days)
*Measurement data history (settlement date) (up to 3 data of the last 3 settlement days in each
month)
*Power failure/restoration history
*Pulse unit (weight) change history
*Current time
*Pulse unit (weight) setting
*Measurement unit setting
*Measurement data recording intervals
*Charge time zone setting
*Thermal storage device connection setting
*Settlement day setting
*Dip switch setting
134
3.15.3.1 PI Controller (60MC) measurement value Monitor (current value)
select [DIDO/AI/PI] -> [AI/PI setting] in the sub-menu.
(2) Click of the unit (PI Controller)

to be monitored on the Main screen.

PI controller (60MC) measurement value
[Ch No/Pulse unit (weight)]

The current pulse unit (weight) of each channel
is shown.
[Measurement value]
The current measurement value is shown.
[Pulse value]
The current pulse value is shown.
[Unit price 1 to 5]
The current measurement value per unit price is shown.
[Settlement date]
The settlement date is shown.
(4) Click [Monitor update] to update the measurement values.
The folder name is
[See section 5.8.]
3.15.3.2 PI Controller (60MC) measurement value Monitor (cumulative value)

(1) Click [Measurement data history (cumulative
value)] in the PI controller (60MC) measurement
value monitoring screen.
(2) The current measurement value is monitored,

and Measurement data history (cumulative
value) will appear.
The measurement data history per channel and

unit price for the last seven days and the current
measurement value (the leftmost) will be displayed.
[Date] YY/MM/DD
[Cumulative value]
135
The folder name is
[See section 5.8.]
3.15.3.3 PI Controller (60MC) measurement value Monitor (settlement date)

(1) Click [Measurement data history (settlement date)]
in the PI controller (60MC) measurement
value monitoring screen.

Measurement data history (settlement date)
will appear.
The measurement data history per channel and

unit price for the last three settlement day will be
displayed.
[Date] YY/MM/DD (settlement date)
[Value (settlement date)]
The folder name is
[See section 5.8.]
3.15.3.4 Monitoring of settings on PI Controllers (60MC)

(1) Click [Setting contents] in the PI controller
(60MC) measurement value monitoring
screen.
136
(2) The setting details are monitored, and
PI controller (60MC) setting screen will appear.
No settings of PI Controller can be made in the
Maintenance Tool.
[Pulse unit (weight)]

The pulse unit (weight) and the measurement unit
of each channel are shown.
(Unit: kWh, m3, MJ, or -- no unit)
[Measurement data recording intervals]
The measurement data recording intervals is shown.
[Settlement time][Settlement date]
The settlement day (month-end, or 1-28th) and
the time (0:00 or 8:00) settings are shown.
[Time setting]
The current date and time is shown.
(3) Click [Close] to return to the PI controller (60MC) measurement value monitoring screen.
3.15.3.5 Charge time zone setting monitor

(1) Click [Option] in the PI controller (60MC) measurement
select [Charge time zone setting monitor] in
the sub-menu.
(2) The charge time zone setting is monitored, and

Charge time zone setting monitor screen
will appear.
[Set time]
The charge time zone setting is shown.
[Class]
The price class during the set time zone is
shown.
The folder name is
[See section 5.8.]
137
3.15.3.6 Monitoring Dip switch setting of PI Controllers
(1) Click [Option] in the PI controller (60MC)
the sub-menu.

will appear.

the current status.
The folder name is
[See section 5.8.]
3.15.3.7 Power failure/restoration history

(1) Click [Option] in the PI controller (60MC)
select [Power failure/restoration history] in
the sub-menu.
(2) The power failure/restoration history is monitored,

and Power failure/restoration historyscreen
will appear.
Up to 20 of the latest data can be displayed.
[Date/Time]
The date and time when power
failure/restoration occurs is shown.
[Power supply status]
The status, power failure or power restoration,
is shown.
The folder name is
[See section 5.8.]
138
3.15.3.8 Pulse unit (weight) change history
(1) Click [Option] in the PI controller (60MC) measurement
select [Pulse unit (weight) change history] in
the sub-menu.
(2) The pulse unit (weight) change history is monitored, and

Pulse unit (weight) change history screen will appear.
[Date/Time]
The date and time when the pulse unit (weight) is
changed is shown.
[Ch No.]
The channel on which the pulse unit (weight) is changed
is shown.
[Pulse unit (weight)]
The pulse unit (weight) after the change has been made is shown.
The folder name is
[See section 5.8.]
139
3.15.4 Interlock control settings on DIDO Controllers (66DC)
DIDO Controllers (PAC-YG66DCA) can control the following items of M-NET devices or the contacts on
DIDO Controllers depending on the change in input contact status.
*DIDO Controller: contact output
*Indoor unit: start/stop control
*Indoor unit: operation mode change
*Indoor unit: temperature setting
The interlock control settings can be made on Maintenance Tool. (Max. 24 patterns)
M-NET
Centralized
Controller
M-NET
DIDO controller
Lighting
Indoor units Start equipment
Interlock
control
Interlock Lighting
E.g.) control
<Input> <Output>
Card insertion -> Indoor unit: “Start” Card insertion
Card insertion -> Lighting equipment “Lighting”
Card key
Caution:
Before using the interlock control, you must agree to the following.
1. This feature must not be used for disaster prevention or security purposes.
(Not designed to be used in situations that are life-threatening)
2. No functions must be added that allow the malfunctioning unit to run by defeating the
safety features, such as an external ON/OFF switch or a short-circuit.
3. Those settings for the function that are not supported by the interlocked units must
not be made. All the settings must be made within the specified range.
(Failure to observe these precautions may result in malfunctions and failures.)
4. Perform a test run for interlock control, and confirm the correct settings and normal
operation.
5. The system must be configured in the way that integrates the operation of the
interlocked fire and emergency control systems.
140
3.15.4.1 Starting the interlock control settings on DIDO Controllers
The password is needed to make the settings for interlock control. Only the allowed administrator can perform
the settings. To make the settings, enter the password first to be identified as an administrator. The
procedures are shown below. The setting procedures are the same for AI Controllers.

select [DIDO/AI/PI] -> [Interlock control option] in
the sub-menu.
(2) Interlock control option screen will appear.
(3) Click the checkbox of [I agree] to accept the agreement.
Caution:
Read the agreement carefully.
(4) Enter the password.
(5) Click [OK].
(6) ”Do you want to enable the DIDO/AI interlock setting?”

will appear, click [Yes].
(7) ”DIDO/AI interlock setting has been enabled.”will appear,

click [OK].
(8) [DIDO/AI interlock setting ] in [DIDO/AI/PI] sub-menu

becomes active, and the settings can be made.
NOTE:
[DIDO/AI interlock setting] will be kept active once it becomes active.
To make it inactive, enter the password to make a inactivation on the interlock control option screen
[ Refer to 3.15.4.1 (4) ].
141
3.15.4.2 Interlock control settings on DIDO Controllers
select [DIDO/AI/PI] -> [DIDO/AI interlock setting] in
the sub-menu.

(3)DIDO controller (66DC) Interlock control setting

screen will appear.
Caution:
(4) Click the checkbox of [I agree] to accept the agreement.
(5) The interlock control settings is monitored,

and DIDO controller (66DC) Interlock
control setting screen will appear.
[Interlock No.]
The pattern No. of interlock control
setting is shown. Up to 24 patterns
can be set.
<Input>
[Ch No.][Interlock operation conditions]
The input Ch No. of the interlock source
and the interlock condition (operation,
stop, error occurrence, error reset) are
shown.
<Output>
[Interlock target]
The unit address of the interlock target is shown.
When the contact on the DIDO Controller is output, the channel No. to be output is shown.
[Transmission intervals (min.)]
“-“ is shown. (not to be used)
[Interlock control contents]
Interlock operation (start/stop etc.) is shown.
142
<Interlock special condition setting>
[Emergency stop receive: Interlock disable]
When the emergency stop command is received from Centralized Controller, whether to enable or
disable the interlock operation depending on the change in input contact status can be set for each
channel.
* The pressed (sunken) button shows the currently “Disable” status.
The interlock operation will be disabled for 15 minutes on the input channel on which “Disable” is
set after the emergency stop command is received from Centralized Controller.
Unless the emergency stop command is received again within 15 minutes, the “Interlock disable”
will be inactive after 15 minutes have passed.
For your safety, “Disable” is set (default) to all channels. However, the setting can be changed
on the unit that is required to be run at emergency. Consider carefully how the unit is required
to be run at emergency, and make the proper setting.
Centralized
Emergency stop receive: M-NET Controller
Interlock disable setting
Input channel
Emergency stop command
Ch1 Disable DIDO
Controller
Change in input
Ch2 Disable (66DC)
contact status
Ch3
Interlock operation
***
[SC communication error detection: Interlock disable]

When the communication error with Centralized Controller occurs, whether to enable or disable the
interlock operation depending on the change in input contact status can be set for each channel.
The interlock operation will be disabled on the input channel on which “Disable” is set when the
communication error with Centralized Controller occurs.
When the communication error with Centralized Controller is reset, the “Interlock disable” will
be inactive.
For your safety, “Disable” must be set when no means (such as local remote controllers) is
available to stop the operation of the interlock target unit.
Centralized
SC communication error detection: M-NET Controller
Input channel Communication error
Ch1 Disable DIDO

Controller
Ch2 Disable (66DC)
Change in input
contact status
Ch3
Interlock operation
***
143
[Interlock operation error: Error report output]
When the interlock control with the M-NET device is failed (when no response to the interlock
operation command is received from the M-NET device), Whether to output or doesn't output the error
report can be set for each output channel.
* The pressed (sunken) button shows the currently “Output” status.
Interlock operation error: Error report output setting

Output channel
M-NET DIDO Ch1 Output
Controller
Interlock (66DC) Ch2 Error report
Operation
Indoor unit Command Ch3 Output
x
***
No response
(6) Select the line to be set, and click [Edit].
To copy the preset interlock setting, select

the line to be copied, and click [Copy], then
select the line to be pasted, and click [Paste].
To delete the setting, select the line to be

deleted, and click [Delete].
(7) DIDO controller (66DC) Interlock control setting

screen will appear.
[Interlock No.]
The pattern No. of interlock control setting is
shown.
[Ch No.]
Set the input Ch No. of interlock source.
[Interlock operation conditions]

Set the interlock condition (operation, stop,
error occurrence, error reset) of the input
channel (Ch No.) of the interlock source.
144
[Interlock target]
Select the unit address to be controlled.
When the contact on the DIDO Controller is output, select the address of the DIDO Controller.
Select one of the following operations by clicking a radio button.
* The pressed (sunken) button shows the currently “Enabled” status.
* [DIDO operation]
Select the channel to be output, and set whether to [Operation] or [Stop] the selected channel.
* [ON/OFF]
Set the start/stop control of the indoor unit.
Even when the LOSSNAY unit is not interlocked with the indoor unit, one of the operation mode
buttons of [Interlocked LOSSNAY unit] must be set to “Enabled”.
* [Mode]
Set the operation mode of the indoor unit.
* [Set temp.]
Set the set temperature of the indoor unit.(19°C - 28°C)
Caution:
Only make the interlock settings for the functions that are supported by the unit to be interlocked.
Making the interlock setting for functions that are not supported may result in malfunctions or failures.
(8) Click [OK].
(9) The screen will return to the DIDO controller (66DC) Interlock control setting screen.
(* The settings have not been saved yet.)
(10) Repeat the steps between (6) and (9).
(11) Select the [Disable] or [Output] of each

channel for each setting item,
[Emergency stop receive: Interlock disable],
[SC communication error detection:
Interlock disable] and [Interlock operation
error: Error report output].
(13) ”Settings will be sent. OK?”

(14) ”Settings have been sent.”will appear, click [OK].
(15) Click [Close] to return to the Main screen.
NOTE:
145
NOTE:
If there are several patterns of the same input channel and interlock operation conditions,
the interlock control operation will be output in the ascending order of the interlock operation
No.
Note the order when setting the same interlock operation conditions patterns.
To output several interlock control operations under the same input interlock operation conditions,
make the following settings.
E.g.)
<Input interlock operation condition>
[Ch No.] 1 [Interlock operation conditions] Error occurrence
When following three interlock control operations are output
under the above interlock operation condition.
<Interlock control operation output>
[Interlock target] 001 (Indoor unit: address 01)
The interlock control is output in the following order.
[ON/OFF] Operation, Interlocked LOSSNAY unit: Run (Low)
[Mode] Cool
[Set temp.] 25°C
[Interlock No.] 1 [Ch No.] 1 [Interlock operation conditions] Error occurrence

[Interlock target] 001 [ON/OFF] Operation,
Interlocked LOSSNAY unit: Run (Low)
[Interlock target] 001 [Mode] Cool
[Interlock target] 001 [Set temp.] 25°C
The interlock control operation is output in the order of No.1, 2 and 3.
The interlock control No. does not have to be consecutive;

however it is recommended to set the consecutive No. to avoid mistakes in the setting.
146
3.15.4.3 Temporary interlock prohibition setting
(1) Click [Temporary prohibition].
(2) Temporary interlock prohibition setting screen

will appear.

the current status.
(3) Click the checkbox of the channel to be changed, and select [Disable] or [Enable].

NOTE:
The “disable temporary interlock control (prohibition)” will be active for 15 minutes after the setting
has been sent, and will be inactive after 15 minutes have passed.
When the setting is sent again within 15 minutes before the “disable temporary interlock control ”
becomes inactive, the “disable temporary interlock control ” will be active again for another 15
minutes.
When the “enable temporary interlock control ” setting is sent during the “disable temporary interlock
control ” within 15 minutes, the “disable temporary interlock control ” will be inactive.
(7) Click [Close] to return to the DIDO controller (66DC) Interlock control setting screen.
147
3.15.4.4 Saving the interlock control settings on DIDO Controllers (66DC) in CSV format
(1) Click [File output] to save the interlock control
settings as a CSV file.
Refer to section [3.15.1.2 Monitoring
input/output status on DIDO Controllers (66DC) (5)].
The folder name is
[See section 5.9.]
3.15.4.5 DIDO Controller interlock operation history

select [Interlock operation history]
(2) The interlock operation history is monitored,

and Interlock operation history screen
will appear.
[Date/Time]
The date and time when the interlock control
is made is shown.
[Interlock No.]
shown. [ Refer to section 3.15.4.2. ]
[Interlock operation type]
The interlock target (M-NET device or contact on DIDO Controller) is shown.
[M-NET interlock command response]
When a response is received from the M-NET device to be interlocked, “Normal” is shown.
When no response is received, “Error” is shown.
When the interlock operation type is “Interlocked with contact”, “-“ is shown.
(3) Click [History clear] to clear the interlock operation history.

Refer to section [ 3.15.2.6 Out-of-limit alarm history (4) ].
(4) Click [File output] to save the interlock operation history as a CSV file.
The folder name is
[See section 5.9.]
(5) Click [Close] to return to the DIDO controller (66DC) Interlock control setting screen.
148
3.15.5 Interlock control settings on AI Controllers
AI Controllers (PAC-YG63MCA) can control the following items of M-NET devices depending on the
measurement values measured by AI Controllers.
*Indoor unit: start/stop control
*Indoor unit: operation mode change
*Indoor unit: temperature setting
The interlock control settings can be made on Maintenance Tool. (Max. 24 patterns)
Centralized M-NET
Controller
M-NET
AI controller
Indoor units Start

Interlock
control
E.g.)
<Input> <Output>
Temperature>25°C -> Indoor unit: “Start” Temperature>25°C
Temperature sensor
Caution:
Before using the interlock control, you must agree to the following.
1. This feature must not be used for disaster prevention or security purposes.
(Not designed to be used in situations that are life-threatening)
2. No functions must be added that allow the malfunctioning unit to run by defeating the
safety features, such as an external ON/OFF switch or a short-circuit.
3. Those settings for the function that are not supported by the interlocked units must not
be made. All the settings must be made within the specified range.
(Failure to observe these precautions may result in malfunctions and failures.)
4. Perform a test run for interlock control, and confirm the correct settings and normal
operation.
5. The system must be configured in the way that integrates the operation of the
interlocked fire and emergency control systems.
149
3.15.5.1 Starting the interlock control settings on AI Controllers
The password is needed to make the settings for interlock control. Only the allowed administrator can perform
the settings. To make the settings, enter the password first to be identified as an administrator. The
procedures are shown below. The setting procedures are the same for DIDO Controllers.
Refer to section [3.15.4.1 Starting the interlock control settings on DIDO Controllers ].
3.15.5.2 Interlock control settings on AI Controllers

select [DIDO/AI/PI] -> [DIDO/AI interlock setting] in
the sub-menu.
(2) Click of the unit (AI Controller)

(3) AI controller (63MC) interlock control

setting screen will appear.
Caution:
(4) Click the checkbox of [I agree] to accept the

agreement.
(5) The interlock control settings is monitored,

and AI controller (63MC) interlock control
[Interlock No.]
The pattern No. of interlock control
setting is shown. Up to 24 patterns
can be set.
<Input>
[Ch No.][Interlock operation conditions]
The Ch No. of the interlock source and the
interlock condition (condition based on the
measurement value) are shown.
150
<Output>
[Interlock target]
The unit address of the interlock target is shown.
[Transmission intervals (min.)]
As long as the input interlock condition is met, the interlock control operation will keep being output
continuously at the set intervals.
E.g.) When the following input interlock condition is set

input value>25°C, Transmission intervals (min.): 10 min., Interlock control contents: Operation
As long as the measurement value keeps 26°C, the “operation ON” command will keep being
sent at 10 minute intervals even when the air-conditioner is once turned off by a local remote
controller.
[Interlock control contents]

Interlock operation (start/stop etc.) is shown.
<Interlock special condition setting>

[Emergency stop receive: Interlock disable]
When the emergency stop command is received from Centralized Controller, whether to enable or
disable the interlock operation depending on the change in measurement values can be set for each
channel.
The interlock operation will be disabled for 15 minutes on the input channel on which “Disable” is
set after the emergency stop command is received from Centralized Controller.
Unless the emergency stop command is received again within 15 minutes, the “Interlock disable” will
be inactive after 15 minutes have passed.
For your safety, “Disable” is set (default) to all channels. However, the setting can be changed
on the unit that is required to be run at emergency. Consider carefully how the unit is required
to be run at emergency, and make the proper setting.
Centralized
Emergency stop receive: M-NET Controller
Input channel
Emergency stop command
Ch1 Disable AI
Controller
Ch2 (63MC)
Interlock operation
Change in
measurement values
151
[SC communication error detection: Interlock disable]
When the communication error with Centralized Controller occurs, whether to enable or disable the
interlock operation depending on the change in measurement values can be set for each channel.
The interlock operation will be disabled on the input channel on which “Disable” is set when the
communication error with Centralized Controller occurs.
When the communication error with Centralized Controller is reset, the “Interlock disable” will be
inactive.
For your safety, “Disable” must be set when no means (such as local remote controllers) is
available to stop the operation of the interlock target unit.
Centralized
SC communication error detection: M-NET Controller
Input channel Communication error
Ch1 Disable AI
controller
Ch2 (63MC)
Interlock operation
Change in
measurement values
[Interlock control interval]

Whether the interlock condition is met is determined at the set intervals depending on the monitored
current value.
E.g.) When the interlock control intervals is set to 60 seconds

Whether the interlock condition is met is determined at 60 second intervals depending on the
monitored current value. The interlock control operation will be output when the interlock
condition is met.
152
(6) Select the line to be set, and click [Edit].
To copy the preset interlock setting, select the

line to be copied, and click [Copy], then select
the line to be pasted, and click [Paste].
To delete the setting, select the line to be

deleted, and click [Delete].
(7) AI controller (63MC) interlock control

[Interlock No.]
shown.
[Ch No.]
Set the input Ch No. of interlock source.
[Input conditions]
Set the interlock condition of the interlock source
input channel (Ch No.).
Select the comparison relation between the input
value and the upper/lower threshold.
[Upper threshold][Lower threshold]
The upper/lower threshold to use for input conditions can be set.
Select one among “Detection value”, “Cancellation value”, or “Manual setting”.
When the “Detection value” is selected, the upper/lower limit alarm detection of the interlock source
(AI Controller) will be applied.
[See section 3.15.2.2. Setting for AI Controllers (63MC) (2)]
When the “Cancellation value” is selected, the upper/lower limit alarm cancellation of the interlock
source (AI Controller) will be applied.
When the “Manual setting” is selected, enter the value in the box on the right within the measurement
range (between the upper and the lower limit values) of the interlock source (AI Controller).
[Transmission intervals]
As long as the input interlock condition is met, the interlock control operation will keep being output
continuously at the set intervals.
Select “Disabled” or “Enabled”. When “Enabled” is selected, set the value. (1-120 min.)
[Differential]
(This setting can be made only when “Enable” is selected in the [Data transmission intervals].)
The “differential” can be set.
Select “Disabled” or “Enabled”. When “Enabled” is selected, set the value. (0.1-9.9°C /°F /%)
Make this setting to keep outputting the same interlock control operation preventing other interlock
control operations from being output when the input value remains around the upper/lower thresholds.
As long as the interlock condition is met, the interlock control operation is output under the set interlock
condition (including the set differential). The differential is not available for the first case.
To make the differential valid, make the differentials of all the channels the same.
153
[Interlock target]
Select the unit address to be controlled.
Select one of the following operations by clicking a radio button.
* The pressed (sunken) button shows the currently “Enabled” status.

* [DIDO operation]
Select the channel to be output, and set whether to [Operation] or [Stop] the selected channel.
* [ON/OFF]
Set the start/stop control of the indoor unit.
Even when the LOSSNAY unit is not interlocked with the indoor unit, one of the operation mode
buttons of [Interlocked LOSSNAY unit] must be set to “Enabled”.
* [Mode]
Set the operation mode of the indoor unit.
* [Set temp.]
Set the set temperature of the indoor unit. (19°C - 28°C)
Caution:
Only make the interlock settings for the functions that are supported by the unit to be interlocked.
Making the interlock setting for functions that are not supported may result in malfunctions or failures.
(8) Click [OK].
(9) The screen will return to the AI controller (63MC) interlock control setting screen.
(* The settings have not been saved yet.)
(10) Repeat the steps between (6) and (9).
(11) Select the [Disable] or [Output] of each

channel for each setting item,
[Emergency stop receive: Interlock disable],
[SC communication error detection:
Interlock disable] and
[Interlock control interval].

154
NOTE:
If there are several patterns of the same input channel and interlock operation conditions,
the interlock control operation will be output in the ascending order of the interlock operation
No.
Note the order when setting the same interlock operation conditions patterns.
To output several interlock control operations under the same input interlock operation conditions,
make the following settings.
E.g.)
<Input interlock operation condition>
[Ch No.] 1 [Interlock operation conditions] Input value>25°C
When following three interlock control operations are output
under the above interlock operation condition.
<Interlock control operation output>
[Interlock target] 001 (Indoor unit: address 01)
The interlock control is output in the following order.
[ON/OFF] Operation, Interlocked LOSSNAY unit: Run (Low)
[Mode] Cool
[Set temp.] 23°C
[Interlock No.] 1 [Ch No.] 1 [Interlock operation conditions] Input value>25°C

[Interlock target] 001 [ON/OFF] Operation,
Interlocked LOSSNAY unit: Run (Low)
[Interlock target] 001 [Mode] Cool
[Interlock target] 001 [Set temp.] 23°C
The interlock control operation is output in the order of No.1, 2 and 3.
The interlock control No. does not have to be consecutive;

however it is recommended to set the consecutive No. to avoid mistakes in the setting.
NOTE:
155
3.15.5.3 Temporary interlock prohibition setting
(1) Click [Temporary prohibition].
(2) Temporary interlock prohibition setting screen

will appear.

the current status.
(3) Click the checkbox of the channel to be changed, and select [Disable] or [Enable].

NOTE:
The “disable temporary interlock control (prohibition)” will be active for 15 minutes after the setting
has been sent, and will be inactive after 15 minutes have passed.
When the setting is sent again within 15 minutes before the “disable temporary interlock control”
becomes inactive, the “disable temporary interlock control” will be active again for another 15
minutes.
When the “enable temporary interlock control” setting is sent during the “disable temporary interlock
control” within 15 minutes, the “disable temporary interlock control” will be inactive.
(7) Click [Close] to return to the AI controller (63MC) interlock control setting screen.
156
3.15.5.4 Saving the interlock control settings on AI Controllers (63MC) in CSV format
(1) Click [File output] to save the interlock control
settings as a CSV file.
Refer to section [3.15.1.2 Monitoring input/output
status on DIDO Controllers (66DC) (5)].
The folder name is
[See section 5.9.]
3.15.5.5 AI Controller interlock operation history

select [Interlock operation history]
(2) The interlock operation history is monitored,

and Interlock operation history screen
will appear.
[Date/Time]
The date and time when the interlock control
is made is shown.
[Interlock No.]
shown. [ Refer to section 3.15.5.2. ]
[Interlock operation type]
The interlock target (only the “Interlocked(with M-NET)” here) is shown.
[M-NET interlock command response]
When a response is received from the M-NET device to be interlocked, “Normal” is shown.
When no response is received, “Error” is shown.
When the interlock operation type is “Interlocked with contact”, “-“ is shown.
(3) Click [History clear] to clear the interlock operation history.

Refer to section [ 3.15.2.6 Out-of-limit alarm history (4) ].
(4) Click [File output] to save the interlock operation history as a CSV file.
The folder name is
[See section 5.9.]
(5) Click [Close] to return to the AI controller (63MC) interlock control setting screen.
157
3.16 Setting the Values for Indoor unit Functions
* Features
- The preset values for each function of the connected indoor units can be displayed.
- The preset values for each function of the connected indoor units can be set or changed.
NOTE:
The function mentioned here is not available to the models that do not support this function.
3.16.1 Start-up
(1) Start-up sequence
a) Click [Option (O)] of the menubar in the [On-Line Main]
Screen,
and click [Indoor unit function settings] of the submenu.
b) The [Indoor unit function settings] screen is displayed.
3.16.2 Monitoring the preset value

(1) Select the function whose preset value is to be
monitored from the list of [Indoor unit functions].
a) Click [ ] next to [Indoor unit functions].
b) Select the desired function from the list of functions
that appears.
c) The selected function will appear under [Indoor unit

functions].
(2) Click the [Monitor update] button.

The current data for the selected function will be
collected from all indoor units, and the results will
appear in the [Current value] field.
・Values that may appear in the [Cuurent value] field
(Example of displayed value.)
Displayed value Description
Thermo differential
1.0～5.0
of the heater
Current preset value
Differential of auto
0.9*～5.0
mode changing
Default Default value
The selected function
Not available
is not supported.
* Some models are unsupported to set 0.9 degrees.
158
3.16.3 Setting/Changing the values
(1) Select the function whose preset value is to be
set/changed from the list of [Indoor unit functions].
(Refer to [3.16.2 (1)])
a) Click [ ] next to [Indoor unit functions].
b) Select the desired function from the list of functions.
c) The selected function will appear under [Indoor unit
functions].
(2) Click the check box next to the indoor units whoose
preset values are to be set/changed (multiple selection
allowed).
When the check box next to [All indoor unit choose] is
clicked, all indoor units are selected.
(3) Enter the values in the [Differential] field.

a) Click [ ][ ] next to the preset value to increase
or decrease the value.
・Clicking [ ] increases the value in 0.1 increments.
・Clicking [ ] decreases the value in 0.1 increments.
・The range of values available depends on the function.
(4) Click the [Send setting] button.

a) The changes made to the selected functions for the
selected indoor unit(s) are reflected.
b) The current data for the selected function will be
collected from all indoor units, and the results will
appear in the [Cuurent value] field.
(Refer to [3.16.2 (2)])
3.16.4 Exiting the function

(1) Exiting sequence
a) Click the [Close] button to close the [Indoor unit
function settings] screen to go back to the [On-Line
Main] screen.
159
3.17 Compressor operating time monitor
* Features
- The compressor operating time of the outdoor unit can be monitored.
3.17.1 Start-up
(1) Start-up sequence
a) Click [Option] of the menubar

on the [On-Line Main] screen,
and click [Compressor operating time
monitor]→[Online Monitor] of the submenu.
b) The [Compresor operating time monitor comment input]

screen is displayed.
Input the comment on the monitored data.
c) When [OK] button clicked, it start the monitoring.
d) When the monitor is completed, the monitor result is

saved, and the list of the data monitored to
[Compressor operating time monitor list] screen
is displayed.
3.17.2 Compressor operating time monitor
(1) When the line of data that wants to confirm the monitor
result is clicked from [Compressor operating time
monitor list] screen, and [Display] button is clicked,
the monitor result is displayed on [Compressor
operating time monitor] screen.
When the line of data clicked from the list screen,

and [Delete] button is clicked, the selected data is
deleted.
When [Exit] button is clicked,

it returns to [On-Line Main] screen.
(2) To close [Compressor operating time monitor] screen,

[Close] button is clicked.
It returns to [Compressor operating time monitor list] screen.
NOTE:
When the units with only one or two compressor,
the compressor operating time monitor that doesn't
exist is displayed as "000000".
160
3.17.3 Automatic compressor operating time monitor when Tooltart
(1) Click [Option] of the menubar

on the [On-Line Main] screen,
and click [Compressor operating time
monitor]→[Compressor operating time
monitor When Tooltarts] of the submenu.
And then click [Active].
When the Maintenance Tool (at On-Line mode) starts, the compressor operating time is monitored and
saved automatically.
[Compressor operating time monitor when Tooltarts] will be kept active once it becomes active.
The data automatically saved when the Tooltarts can be referred to by [3.17.2 Compressor operating
time monitor] and [4.6.1 Compressor operating time monitor(Off-Line Analyzing)].
To Make it inactive, click [Inactive] of the submenu.
NOTE:
The comment doesn't attach to the data automatically monitored when the Tooltarts.
NOTE:
When the compressor operating time monitor when the Tooltarts is inactive, the uptime of the
Maintenance Tool is shortened.
161
3.18 Initial Settings and Monitoring AHC ADAPTER
3.18.1 About AHC
Advanced HVAC CONTROLLER (hereafter referred to as AHC) comprises of MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC’s
AHC ADAPTER (PAC-IF01AHC-J) and α2 SIMPLE APPLICATION CONTROLLER* (hereafter referred to
as ALPHA2).
* α2 SIMPLE APPLICATION CONTROLLER is one of the Programming Logic Controllers that are
manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION.
AHC allows for the connection of M-NET to other systems, which was not possible with the use of ALPHA2
alone. AHC provides the following functions.
1.Controls external devices using the sensor data of the air conditioning units connected to M-NET.
2.Interlocks the operation of air conditioning units and external devices that are connected to ALPHA2.
3.Controls air conditioning units that are connected to M-NET.
4.Allows for the combined use of the items 1-3 above.
5.Monitors the input/output status of ALPHA2 via a remote controller or a centralized controller.
This manual includes descriptions of the how to initial settings of AHC and the AHC Status Monitor by
Maintenance Tool. Refer to the AHC Technical Manual for more details for AHC.
3.18.2 Initial Settings of AHC

Open the AHC Initializing Setting screen
(1) From the [Option] menu bar, select [AHC] >
[AHC Initialize Setting].
(2) The [Address Change] screen appears. Enter

the M-NET address of the AHC ADAPTER to be
initialized and then click the [OK] . Refer to the
AHC Installation Manual for how to set the
address for the AHC ADAPTER.
162
(3) The progress bar appears. This process may
take a couple of minutes depending on the
number of setting items.
(4) The [AHC Initialize Setting] screen opens.
163
The screen configuration is as follows.
3. Time Setting and
1. Address Display Area 2. Initial Settings Input Area Monitoring
8. Return
4. AHC Initial Settings 7. Saving and Loading Data

and Monitoring
6. Check setting
5. Confirm
1. Address Display Area
Displays the M-NET address for AHC. Press the [Change] button and specify the M-NET address to
configure the initial settings of another AHC and monitor. Refer to [3.9 Malfunction Log 3.9.2 (1)]
2. Initial Settings Input Area
Allows you to edit the initial setting items of AHC.The items that can be set vary depending on the selected
tab. Refer to [3.18.3 Editing the Connection Information through 3.18.7 Editing the Remote I/O setting]
3. Time Setting and Monitoring
The [AHC Date/Time Setting] screen appears.Refer to [3.18.8 Time Setting and Monitoring]
4. AHC Initial Settings and Monitoring
Press the [Set] button to set the item that was edited in "2. Initial Settings Input Area" for AHC.Press the
[Monitor] button to monitor the setting item and update the display from AHC. Refer to [3.18.9 Settings and
3.18.10 Confirmation of Settings]
5. Confirm
Displays the [Status Check] screen. The settings on the Remote I/O of ALPHA2 and AHC ADAPTER can
be checked on the [Status Check] screen. Refer to [3.18.11 Confirm]
6. Check setting
The [Check setting data] screen appears. The [Check setting data] screen can be used to check details of
settings configured for the AHC and to print setting items. Refer to [3.18.12 Check Setting]
7. Saving and Loading Data
Press the [Save to File] button to save the item that was edited in "2. Initial Settings Input Area."Press the
[Load from File] button to apply the settings saved in the file to the "2. Initial Settings Input Area." Refer to
[3.18.13 Saving the Setting File and 3.18.14 Loading the Setting File]
8. Return
Use the [Return] button to close the [AHC Initialize Setting] screen and return to the [Main] screen.
164
3.18.3 Editing the Connection Information
Assign the controllers （centralized controller and remote controller） to AHC. The status of external equipment
connected to AHC can be monitored from the assigned controllers.
Furthermore, if an error occurs with AHC, the error status can be displayed on the controllers.
Centralized
Controller
AHC Remote
Controller
(1) Select the [Connection Setting] tab and enter

the M-NET address for the remote controller in
the M-NET address input box. Enter the M-NET
address of the Remote Controller in the
M-NET address input box, or alternatively use
the [Select ] button to select the M-NET
address to be set.
165
NOTE:
 Only the M-NET address for the remote controller can be set in Maintenance Tool. The M-NET address of
the centralized controller set as AHC can be monitored from Maintenance Tool but cannot be changed and
set by Maintenance Tool. Assign the centralized controller to AHC from the centralized controller.
(*) Refer to the centralized controller manual
NOTE:
Setting item input boxes that are still blank will display
with a bold red frame to highlight that they are blank.
Enter the M-NET address for the Remote Controller.
NOTE:
The controller attribute is shown in [Attribute]. [TR] displays for the Main centralized controller, [RC] for the
Remote Controller, and [SC] for the Sub centralized controller.
166
3.18.4 Editing the I/O Port Setting
Set the input and output function of ALPHA2.
(1) Select the [I/O Port Setting] tab.
(2) Select the expansion module.The ports that can

be set are converted in accordance with the
expansion module type.
(3) Select the input and output information

a) Digital/Analog
Set whether the input and output ports are used
for analog or digital inputs and outputs. The
function names that can be selected vary
depending on whether Analog or Digital is
selected.
b) Not Use/Use
Set whether to use or not use the input and
output ports.
c) Function name
Set the function for which to use the input and
output ports.
167
3.18.5 Editing the Remote I/O setting
Set the Remote I/O settings. Once the Remote I/O settings are configured, the AHC will start the below
operations.
 Monitoring of input data (sensor data and operating status) for the unit connected to M-NET
 Output from the unit connected to M-NET
Note that the steps for navigating the [Remote I/O setting] tab vary according to the DipSW103-3 and version of
AHC ADAPTER in use.
AHC DipSW [Remote I/O setting] screen

ADAPTER 103-3
Ver
Versions ON Users select whether to
prior to Ver. enable or disable each
2.00 function available for use.
OFF
The functions assigned to
each Remote I/O setting
Ver. 2.00 or ON
for monitoring and
later
operation are all locked.
Ver. 2.00 or OFF Users can select functions

later assigned to each Remote
I/O setting and the number
of target groups as desired.
Each function can be
assigned to a maximum of
50 groups.
168
(For an AHC ADAPTER Ver. 2.00 or Later AND when DipSW103-3 is set to OFF)
(1) Select the [Remote I/O setting] tab.
(2) Click the drop-down list in the [Function of

Remote I/O] box to display a list of function that
can be assigned to the remote I/O.
(3) Select the function to be assigned to the remote

I/O.
NOTE:
 Although any desired Remote I/O function can be assigned to each [I/O No] for most I/O No., the only
Remote I/O function that can be assigned to I/O No. 19 is Set humidity.
 No functions can be assigned to the I/O with the following numbers: 65, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100.
169
(4) Click the [Auto Edit] button to open the
[Number of I/O setting] screen. Use this
function to set a number of Remote I/O settings
all at once.
(5) Enter the number of Remote I/O settings to set

in the [Count] box. Any number that lies within
the range shown in the [Range] box can be
used. The maximum number of Remote I/O
settings that can be set is listed at the bottom of
the screen. The number of Remote I/O settings
to be set cannot exceed this maximum number.
Click the [Set] button to reflect the changes

made to the settings shown on the [Number of
I/O setting] screen in the [Remote I/O setting]
tab.
Click the [Clear] button to reset all the values in the [Count] column to zero. Then, click the [Set] button to
clear all the settings on the [Remote I/O setting] tab.
Click the [Cancel] button to close the [Number of I/O setting] screen without reflecting the changes made
to the settings shown on the [Number of I/O setting] screen.
(6) Once the [Function of Remote I/O] is

configured, the input type for the Remote I/O
setting set in the [I/O] box appears on the
screen. [I] is an input. The sensor data for the
unit connected to M-NET and the operating
status are monitored periodically by the AHC.
[O] is an output. Operation of the unit connected
to M-NET is controlled by the AHC control logic.
170
(7) Once a function is assigned to the remote I/O,
the background color of the [M-NET Address]
box changes to red. Set the M-NET address for
the target of the operation and monitor in the
[M-NET Address] box. To set the M-NET
address, either enter the M-NET address
directly into the input box, or push the
button on the side of the [M-NET Address] box
and then select the M-NET address of the
relevant unit from the [Target Address Select]
screen that appears. The [M-NET Address]
column will be grayed out when no address
settings are required.
The number of selectable M-NET addresses

and the range of M-NET addresses differ
according to the selected input data. The
maximum number of selectable M-NET
addresses is displayed at the bottom of the
[Target Address Select] screen.
171
For some selected input data, the message "Do you
want to receive directly from the operation of the
RC?" may be displayed when switching to the
[Target Address Screen].
If [Yes] is selected, the input data is acquired from
the remote controller assigned in 3.18.3 Editing the
Connection Setting.
If [No] is selected, the [Target Address screen]
appears. Click the M-NET addresses to acquire the
input data for and click the [OK] button.
172
(8) Set the aggregation condition.
Set the aggregation condition only when
selecting multiple M-NET addresses.
a) AND/OR
Select the aggregation condition (AND: match
for all units or OR: match for at least one unit) to
output the acquired data to ALPHA2 when AHC
ADAPTER acquires data from multiple units.
b) Status
Select the condition for AHC ADAPTER to
output the acquired data to ALPHA2.
Use the contents in combination with the AND
and OR conditions.
Select the acquired value for AHC ADAPTER to
send to ALPHA2.
(9) Select the port.

Note that the Port No. will need to be set for
some functions. Set the input and output
terminals.
NOTE:
 An error message will appear if two or more I/O
numbers have identical settings. If the message
appears, check the settings.
173
(Applicable to AHC ADAPTERS version 2.00 and later AND when DipSW103-3 is set to a
setting other than OFF )
The method for configuring the [Function of Remote I/O] settings differs for the DipSW103-3 and version of
AHC ADAPTER .
NOTE:
 All settings other than the [Function of Remote I/O] settings can be configured in the same way as
described in [3.16.6 Editing the Remote I/O setting (Applicable to AHC ADAPTERs Ver. 2.00 and
Later AND when DipSW103-3 is set to OFF)]
(1) Select the [Remote I/O setting] tab and then

click the [Edit] button.
(2) The [I/O Setting List] screen appears. Check

off the checkbox of the desired setting item to
enable the setting.
Click the [Set] button to reflect the changes

made to the settings shown on the [I/O Setting
List] screen in the [Remote I/O setting] tab.
Click the [Clear] button to uncheck all the

checkboxes in the [Check] column. Then, click
the [Set] button to clear all the settings on the
[Remote I/O setting] tab.
Click the [Cancel] button to close the [I/O

Setting List] screen without reflecting the
changes made to the settings shown on the [I/O
Setting List] screen.
174
3.18.8 Time Setting and Monitoring
(1) Click on [Datetime] button.
(2) The [AHC Date/Time Setting] screen opens

and the present time of PC is displayed.
A click of [Set] button sets the time currently

displayed to a AHC. The time to set up can also
be changed on a screen. Cursor is united with a
change point and a numerical value is inputted.
Click on [Monitor] button to acquire the current setting Date/Time and display the results in the [AHC
Date/Time Setting] screen.
Click on [Cancel] button to end the [AHC Date/Time Setting] screen .
175
3.18.9 Settings
Apply the edited initial setting data to AHC.
(1) Click on [Set] button.
(2) A confirmation screen appears. Click the [Yes]

button.

(4) Configuration of the initial settings is complete.
An error message appears if monitoring fails.Below

is a list of possible causes of problems. For details,
refer to the section on Troubleshooting.
• The initial settings are duplicated from Centralized
Controller.
• There are problems with M-NET communications
between devices.
176
3.18.10 Confirmation of Settings
Check the settings set for the AHC.
(1) Click the [Monitor] button.
(2) A confirmation screen appears. Click the [Yes]

button.

(4) Settings configured for the AHCare reflected

when monitoring finishes. Check to make sure
that the setting details shown match those
entered
If they do not match, reconfigure the settings
that need to be changed.
An error message appears if monitoring fails.Below

is a list of possible causes of problems. For details,
refer to the section on Troubleshooting.
• The initial settings are duplicated from Centralized
Controller.
• There are problems with M-NET communications
between devices.
177
3.18.11 Confirm
Clicking the [Confirm] button will display the [Status Check] screen. Assigning the air conditioner
monitoring/operating function to the Remote I/O of the AHC will require the programming of ALPHA2 and setting
of the initial settings of AHC ADAPTER via the M-NET (on the Remote I/O setting tab). On the [Status Check]
screen, if a function is assigned to the I/O No. of ALPHA2 and the AHC ADAPTER can be checked.
(1) Click the [Confirm] button.

number of setting items. To cancel the
monitoring process, click the Cancel button.
(3) The [Status Check] screen appears.

The availability status list of ALPHA2 and the
AHC ADAPTER will appear. The status of each
I/O No. will appear either as [Available] or
[NotAvailable]. If the availability status settings
of ALPHA2 and AHC ADAPTER do not match,
the cell will be highlighted in red. Check the
settings on ALPHA2 and the AHC ADAPTER.
Click the [Close] button to close the [Status
Check] screen.
NOTE:
 The settings for ALPHA2 and the AHC
ADAPTER must match for the function
assigned to the Remote I/O to function
properly.
178
An error message appears if monitoring fails.Below is a list of possible causes of problems
 The version of the AHC ADAPTER software you

are using does not support this function. This
function is supported by versions 2.10 and later.
 A serial communication error was detected

between ALPHA2 and the AHC ADAPTER. Check
the serial cable connection between ALPHA2 and
the AHC ADAPTER.
 The initial settings are duplicated from Centralized

Controller.
 There are problems with M-NET communications
between devices.
179
3.18.12 Check Setting
(1) Click the [Check setting] button.
(2) The [Check setting data] screen appears. The

[Check setting data] screen displays a list that
can be used to check the settings entered for
initial setting items. A bold red frame will display
around setting boxes that are blank to highlight
items that have not yet been configured. Click
the [Print] button to enable a screenshot of the
[Check setting data] screen to be printed out.
Click the [Close] button to close the [Check
setting data] screen.
180
3.18.13 Saving the Setting File
Save the edited AHC initial setting data.
(1) Click the [Save to File] button.
(2) The save screen appears. Save the file to any

folder.
(3) A save successful screen appears. Click the

[OK ] button.
181
3.18.14 Loading the Setting File
Load the edited AHC initial setting data.
(1) Click the [Load from File] button.
(2) The file selection screen appears. Select the

setting file.
(3) A table shows the setting items that will be

changed when the setting file is loaded during
online setting. If the setting items are acceptable,
click the [Yes] button. The settings in the loaded
setting file are applied.
(4) A load successful screen appears. Click the

[OK] button.
182
3.18.14 Monitoring of AHC
Open the AHC Status Monitor screen
(1) From the [Option] menu bar, select [AHC] >

[AHC Status Monitor].
(2) The [Address Change] screen appears. Enter

the M-NET address of the AHC to be initialized
and then click the [OK] .

183
3.18.15 Monitoring of AHC
On the AHC List screen, the status of input and output ports of each Advanced HVAC CONTROLLER (AHC)
can be monitored.
Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu bar, and then click [AHC List] to access the AHC List screen.
The port names and their status of each AHC will appear.
AHC address Group No
Input status
Output status
Monitor
Return
Status of related equipment Print(preview)
Item Description
AHC address The M-NET address of the connected AHC will appear.
Group No The Group No. set for the AHC will appear.
Monitor Click on [Monitor] button to acquire the current AHC Status and display the results in the
[AHC Status Monitor] screen.
Input status [Input port code * + Input port name + Input status] will appear.
* DI1–DI15 (Digital input), EI1–EI4 (Extended digital input), AI1–AI8 (Analog input)
Note: The status of the unused ports will not appear.
Note: If a communication error occurs with AHC, no port information will appear.
Output status [Output port code * + Output port name + Output status] will appear.
* DO1–DO9 (Digital output), EO1–EO4 (Extended digital output), AO1–AO2 (Analog
output)
Note: The status of the unused ports will not appear.
Note: If a communication error occurs with AHC, no port information will appear.
Status of related Click to display the status of the equipment that are used to control the equipments that
equipment are connected to the AHC.
Print(preview) A screenshot of the [AHC Status Monitor] screen can be printed out.
Return Press the Return button to close the [AHC Status Monitor] screen and return to the
[Main] screen.
184
3.19 Fixed value setting of compressor frequency
- This section describes how to lock the compressor to a fixed frequency.
(1) With the dipswitch SW4 No. 857 on the outdoor

unit turned on,click [Option] on the menu bar
and then click [Fixed value setting of
compressor frequency ] on the sub menu to
open the [Fixed value setting of compressor
frequency] screen.
Note
 Compressor frequency can only be fixed while the compressor on the outdoor unit (OC) is in
operation.
Compressor frequency cannot be fixed when one or more of the following conditions are
met.
-Only the auxiliary outdoor unit (OS) is operating for such reason as an emergency
operation or a rotation operation.
-Less than three minutes after the compressor on the OC started up.
-The control mode other than the constant mode is being used.
 When a unit that does not support the fixed value setting of compressor frequency is
selected, the following message, "This unit does not support the fixed value setting of
compressor frequency." will appear, and the setting cannot be made.
(2) The [Fixed value setting of compressor frequency] screen

appears.
(A) (B)
A) Click the [Address Change] button and
then select the M-NET address of the unit
for which the compressor is to be locked to
a fixed frequency.
B) The current compressor fixed frequency

[Fix/FixRelease] status display on the
screen. To lock the compressor to a fixed
frequency, first enter the value at which to (C) (D)
lock the frequency and click the [Fix] button
before clicking the [Send] button. To
release the compressor from the fixed
frequency, click the [FixRelease] button
and then click the [Send] button.
Note
 Note that the frequency set on the [Fixed value setting of compressor frequency] screen
is the all temporary frequencies F (Foc + Fos).
 If the frequency of the outdoor unit is set to the frequency below the minimum frequency level, the unit
will go into the Thermo-OFF state.
185
C) Click the [Send] button to transmit the setting value.
Note
In order to prevent failure to trigger the setting status release, the system is designed to clear
the settings shown on the screen automatically when the [Operation status monitor] screen is
closed.
D) Click the [Close] button to close the [Fixed value setting of compressor frequency] screen and
return to the [Operation status monitor] screen.
186
4 Off-Line Monitor Operating Method
4.1 Off-Line Monitor Screen Transfer
Title Screen
Operation Monitor (Operation status monitor screen)
Operation Monitor
(Operation monitor
Data list screen)
(Trend graph screen)
System Information Monitoring of Pre-error Data
System Information System Information
(System info. Data list screen) (Pre-error Data list screen)
(System information screen) (Pre-error data screen)
187
4.2 Function Chart
4.2.1 Operation Monitor
Off-Line Analizing ----------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.3.1]
Monitors and prints about unit data and the refrigerant circuit diagram saved in On-Line “3.8 Operation
Monitor”.
Graph ---------------------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.3.2]
The operation data obtained can be graphed for display.
Check Mail --------------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.3.3]
Extracts the operation monitoring data being mail-transferred by the remote monitor mode from the mail
server.
4.2.2 System Information Monitor

Off-Line Analyzing ----------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.4.1]
Monitors and prints about unit data saved in On-Line “3.4 Main Screen”.
4.2.3 Monitoring of Pre-error Data

Off-Line Analizing ------------------------------------------------ [Refer to 4.5.1]
Monitors and prints about unit data saved in On-Line “3.9.4 Monitoring of Pre-error data”.
4.2.4 Compressor operating time monitor

Off-Line Analizing ------------------------------------------------ [Refer to 4.6.1]
Monitors and prints about unit data saved in On-Line “3.16 Compressor operating time monitor”.
4.2.5 Function common for each screen (Filing operation)

Delete Data ---------------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.7.1]
The offline data selected can be deleted.
Export ----------------------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.7.2]
Allows to output the off-line data selected on the screen as a separate file from the database.
Import ----------------------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.7.3]
Allows to take the off-line data being output as a file by Export into the database.
Text Convert --------------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.7.4]
Allows to output the off-line data being displayed on the screen as a file in Text format from the database.
The system information data can not be converted. The Pre-error data can be converted in text on
Offline Analysis Screen.
Monitor Data information edit ---------------------------------- [Refer to 4.7.5]

Allows to edit the name of Monitor Data or other relevant information.
Right-clicking menu ----------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.7.6]

The items that can be set are same as that of the function button on the screen listing each data.
Malfunction Log Data --------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.7.7]

Allows to open The folder of data file by the Explorer.
4.2.6 Offline Analyze on Wide area access mode
Off-Line Analyzing -------------------------------------------------- [Refer to 4.8.1]

Allows to edit the monitored name.
188
4.2.7 Offline Analyze on Initial settings of AHC
Off-Line Analyzing --------------------- [Refer to 4.9.1]

Allows to edit the the initial AHC settings.
- Changing the name of monitor data

You may change the monitor data name on the screen of the data list.
- Right-clicking menu
Clicking the right button of the mouse on the [Monitor data] desired to be operated displays
the pop-up menu. Using the pop-up menu facilitates your operation.
- Malfunction Log Data
The folder where the CSV file (Malfunction Log etc.) is stored can be displayed.
- The offline mode includes 2 types, the [normal mode] and [wide area access mode].
Although the functions of both modes are almost same, however, under the [wide area access mode],
the following functions are provided additionally.
1) Display of monitored name objective for data collection
The [AREA name], [Customer] and [Air conditioning system name] are shown for each data obtained.
2) Display of extracted data
By selecting [AREA name] and [Customer name], the relevant data only can be displayed.
NOTE: Both the data obtained by online under normal mode and that under wide area access mode can
be displayed commonly under both offline modes.
- Connecting to P/M series
In case of connection using USB / Serial conversion cable, the applicable items are following.
・Operation monitor[Refer to 4.2.1]
・Function common for each screen (Filing operation)[Refer to 4.2.5]
189
4.3 Operation Monitor
- Monitors and prints about the System Information and the Operating Data of units saved using the on-line
monitor.
4.3.1 Off-Line Analyzing
(1) Click on to display the data list screen of

Operation Monitor.
(2) Click on [Monitor Data] desired to be monitored.
(3) Click on .
NOTE:
This covers the operation with the menu of the
right-clicking of the mouse.
(Refer to 4.7.6 Right-clicking menu.).
(b)
(4) Operation Status Monitor Screen
(a) Click on the buttons to display data

from oldest or one minute before or one minute after
or Latest.
This feature is supported in the "Operation Data"
screen only.
(b) ”Menu Bar”

The menu bar displays [Return], [Print], [View], [Time
Search], [Option], [Help].
- Click on [Return] to end the Operation Status Monitor Screen.

[Refer to (c)]
- Click on [Print] and then select “Print” from the

sub-menu.
The hard copy of the screen will be printed from the
connected printer.
- Click on [Time Search] and the Time Searching

Screen will appear.
Enter the [Date] and [Time].
(When entering the time, refer to the monitor data time.)
Once the time has been entered, click on .

The entered data will appear.
If no time data has been entered, data for the nearest
time will appear.
NOTE:
Set the data/time to be entered to the time presented within the monitor data.
Setting to the time outside of the monitor time may cause to disable the search function.
190
- Click on [View] and then select "Switch Trend Form" or "Switch Classic Form" from the
sub-menu.Change the display format.
- Click on [Help] and “Explanation of Terminology” and “Operation Method” sub-menus can be
selected.
(c) Click on [Return] on the menu bar to end the Operation Status Monitor Screen.
The screen returns to the data list screen of Operation Monitor.
4.3.2 Graph

Operation Monitor.
(2) Click on [Monitor Data] desired to be monitored.
(3) Click on .
(4) Trend Graph Screen

*For the Procedure for graphing, please refer to [ 3.8.3 Trend graph].
191
4.3.3 Check mail
*Mail Server Setting
In order to provide mail checking to the operation data
mail-messaged from Centralized Controller by utilizing Mail
communication mode under online mode, the setting is required
relating to the connection of the objective mail server.
(a) Clicking on the sub-menu “Mail server setting” of “Setting” on the menu bar displays Mail server
setting screen.
(b) For lan connection, click on “LAN,” set the items relating to mail servers, and click on .
Items to be set
- Pop server :Ip address of mail servers for receiving
- User name :User name for mail receiving
- Password :Password for mail receiving
(c) For diaplup connection, click on ”Dialup Network,” set the

items relating to dialup and mail servers,and click on .
Items to be set
- Connection name:dialup connection name (requires to set
the information on the provider to be connected by [dialup
connection] from [control panel])
- Dialup user name :user name for dialup connection
- Dialup password :password for dialup connection
- POP Server :IP address of mail servers for receiving
- User Name :User name for mail receiving
- Password :Password for mail receiving
* When there are many amounts of data, this several hours case is in update of monitor data.
We recommend you to set up so that interval time may be inputted into "POP Receive Interval"
of "Mail Server Setting" and a mail check may be carried out periodically.
(A mail check is automatically performed at the set-up interval.)

Operation Monitor.
(2) Click on .
Initiates the checking of the operation monitor data mail
for the mail server, and storing of the acquired data.
During the data transfering and storing, the progress
rate will be displayed.
(3) After completing of data tranffer and storing, the numbers of

received mail will be displayed.
(The numbers of the received mail counted here have
no relation with the numbers displayed on the monitor data.)
Clicking on returns to the data list screen of Operation Monitor.
*The capacity to store the data obtained by the Maintenance Tool counts for 2G-bite maximum. When the
remaining storage capacity is getting insufficient during data reception by mail, Warning Screen will appear.
In this case, suspend the mail checking, and delete unnecessary data on Offline Screen to keep a proper
capacity.
192
4.4 System Information
(1) Click on to display the data list screen

of System Information.
(2) Click on [Monitor Data] desired to monitor.
(3) Click on .
- The System Information Screen of Off-Line

displays all connection information memorized by
the connected Centralized Controller.
NOTE:
This covers the operation with the menu of the (5)
(Refer to 4.6.6 Right-clicking menu.)
(4) Click on the address [Button] of the attributes to be

displayed and the [Unit Information Display
Column] is shown in the same way as when on-line.
The [Function Selection Buttons] cannot be used.
(5) ”Menu Bar”

[Return], [Print], [Option] and [Help] are displayed
on the menu bar.
- Click on [Return] to end the system information. [Refer to (6)]
- Click on [Print] and an explanation “Print” and “Copy to Clipboard” will be displayed.
- Click on [Option] and then select “Display Mode” from the sub-menu.
To switch the display mode.[Refer to 3.6 Display Mode Change]
- Click on [Help] and an explanation “Terminology” and “Operation Method” will be displayed.
(6) Click on [Return] on the menu bar to end system information.
193
4.5 Monitoring of Pre-error Data

Pre-error.
(2) Click on [Monitor Data] desired to monitor.
(3) Click on .
NOTE:
This covers the operation with the menu of the
(Refer to 4.6.6 Right-clicking menu.)
(5)
(4) On the Pre-error Data screen, the operation status data
immediately before generating error will be displayed in
a unit of minute.
Each figure on the upper column indicates a number of
minute before generating an error respectively.
The change of the display content is performed with
Up/down, left/right scroll bar.
The number of displayed items and that of the stored
data (per minute) differ depending on the selected item.
(5) ”Menu Bar” (5) Outdoor Unit

[Return], [Text convert] of [file] and [Help] are
displayed on the menu bar.
- Click on [Return] to end the Monitor before error

occurred screen.[Refer to (6)]
- Clicking [Text convert] of [file] prepares a text file of

the Before error occurred data being displayed.
- Click on [Help] and an explanation “Terminology” and

“Operation Method” will be displayed.
[Refer to 3.7 Connecting Information 3.7.2 (2)”Menu
Bar”] Indoor Unit
(6) Click on [Return] on the menu bar to end the data list screen of Pre-error Data.
194
4.6 Compressor operating time monitor
(1) Click [View] of the menubar on the [Off-Line Main] screen,

and click [Compressor operating time monitor] of the
submenu.
[Compressor operating time monitor list] screen is displayed.
(2) When the line of data that wants to confirm the monitor
result is clicked from [Compressor operating time
monitor list] screen, and [Display] button is clicked,
the monitor result is displayed on [Compressor
operating time monitor] screen.
When the line of data clicked from the list screen,

and [Delete] button is clicked, the selected data is
deleted.
When [Exit] button is clicked,

it returns to [Off-Line Main] screen.
(3) To close [Compressor operating time monitor] screen,

[Close] button is clicked.
It returns to [Compressor operating time monitor list] screen.
NOTE:
When the units with only one or two compressor,
the compressor operating time monitor that doesn't
exist is displayed as "000000".
195
4.7 Function common for each screen
(Filing operation)
* Clicking the button of "Monitor Data", "Monitor Date", "Last Updated" and "Others" at the upper
column allows to sort the displayed data.
* The right-clicking operation of the mouse covers the operation of each file also. For detail, refer to the item
4.7.6 Right-click menu.
4.7.1 Delete Data
(1) Clicking either , or

to display Data list screen containing the file desired
to edit.
(2) Click on [Monitor Data] desired to delete.
(3) Click on .
Then the screen to confirm the selected monitor data
will appear.
Clicking on deletes the data.
Clicking on returns to Data list screen.
NOTE:
Selecting monitor data collectively enables to execute batch deletion.
This operation may be performed in the similar way of the file selection of Windows explorer (shift,ctrl).
4.7.2 Export
(1) Clicking either , or to

display Data list screen containing the file desired to
edit.
(2) Click on [Monitor Data] desired to output.
(3) Click on .
(4) The "Export" screen is displayed. Enter [Destination

folder] and [Destination file name], and then select
[Run]. The data is exported to the specified
destination folder
NOTE:
The extension of the exported file is .MTDZ
196
(5) When one day or more of operation data is
selected, you must select the data interval. Select
the [Data interval] to export, and then select
[Run]. Select [Excute batch Output] to export all
of the data.
NOTE:
When you click [Run], an export file for each
selected data interval is individually output. The
extension of the exported file is .MTDZ.
When you click [Excute batch Output], the
data for all of the data intervals is output in a
single file. The extension of the exported file
is .MTPZ.
4.7.3 Import
(1) Clicking either , or

to display Data list screen containing the file desired
to edit.
(2) Click on .
The screen to read a file will be displayed.
Set the reading folder, input the file name and click on.
(3) A progress bar is displayed while importing. Click [Stop]

to stop the import process.
NOTE:
Files with the following file extensions can be imported.
- Monitor file *.MTDZ,MTDX,MTPZ
- Compressed data *.zip
197
■About the operation data collection function
Some outdoor units are equipped with functions of collecting and recording the unit operation data in the
flash memory on the control board. The data recorded in the flash memory can be saved in the USB
memory stick and checked from the Maintenance Tool.
■About the data saved in the USB memory stick

In the USB memory stick, a folder MNT*** is created, and three files (data***.MT, inf***.MT, and
etc***.MT) are saved in the folder.
*** is a serial number from 000 to 100.
MNT*** data***.MT
inf***.MT
etc***.MT
■About checking the data

The data saved in the USB memory stick can be checked by importing one of the three files (data***.MT,
inf***.MT, and etc***.MT) on the Maintenance Tool to add new data on the offline analysis screen. The file
with the cumulative compressor operation time, error history, and outdoor unit dip switch setting data can
be output.
198
4.7.4 Text Convert
(1) Clicking to display Data list screen

containing the file desired to edit.
(Text conversion can also be adapted to the Pre-error
data. For the converting method, refer to 4.5.1(5).)
(2) Click on [Monitor Data] desired to convert into text

format.
(3) Click on .
The screen to confirm the selected monitor data.
Clicking on provides text conversion
processing and then a file name will be displayed.
[Refer to 5.4 Text Convert Data]
In the case of Operation Monitor, clicking displays Data Transfer Screen prompting you to
select the object and method of the conversion.
(a) Click on [units].

Set the [Sampling Time] between 1-min and 10-min.
(b) Click on .
”Converting! Please wait for a moment.” will be appeared,
then a file name will be displayed.
[Refer to 5.4 Text Convert Data]
(c) Click on to transfer the data of all units.
(d) Click on to end the Data Transfer Screen.
* During processing operation, the progress ratio will be displayed.
4.7.5 Monitor Data information Edit
- Changing the name of monitor data

Clicking the Edit of the menu bar while focussing the
monitor data name on the Monitor Data of which name is
desired to be changed on the Screen listing each data will
display the editing screen.
On this screen, the name of Monitor Data or other relevant
information can be edited.
199
4.7.6 Right-clicking menu
- Right-clicking menu
Clicking the right button of the mouse on [Monitor data]
displays the pop-up menu as shown on the right screen.
The items that can be set are same as that of the function
button on the screen listing each data.
(Some function is unable to operate partially.)
Use them in accordance with your applications.
4.7.7 Malfunction Log Data
Click [View] of the menubar on the [Off-Line Main] screen,

and click [Malfunction Log Data] of the submenu.
The folder of data file is displayed by the Explorer.
200
4.8 Offline Analyze on Wide area access mode
The function of the offline mode is mostly equals that of the normal mode, however, the following function is
provided additionally.
1) Display of monitored name objective for data collection.

- The [AREA name], [Customer name] and [Air conditioning
system name] are shown for each data obtained.
- Setting the cursor to the data provides the pop-up display
of the [AREA name], [Customer name] and
[Air conditioning system name] of the data.
In order not to show the POP-UP display, click the View of

the menu bar and remove the check mark of the
[Show Wide Area Info.] on the sub-menu.
2) Display of extracted data.

- By selecting [AREA name] and [Customer name],
the relevant data only can be displayed.
As the other function and operation are same as that under the normal mode, please refer to Chapters 4.3 - 4.7.
NOTE:
Both the data obtained by online under normal mode and that under wide area access mode can be displayed
commonly under both offline modes.
201
4.9 Offline Analyze on Initial settings of AHC

Initialize AHC settings in OFFLINE mode.
(1) From the [Option] menu bar, select [AHC
Initialize Setting] on the submenu.
(2) The [AHC Initializing Setting] screen opens.
(3) The radio buttons can be used to toggle settings on the [Remote I/O setting] tab. Select [Ver.2 (Flexible)]
to edit settings for an AHC ADAPTER that is Ver. 2.00 or later AND when DipSW103-3 is set to OFF.
Otherwise, select [Ver.1 (Fixed)].The steps to follow to configure settings are the same as in ONLINE mode.
Refer to [3.18.2 Initial Settings of AHC] for further details.
NOTE:
 Configuring the initial settings of AHC and creating a settings file using [Save to file] in advance in
OFFLINE mode will enable settings to be configured more smoothly on-site.
202
5 File Names
5.1 System Information Data

When the system information data saved in the database in "3.4 Main Screen (2)" is exported in "4.7.2
Export", exported data is saved in
C:¥MntToolNETEA¥Data. (Default setting. Can be changed.)
The exported file is a compressed archive with the file extension MTDZ.
- The following is an explanation of the file name

SI_20040315_181026.MTDZ
Extension
Monitor Time*1 Default
Fixed (SI) Changeable to any desired name.
*1 Monitor Time
Monitor starting time : YYYYMMDD_hhmmss format
5.2 Operating Status Monitor Data

When the operation status monitor data saved in the database automatically in "3.7 Operation Monitor"
is exported in "4.7.2 Export", exported data is saved in
The exported file is a compressed archive with the file extension MTDZ or MTPZ.
- The following is an explanation of the file name(Operating Status Monitor Data has been automatically
stored at the on-line monitoring.)
OM_20040315_181026.MTDZ (or MTPZ)
Extension
Fixed (OM) Changeable to any desired name.
*1 Monitor Time
203
5.3 Pre-error Data
When the pre-error data saved in the database in "3.10.4 Monitoring of Pre-error Data" is exported in
"4.7.2 Export", exported data is saved in
The exported file is a compressed archive with the file extension MTDZ.
- The following is an explanation of the file name(Pre-error Data has been automatically stored at the
on-line monitoring.)
PE_20040315_181026.MTDZ
Extension
Fixed (PE) Changeable to any desired name.
*1 Monitor Time
5.4 Text Convert Data

The data saved in Section "4.7.4 Text Convert " is stored in
C:¥MntToolNETEA¥Data

OM_20040315_181026_(001).CSV
Extension
Serial No. (001-999)
Default
Monitor Time*1 Able to set at Text Convert freely.
Fixed (OM) or (PE) or (ML)
*1 Monitor Time
* For the data obtained before Ver4.04 via MN Converter, "MN"-"PC host name" will be displayed at the
former part of the data.
5.5 Remote error notification report log Data

The data saved in Section "3.14.5.3 Saving the Report log in CSV format” is stored in
RE_20070214_120559_001.CSV
Extension
Serial No. (001-999)
Monitor Time*1
Fixed RE
*1 Monitor Time
Monitor time : YYYYMMDD_hhmmss format
204
5.6 DIDO Controller Monitor Data
The data saved in Section "3.15.1 Setting and Monitoring DIDO Controllers (66DC)” is stored in
(1) Monitoring input/output status on DIDO Controllers (66DC) (Section “3.15.1.2” )

DCCV_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(2) Monitoring Dip switch setting of DIDO Controllers (Section “3.15.1.4” )

DCDS_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
*1 Monitor Time
Monitor time: YYYYMMDD_hhmmss format
5.7 AI Controller Monitor Data

The data saved in Section "3.15.2 Setting and Monitoring AI Controllers (63MC)” is stored in
(1) Monitoring measurement value on AI Controllers (63MC) (Section “3.15.2.1” )

MCTCV_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(2) Monitoring Dip switch setting of AI Controllers (Section “3.15.2.3” )

MCTDS_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(3) Monitoring of the correction value for Pt100 detection (Section “3.15.2.4” )
MCTPT_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(4) Measured value history (Section “3.14.2.5” )

MCTVH_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
205
(5) Out-of-limit alarm history (Section “3.15.2.6” )
MCTAH_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(6) Measurement category setting history (Section “3.15.2.7” )

MCTSH_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
*1 Monitor Time
5.8 PI Controller Monitor Data

The data saved in Section "3.15. Monitoring PI Controllers (60MC)” is stored in
(1) PI Controller (60MC) measurement value Monitor (current value) (Section “3.15.3.1” )
MCPCV_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(2) PI Controller (60MC) measurement value Monitor (cumulative value) (Section “3.15.3.2” )
MCPED_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(3) PI Controller (60MC) measurement value Monitor (settlement date) (Section “3.15.3.3” )
MCPCD_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(4) Charge time zone setting monitor (Section “3.15.3.5” )

MCPCT_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(5) Monitoring Dip switch setting of PI Controllers (Section “3.15.3.6” )

MCPDS_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
206
(6) Power failure/restoration history (Section “3.15.3.7” )
MCPPH_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(7) Pulse unit (weight) change history (Section “3.15.3.8” )

MCPWH_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
*1 Monitor Time
5.9 DIDO/AI Controller interlock control Data

The data saved in Section "3.15.4 Interlock control settings on DIDO Controllers (66DC)”
and "3.15.5 Interlock control settings on AI Controllers (63MC)” is stored in
(1) Saving the interlock control settings on DIDO Controllers (66DC) in CSV format (Section “3.15.4.4” )
DCIL_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(2) Saving the interlock control settings on AI Controllers (63MC) in CSV format (Section “3.15.5.4” )
MCTIL_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(3) DIDO controler interlock operation history (Section “3.15.4.5” )

DCIH_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
(4) AI Controller interlock operation history(Section “3.15.5.5” )

MCTIH_20070214_120559.CSV
Extension
Monitor Time*1
Fixed
*1 Monitor Time
207
6 How to change setting of Firewall
How to Change Setting of Firewall for Windows7

1. Introduction
When connecting Maintenance Tool through Centralized Controller, normal communication may not be
performed if Firewall, the security function of Windows7, has wholly been validated. (* MN converter
connection, it is not related)
Therefore, the setting of Firewall should partially be changed following the procedure indicated in Chapter 3
How to change the setting of Firewall.
2. Applicable case
(1) Should the following symptoms occur at the Address Searching
of OC (051~100), it may be possible that the communication
from Centralized Controller can not be received normally as the
communication port to use has been blocked by Firewall.
 Requiring a lot of time for searching.
 Not displaying the connecting relation (as shown in the right
figure).
In such case, terminate Maintenance Tool once, and change
the setting of Firewall.
3. How to change the setting of Firewall
On Windows 7, the [Windows Security Alert] screen

will appear when the Maintenance Tool is started up
(Connected to Centralized Controller-Network)
for the first time.
Check both if the [Private networks,...] check box

or the [Public networks,...] check box is not checked.
After that,click [Allow access] to change

the Firewall settings to allow the Maintenance Tool to run.
NOTE:
On Windows 7, the Firewall settings can be changed for each application individually to accept or deny
incoming network connections. If [allow access] is clicked, Firewall automatically opens up minimum ports
required for given application to run and communicate normally. Firewall automatically blocks the ports that
are no longer used once the application is closed.
208
If you clicked [Cancel] on the [Windows Security Alert] screen, you would need to manually change the
Firewall settings.
See bellow for how to chage the settings.
(1) Select [Control Panel] from the Start menu ( button).
(2) The [Control Panel] window will appear.

Click [System and Security].
(3) The [System and Security] window will appear.

Click [Allow a program through Windows Firewall]
in the Windows Firewall sub menu.
(4) The [Allowed Programs] window will appear.

Click [Change Settings].
209
(5) Check the [Allowed programs and features] check list
unless the check box next to [MainteToolNET (.exe)]
in the list is checked.
Check both if the [Home/Work(Private)] check box
or the [Public] check box is not checked.
※If [MainteToolNET (.exe)] does not appear in the [To enable an exception, select its check box]
list, [MainteToolNET (.exe)] is added by an additional function of the program.
a)Click the [Allow another program] button to display

the [Add Program] window.
b)Click the [Browse] button on the [Add Program] window to

display the [Browse] window.
c)Select the [C:¥MntToolNETEA¥ MainteToolNET (.exe)]

(default) of the Maintenance Tool program from the [Browse]
window, and click the [Open] button.
d)Select [MainteToolNET (.exe)] from the list of [Programs]

on the [Add a Program] window, and click the [OK] button.
＊If the message [MainteToolNET (.exe)' is already in

the list of exceptions.] of the figure below appeared,
the program has been already registered to exceptions
list.
Click the [OK] button to close the message window.
e)[ MainteToolNET (.exe)] is added to the [Allowed

programs and features] list that appears when
the [Allowed Programs] window is appeared.
[Refer to “(5)”]
f)Check the check box next to [MainteToolNET (.exe)]

in the list.
210
(6) Click the [OK] button to close the [Allowed Program ]
window.
(7) Close the [System and Security] window.
As a result, the manual setting of the Firewall is completed. Firewall settings are the same as when it
clicked [Allow access] button on the [Windows Security Alert] window.
Close all the windows and start up the Maintenance Tool.
211
7 Troubleshooting
Trouble When Installing or Starting
Trouble Cause Repair
Cannot install. Install CD-ROM not properly positioned. Properly position Install CD-ROM.
A local disk (It's C-Drive) is setting a Release compression option of a local
compression option. disk, and install the Maintenance Tool
again.
Cannot start application. Insufficient memory. End other applications.

OS is not an English version. Regional options setup, changing into
English area form. Or after changing date
separator into [/], time separator into [:],
and a decimal point mark is changed into
[.], it tries. (Refer to 1.2.1 *1)
A local disk (It's C-Drive) is setting a Release compression option of a local
compression option. disk, and install the Maintenance Tool
again.
The message of ”Can’t Connect to The IP address of Centralized Controller Input the correct address.
Centralized Controller” is displayed at or PC is incorrect.
on-line starting.
LAN cable is not connected. Connect securely LAN cable between
Centralized Controller/HUB/PC.
The message of ”Maintenance Tool can’t The S/W version of G-50A is older than The Maintenance Tool can not be
connect to old version G-50A! Use G-50A Ver2.40. connected to the older version of G-50A
upper version2.40!” is displayed at the than Ver2.40. Use the new version G-50A.
on-line starting. (Recommended Ver2.50 or more )
To use the E-mail connection mode, the
version of G-50A should be above 2.60.
The message “M-Net interface board not -RS-232C cable and MN converter are A cross type RS-232C cable is being
connected” appears. not connected. used. Make sure MN converter and PC
-A straight type RS-232C cable is being are properly connected.
used. (Refer to Operator's Manual for the MN
converter.)
MN converter is not turned on. Connect the MN converter and the air
conditioning unit to the M-Net
transmission line.
(Refer to the Operator's Manual for the
MN Converter)
A message of " Monitor data size is very The memory capacity to store data is Move to Offline Screen, and delete
large!! Please, delete old monitor data!!" is insufficient. unnecessary data.
displayed at starting.
A message of " Maintenance Tool can’t The license registration has not been d Purchase the license No., and register
connect to this Centralized Controller! one for Centralized Controller. the license for Centralized Controller.
Because, this Centralized Controller is not
licensed!!" is displayed at starting under
the online mode.
A message of " The term of validity of the The term of validity of the installed version It upgrades. Please upgrade periodically
installed version went out.!!" is displayed went out.
at starting.
Maintenance Tool does not start.
.NET FrameWork 3.5SP1 is not installed. .NET Framework 3.5SP1 is not installed. Execute “InstDotnetFx35SP1.BAT” to
install .NET Framework 3.5SP1
212
A message of "Communication Application software for P/M-series does Reinstall the latest maintenance tool.
conversion application does not exist " is not exist.
displayed at starting online mode.
A message of "Rewriting software for FT_PROG is not installed. Install FT_PROG.
USB/Serial conversion cable does not *Refer to 1.3.1 (5)
exist.Please check the manual for
M&P-series" is displayed at starting online
mode.
A message of "USB/Serial conversion USB /Serial conversion cable is not Operate the maintenance tool with USB /
cable is not connected" is displayed at connected. Serial conversion cable connected.
starting online mode.
A message of " Model DataBase does not Software required for the operation of the Reinstall the latest maintenance tool.
exist" is displayed at starting online mode. maintenance tool does not exist
A message of " Multiple cables are Multiple USB cables (FTDI chip built-in) Operate the maintenance tool with only
connected" is displayed at starting online are connected to the PC. the USB/Serial conversion cable.
mode.
A message that it is necessary to .NET Framework 4.0 is not installed. Install .NET Framework 4.0 or more.
install .net Ver 4 or later is displayed at
starting online mode.
A message that it is missing vcruntime140 Visual C++ Redistributable is not installed. Install Visual C++ Redistributable.
is displayed at starting online mode. *Refer to 1.3.1 (5)
213
Trouble with Main Screen
Cannot select function selection buttons. Collecting data about individual units Can be used when communication with all
using manual search. (Unit is the units selected by manual search have
communicating.) completed communication.
A[**]appears in the unit address button -No response from that unit. Wait a moment and then click on the
for an existing unit. -Attributes cannot be known due to address button for the same unit again.
communication error.
A[**]appears in the unit address button for Interference caused an non-existing unit Wait a moment and then click on the
a unit that does not exist. to appear. address button for the same unit again.
The[**] display will disappear.
A[??]appears in the address button. There is a unit that is not compatible with Refer to the explanation on terminology in
the Maintenance Tool. help.
If there is no explanation, the unit is not a
compatible type.
Address searching takes 3 minutes or The port required for communication is In this case, the communication
more per set. (Centralized Controller co being protected by the Firewall checking transmitted from Centralized Controller
nnection) function of Windows or anti-virus software. may not partially be received. Please r
emove the check mark on the Firewall
function of the
necessary port. (For detail, please refer
to “6. How to change setting of
Firewall”.) (If the version of G-50A is
more than 2.50, only [IC] can be
searched, even if it uses FIREWALL.
However, [OC] reference cannot be
performed. Moreover, since other
functions cannot operate normally,
please be sure to remove a check.)
When a Maintenance Tool is not ended In this case, please perform "Stop mail
normally, Centralized Controller will be communication" of 3.4 (2), and start a
in a data Maintenance Tool again after waiting
resending state, and LAN about 15 minutes.
communication will increase.
The version of G-50A is old. A recommendation version is 2.50 or
more.
Connecting information Trouble

Cannot switch to connection information A unit other than an outdoor unit (OC) has Refer to 3.6.1
screen. been selected.
The connection data display does not An operating SC other than remote control Click on remote control.
appear when the operating system SC is has been clicked. Monitoring of connection data cannot be
clicked. done from operating SC other than remote
control.
214
Operation Monitor Trouble
The monitor display screen on the Because of the increased re-transmission Please take a countermeasure against the
operation monitor has red characters. process work due to abundant communication noise source in this case.
communication noise, data may not be
monitored fully within the rated cycle.
All of the characters on the monitor There is no answer from the unit.(Cannot Error with unit.
display for some units are red. communicate with the unit.) Refer to the service handbook for that
unit.
The message of ” Centralized Controller The dial-up router is not connected. Or By referring to Instruction Manual of
can't Connect to SMTP Server ! connected but incorrectly. Dial-up router, connect or set correctly.
or Centralized Controller Date Setting is
wrong !! Continue ?” is displayed at The default gateway of Centralized Co Set correctly by using the Centralized
remote monitor setting. ntroller is not set. Controller initial setting tool.
(When Centralized Controller, please
set it from initialization WEB.)
(Refer to Instruction Manual of Centralized
Controller.)
The incorrect display of the receiver Set the correct mailing address.
address is pointed out by SMTP.
The Monitor Finish Date is older than Set the monitor finish date correctly.
the current date/time of Centralized Co (However when connecting to Centralized
ntroller. Controller in a region with a time
differential, set it by considering the time
in that place.)
displayed during collecting data.
Data becomes a red display and the "-" Since data cannot receive normally. - Reduce the number of a monitor.
display. - There is too much number of a monitor. - Cope with noise generating origin.
- Data transforms itself by a noise. * Also when returning from a graph screen
to an operation screen, it may become a
red display and the "-" display, but it is
normal.
Upon transition of the operation monitor This error may occur if a PC with a 64bit Use the following procedure to install SQL
screen, "ErrorMessage: 9998" is OS is used. Server Compact 3.5.
displayed. A database access error occurred 1. Download SSCERuntime-ENU.exe
because the SQL Server Compact 3.5 from the following URL.
database used by the Maintenance Tool http://www.microsoft.com/en-US/downl
did not start normally. oad/details.aspx?id=5783
2. Double-click the downloaded
SSCERuntime-ENU.exe file.
3. When the SSCERuntime_x86-ENU.msi
file and SSCERuntime_x64-ENU.msi
file are generated, execute
SSCERuntime_x86-ENU.msi →
SSCERuntime_x64-ENU.msi, in that
order.
* For details of the installation method for

SQL Server Compact 3.5, refer to
"Installation Method" described at the
above URL.
Malfunction Log Trouble

Cannot clear malfunction log The unit is not compatible with The malfunction log cannot be cleared.
malfunction log clear.
There is an error code, but the contents of This is a newly added error code and is Refer to the service handbook for that
the error are not displayed not compatible with the Maintenance Tool. unit.
215
Operation Monitor Mail Communication Mode Trouble
Operation monitor mail cannot receive A mail address and SMTP server Please set up the right information again
normally. information were made a mistake in and after performing "Stop mail
communication" of 3.4 (2).
set up by mail communication setup.
The mail address a contract of is not Please set the regular mail address a
made with a provider was set as [FROM: contract of is made with the provider to
[FROM: Mail Address].
Mail Address].
(When using dialup)
The mail address of recipient (To:) is not The mail address of recipient (To:)
an address only for Maintenance Tool. acquires and sets up the address only for
Maintenance Tool.
(The mail address used usually is set up.
In this case, once other mail software
receives mail, operation data mail will be
deleted from a mail server.)
The analysis screen of the operation The system configuration information Please delete the corresponding data.
monitor data (which carried out mail acquired from Centralized Controller im Text conversion can be carried out and
acquisition by OFFLINE) is not displayed. mediately after a mail communication s data can be outputted.
etup was not
acquired normally.
Mail communication mode was set up When mail communication mode is set up
from the Maintenance Tool of a remote from the Maintenance Tool of a remote
place, and the mail address of recipient place, mail acquisition of operation data
(To:) was set as another addressing to a can be performed only with the
Maintenance Tool of a remote place. Maintenance Tool which set up.
(System configuration information mail Please make a set the mail address of a
is transmitted from Centralized Controll Maintenance Tool which set mail
communication mode to the mail address
er immediately after a mail communicat
of recipient (To:).
ion setup.
However, the Maintenance Tool by the
side of a setup is using dial-up service,
and mail transmission cannot be
performed.
Consequently, since the Maintenance
Tool with which mail is transmitted cannot
acquire system configuration information
mail, even if it receives after that operation
monitor data mail, it does not indicate by
normal.
216
Free contact of indoor unit Trouble
A menu cannot be chosen and cannot be The version of G-50A is old. A recommendation version is 2.60 or
started. more.
Remote error notification Trouble

A menu cannot be chosen and cannot be The MN Converter model is not Use the CMS-MNG-E MN Converter
started. CMS-MNG-E. model.
When Maintenance Tool is connected to The MN converter (CMS-MNG-E) mode is Connect to the MN Converter
the MN Converter (CMS-MNG-E) via the error notification mode. (CMS-MNG-E) via USB.
RS-232C, a message of " Cannot
communicate with MN converter." is
displayed at starting.
Maintenance Tool does not start.
217
Setting and Monitoring DIDO/AI/PI Controllers Trouble
The pulse unit (weight) cannot be set on The PI Controller can be used only for Make the settings for the PI Controller on
the PI Controller. monitoring. Centralized Controller Web Browser or
TG-2000A.
An error occurs when the limit alarm value The values exceeding the upper/lower Set the values between the upper and
is set on the AI controller (63MC) setting limit of the measurement range are set. lower limit of the measurement range.
screen on the AI Controller.
[DIDO/AI interlock setting] in the sub The interlock setting is not set to enabled [Option] in the menu bar and select
menu is inactive. on the Interlock control option screen. [DIDO/AI/PI] ,and select [Interlock
control option] in the sub menu. Read
the agreement on the Interlock control
option screen, and agree.
An error occurs when the password is The entered password is incorrect. Ask the administrator for the password
entered to accept the agreement on the used on the Interlock control option
Interlock control option screen. screen.
An error occurs when the upper/lower The values exceeding the upper/lower Set the upper/lower thresholds for the
thresholds for the interlock operation limit of the measurement range are set. interlock operation condition between the
condition are set on the AI controller upper and the lower limit values of the
(63MC) interlock control measurement range.
setting screen.
An error occurs when the interlock control The interlock target unit that has the set Set the correct unit address of the
setting is made on the DIDO controller address does not exist. interlock target.
(66DC) /AI controller (63MC) interlock
control setting screen.
The interlock control is not performed The set address of the interlock target unit Set the correct unit address of the
when the interlock control setting is made. is incorrect., or the address of the different interlock target.
unit is set.
An emergency stop is made when the After the emergency stop is reset, check
interlock control is set to “Prohibited” that the interlock control is performed
when an emergency stop is made with properly.
Centralized Controller.
A communication error occurs when the After the communication error is reset,
interlock control is set to “Prohibited” check that the interlock control is
when a communication error is occurring performed properly.
with Centralized Controller.
Two or more interlock control operations The set input condition and the set range Check that the set input condition and the
with the AI Controller are being performed overlap with those that have been set for set range do not overlap with those that
simultaneously. other interlock No. have been set for other interlock No.
There is an exception when two or more
interlock control operations are
simultaneously performed.
Differentials are set for some interlock To make the differential valid, make the
operation No., whereas not for some, or differentials of all the channels the same.
the set differentials are different.
The attribute (each address) searched by The wrong sub menu is selected in Select the correct setting the sub menu,
auto or manual search cannot be set. [Option] in the menu bar. and set the attribute (each address).
After the attribute is displayed, the unit to Click [File] and select [Return] to
be connected is changed without shutdown and restart the Maintenance
changing the address. Tool. Try the auto/manual search again.
The message “**** monitoring failed.” The power of the unit is turned off, or the Turn on the power of the unit, and
appears. M-NET transmission line or the MN reconnect the M-NET transmission line or
converter is not connected properly. the MN converter.
The upper/lower detection/cancellation When the setting change is made on Click [Close] to end the AI controller
values are not updated when [Monitor Centralized Controller Web Browser, the (63MC) measurement value monitoring
update] is clicked on the AI controller upper/lower detection/cancellation screen, and open the screen again.
(63MC) measurement value monitoring values are not updated. Only the
screen. measurement value and the alarm
status are updated.
218
Off-Line Monitor Trouble
The message of ”Timeout Can’t connect The setting of IP address of POP server is Set the correct IP address with Mail
to Mailserver.” is displayed. incorrect. Server Setting.
The setting of the IP address of PC is Set the IP address of PC correctly.
incorrect.
The message of “Invalid Parameter!” is The POP server is not set yet. Set POP server.
displayed.
The message of “Can’t Connect to mail The LAN cable is not connected correctly. Connect LAN cable securely.
sever!” is displayed.
The IP address setting of POP server is Set the correct IP address with Mail
not correct. Server Setting.
The message of “POP Authention Error” is The setting of the user and password of Set correctly with Mail Server Setting.
displayed. POP server is not correct.
displayed during collecting the mail of
operation data.
A message of " Now finalizing The internal data is under arrangement at Offline Screen will automatically be
Maintenance Tool !!" is displayed at finishing the Maintenance Tool. finished after completing this process.
finishing Offline, and the screen does not Please wait a while.
finish.
Data cannot be imported. It was going to import the data acquired by The data obtained by Ver.4.** has no
“Maintenance Tool (Ver.3.**)”. compatibility with that obtained by
Ver.3.**.
A message of " The file name is incorrect. It contains characters unable to be Please delete such special characters in
--- " is displayed. Data cannot be fetched in (such as [ “or”] and the like). the file name.
imported.
In processing for the time searching or The information inherent in a district - Change the setting of the OS to that in
text convert of the operation status (language) will be added on the column of English for use.
monitor, "Date or Time is wrong" is Date and Time depending on the PC (OS) - Execute processing after deleting the
displayed without executing the of the district. However, such information information (characters) inherent in the
processing. inherent in the district can not be read by district to be added on the column of Date
the Maintenance Tool. and Time.
"This archive file was broken." appears The ZIP archive selected for importing Double-click the applicable file and check
when importing. may be broken. that the file is recognized as a ZIP archive.
Archives acquired from media or through
email is sometimes broken. In such a
case, reacquire the archive.
"As for the data with path, the import is not Multiple files are included in the ZIP Extract files from the ZIP archive to a
done." appears when importing. archive selected for import. folder and then select the files to import
when importing.
"Since two or more files are compressed, Archives created in a format that includes Extract files from the ZIP archive to a
it cannot import." appears when importing. a path cannot be imported. folder and import them.
219
8 Explanation of Terminology
Main Screen Terminology

Mark Meaning
Address Address of selected unit
Attribute Attribute of selected unit
CG ····· Control gateway
TR ····· Central controller
RC ····· Remote controller
VR ····· VAV remote controller
MB ····· Parallel interface
MA ····· M-net converter for K-control
KA ····· K-control converter for M-net
AN ····· Multi panel controller
GR ····· Group remote controller
AR ····· Air handling remote controller
FR ····· Fan coil remote controller
SC ····· System controller
IC ······ Indoor unit
LC ······ Lossnay
OC ····· Outdoor unit (heat source unit)
BC ····· BC controller
BS ····· BC controller
SE ····· Remote sensor
HB ····· Hybrid VRF BC controller
HS ····· Sub-Hybrid Branch Controller
FU ····· Fresh master
AH ····· Air handling unit
FL ······ Fan coil unit
FA ······ Filter unit
I U ····· ICE-Y sub controller
CA ····· CAV controller
MC ····· Measuring controller
BU ····· Booster Unit
AU ····· Water HEX Unit
CE ····· Hot Water Heat Pump Unit (MAIN)
CL ······ Hot Water Heat Pump Unit (SUB)
AHC ··· Advanced HVAC CONTROLLER
Model Model of selected unit
Ver. S/W version of selected unit
G_NO. Group number
Capacity Capacity of selected unit
UL-Model UL-Model number of selected unit
Branch/pair Branch or pair number
ON/OFF Operation ON/OFF
Mode Operation mode
Intake Room temperature
Set Set temperature
Err-CD The newest error is displayed.
220
Connecting Information Monitor Terminology
Mark Meaning
CG Control gateway
TR Central controller
RC Remote controller
VR Remote controller for VAV
MB Parallel interface
MA M-net converter for K-control
KA K-control converter for M-net
AN Multi panel controller
GR Group remote controller
AR Air handling remote controller
FR Remote controller for fan coil
SC System controller
IC Indoor unit
LC Lossnay
OC Outdoor unit (heat source unit)
BC BC controller
BS BC controller
HB Hybrid VRF BC controller
HS Sub-Hybrid Branch Controller
SE Remote sensor
FU Fresh master
AH Air handling unit
FL Fan coil unit
FA Filter unit
IU ICE-Y sub controller
CA CAV controller
MC Measuring controller
BU Booster Unit
AU Water HEX Unit
CG Control gateway
TR Central controller
RC Remote controller
VR Remote controller for VAV
MB Parallel interface
MA M-net converter for K-control
KA K-control converter for M-net
AN Multi panel controller
GR Group remote controller
AR Air handling remote controller
FR Remote controller for fan coil
SC System controller
IC Indoor unit
LC Lossnay
OC Outdoor unit (heat source unit)
BC BC controller
BS BC controller
HB Hybrid VRF BC controller
HS Sub-Hybrid Branch Controller
SE Remote sensor
FU Fresh master
AH Air handling unit
FL Fan coil unit
221
Monitoring of Pre-error data Terminology
Mark Meaning
OC Outdoor Unit
Refrigerator
OS Outdoor Sub Unit
CE/CL CAHV-P500YA-HPB
CAHV-P500YB-HPB
CRHV-P600YA-HPB
CH/CL EACV-P900YA,EAHV-P900YA,EAHV-P900YA-H
HB CMB-WP108V-G
CMB-WP108/1016V-GA1
CMB-WM108/1016V-AA
HS CMB-WP108/1016V-GB1
CMB-WM108/1016V-AB
CC RBH-P35NRA-Q-TWN/RBS-P20/202HRA-Q-TWN
222
Operation Status Monitor Terminology
Mark UL/Non-UL Model
OC UL Y PUHY-P72/96/108TGMU-A
PUHY-P126/144TGMU-A
PUHY-P168/192/204/216/234TGMU-A
PUHY-P72/96/120THMU-A
PUHY-P72/96/120YHMU-A
PUHY-P72/96/120/144TJMU-A
PUHY-P72/96/120/144YJMU-A
PUHY-P72/96/120/144TKMU-A
PUHY-P72/96/120/144YKMU-A
PUHY-P72/96/120/144TKMU-U
PUHY-P72/96/120/144YKMU-U
PUHY-P72/96/120/144/168TLMU-A
PUHY-P72/96/120/144/168YLMU-A
PUHY-P72/96/120/144ZKMU-A
R2 PURY-P72/96/108/126/144TGMU-A
PURY-P168/192/204/216/234TGMU-A
PURY-P72/96/120THMU-A
PURY-P72/96/120YHMU-A
PURY-P72/96TJMU-A
PURY-P72/96YJMU-A
PURY-P120/144TJMU-A
PURY-P120/144YJMU-A
PURY-P72/96/120/144TKMU-A
PURY-P72/96/120/144YKMU-A
PURY-P72/96/120/144TKMU-U
PURY-P72/96/120/144YKMU-U
PURY-P72/96/120/144/168TLMU-A
PURY-P72/96/120/144/168YLMU-A
PURY-P72/96/120/144ZKMU-A
WY PQHY-P72/96TGMU-A
PQHY-P72/96/120THMU-A
PQHY-P72/96/120YHMU-A
PQHY-P72/96/120ZKMU-A
PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240YLMU-A
PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240YLMU-A1
PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240TLMU-A
PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240TLMU-A1
PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192ZLMU-A
PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192ZLMU-A1
WR2 PQRY-P72/96TGMU-A
PQRY-P72/96/120THMU-A
PQRY-P72/96/120YHMU-A
PQRY-P72/96/120ZKMU-A
PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240TLMU-A
PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240TLMU-A1
PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240YLMU-A
PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240YLMU-A1
PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192ZLMU-A
PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192ZLMU-A1
HP PUHY-HP72/96THMU-A
PUHY-HP72/96TJMU-A
PURY-HP72/96TKMU-A-H
PURY-HP72/96YKMU-A
223
OC UL BC CMB-P104/108/1010/1013/1016NU-G
CMB-P108/1010/1013/1016NU-GA
CMB-P104/108NU-GB
S PUMY-P100/125/140YHM
PUMY-P36/48NHMUR4
PUMY-P36/48NKMU1
PUMY-P60NKMU
PUMY-P60NKMU1
MXZ-4C36NAHZ
MXZ-4C36NAHZ-U1
MXZ-5C42NAHZ
MXZ-5C42NAHZ-U1
MXZ-8C48NA
MXZ-8C48NA-U1
MXZ-8C48NAHZ
MXZ-8C48NAHZ-U1
Non-UL Y PUHY - 200/250YM*
PUHY - 200/250YMF
PU(H)Y-P200/250YMF-B,YMC
PU(H)Y-200/250YMF-B,YMC
PU(H)Y-200/250TM-(C)
PU(H)Y-400/500YBM
PU(H)Y-315YMC
PUHY-400/500YMF-B,YMC
PUHY-P400/500YMF-B,YMC
PU(H)Y-P200/250YMF-C
PUHY-P400/500YMF-C
PUHY-400/500YMF-C
PUD-P200/250YMF-C
PU(H)Y-P200/250/315Y(R)EM-A
PU(H)Y-P200/250/315YEM(*)-A
PU(H)Y-200/250/315YEM(*)-A
PUHY-P700/750/800YSGM-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350YGM-A
PUHY-P400YGM-A
PUHY-P450/500/550/600/650YGM-A
PUHY-P450/500/550/600/650YMM-A
PUHY-P400/650YSM-A
PUHY-P450/500/550/600/650YCSM-A
PUHY-P600YCSS-A
PUHY-200/250/300/350/400/450/500YC-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600/650/700YC-A
PUHY-P300/350/400YCSM-A
PUHY-P450/500/550/600/650YMM(C)-A
PUHY-P400/650YSM(C)-A
PUHY-P450/500/550/600/650YCSM-A
PUHY-P450/600YCSS-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350THM-A
PUHY-P400/450THM-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YHM-A
PUHY-EP200/250/300/350YHM-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YHC-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YJM-A
PUHY-EP200/250/300YJM-A
PUHY-EP200/250/300YJMS-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YHA.TH
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YHA.TH-T
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YJC-A
PUHY-P300/350/400/450YRJC-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YJMT-A
PUHY-EP200/250/300YJMT-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YKC-A
PUHY-P350/400/450YEKC-A
PUHY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450YKM-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YLKC-A
PUHY-P300/350/400/450YRKC-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YMKC-A
PUHY-P300/350/400/450YDKC-A
PUHY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450/500YLM-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YKB-A.TH
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YKB-A1.TH
224
OC Non-UL Y PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YPKC-A
PUV-P200/250/400/500YM-A
PUCY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YKA.TH(-T)
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YKA.TH(-U/-D)
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500TKA.TH
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YKAT.TH
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YNW-A
PUHY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450/500YNW-A
PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YMKC-B
PUHY-P300/350/400/450YRKC-B
PUHY-P300/350/400/450YDKC-B
WY PQHY-P200/250YEM-A
PQHY-P200/250YGM-A
PQHY-P400/500YSGM-A
PQHY-P200/250/300YHM-A
PQHY-P200/250YHMT-A
PQHY-P200/250/300YHMC-A
PQHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A
PQHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A1
PQHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A2
HP PUHY-HP200/250YHM-A
PUHY-HP200/250YHMC-A
PUHY-HP200/250YHMC-B
RP PUHY-RP200/250/300/350YJM-A
PUHY-RP200/250TKM
PUHY-RP200/250YKM
R2 PURY-200/250YM
PURY-200/250YMF-B
PURY-P200/250YMF-B
PURY-200/250YMF-C
PURY-P200/250YMF-C
PURY-P400/500YMF-C
PURY-200/250YEM-A
PURY-P200/250YEM-A
PURY-80/100TMU
PURY-P200/250/300/350/400YGM-A
PURY-P450/500/550/600/650YGM-A
PURY-P200/250/300/350/400YHM-A
PURY-EP200/250/300/350YHM-A
PURY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YJM-A
PURY-EP200/250/300/350YJM-A
PURY-P200/250/300/350/400YJMC-A
PURY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450YKM-A
PURY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YLM-A
PURY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450/500YLM-A
PURY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YLM-A1
PURY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450/500YLM-A1
PURY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550YNW-A
PURY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550YNW-A
PURY-M200/250/300YNW-A
PURY-EM200/250/300YNW-A
WR2 PQRY-P200/250YMF-B
PQRY-P200/250YMF-C
PQRY-P200/250YGM-A
PQRY-P400/500YSGM-A
PQRY-P200/250/300YHM-A
PQRY-P200/250/300YHMC-A
PQRY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A
PQRY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A1
PQRY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A2
RP-R2 PURY-RP200/250/300YJM-A
H-R2 PURY-WP200/250YJM-A
BC CMB-P104/108/1010/1013/1016V-G
CMB-P108/1010/1013/1016V-GA
CMB-P104/108V-GB
BC CMB-P104/108/1010/1013/1016V-G/H(A/B)
CMB-P104/106/108/1012/1016V-J
CMB-P108/1012/1016V-JA
CMB-P1016V-KA
CMB-P104/108V-KB
CMB-PW202V-J
225
OC Non-UL S PUMY
PUMY-P100/125/140YHM-A
PUMY-P100/125/140YHM-B
PUMY-P100/125/140VHM-A
PUMY-P125/140VHMBR3
PUMY-P125/140YHMBR3
PUMY-P100/125/140YHMC-C
PUMY-SP100/125/140YHMC-SD
PUMY-P100/125/140VHMC-S
PUMY-SP100/125/140VHMC-SR
PUMY-P100V/YHMBR4
PUMY-P125/140VHMSR1
PUMY-P125/140YHMSR1
PUMY-P112/125/140VKM
PUMY-P112/125/140VKM1
PUMY-P112/125/140VKM2
PUMY-P112/125/140VKM3
PUMY-P112/125/140VKM-A
PUMY-P112/125/140YKM
PUMY-P112/125/140YKM1
PUMY-P112/125/140YKM2
PUMY-P112/125/140YKM3
PUMY-P112/125/140YKME3
PUMY-P112/125/140YKM-A
PUMY-P100/125/140NKM
PUMY-CP100/112/125/140VKM.TH
PUMY-CP100/112/125/140YKM.TH
PUMY-P200/250YKMC-C
PUMY-P200YKM
PUMY-P200YKM1
PUMY-P175/200/225YKM.TH
PUMY-P175/200/225YKM1.TH
PUHZ-RP**HA
PUHZ-RP250YHM-A
PUHZ-RP250YKM-A
MXZ-8C200VAM-C
MXZ-8C140/160VAMD-A
MXZ-8C112/140/160VAMZ-C
MXZ-6C112NAM-C1
MXZ-8C140/160NAM-C1
MXY-4C100VA
MXY-5C125VA
MXY-6C140VA
- Refrigerator ECOV-EN75/110/150/185/225/260/300/335MVB
ECOV-EN75/110/150/185/225/260/300/335VB
OS PUHN-200/250YMF-B,YMC
PUHN-P200/250YMF-B,YMC
PUHN-200/250YMF-C
PUHN-P200/250YMF-C
226
Mark Model
SC LMAP02/03/04
IC IC
DOAS
FU FU : Fresh Master
LC LC:Lossnay
AU PWFY-P100/200VM-E-AU
PWFY-P100/140/200VM-E1-AU
PWFY-P100/140/200VM-E2-AU
PWFY-EP100VM-E1-AU
PWFY-EP100VM-E2-AU
PWFY-P36/72NMU-E-AU
BU PWFY-P100VM-E-BU
PWFY-P36NMU-E-BU
CE/CL CAHV-P500YA-HPB
CAHV-P500YB-HPB
CRHV-P600YA-HPB
CH/CL EACV-P900YA
EAHV-P900YA
EAHV-P900YA-H
HB CMB-WP108V-G
CMB-WP108/1016V-GA1
CMB-WM108/1016V-AA
HS CMB-WP108/1016V-GB1
CMB-WM108/1016V-AB
CC RBH-P35NRA-Q-TWN
RBS-P20/202HRA-Q-TWN
227
Data before Error occurred Terminology ( Outdoor Unit )
Mark Official Name Meaning
Ope Mode 1,2 Operation mode Operation mode for outdoor unit
Ctrl Mode 1,2 Control mode Control mode for outdoor unit
Ope State 1,2 Operation display1,2 Display of outdoor operation (3-min restart, compressor running, pr
eliminary error, Error, warm-up mode etc)
Indoor mode of BC branch Indoor mode of BC branch (All cooling ON/OFF etc)
Ctrl Liquid 1 Display of outdoor liquid correction mode
Ope Time Comp 1 Operation time( accumulated ) of comp.1
Ope Time Comp 2 Operation time( accumulated ) of comp.2
Total Freq(F) Temporary compressor frequ Total temporary compresser frequency
ency for calculation
Ope Freq(Hz) Actual frequency Compressor operating frequency
Comp Hz Compressor output frequency before error stop
Hz Hz up or down Up or down of compressor frequency
AK AK up or down Up or down of heatexchanger capacity(calculation)
AK Capacity Heat exchanger capacity Variable which determine the size of outdoor heat exchanger
Toff/NF Fan speed Parameter of outdoor fan speed(%)
AL Accumulator level Liquid level in the accumulation ( 0: Undercharge, 1: Adequate, 2:
Overcharge )
FAN Fan Fan capacity of outdoor unit (not proportional to rotational frequen
cy)
FAN (rpm) Fan speed FAN rotation speed[rpm]
FAN-FREE Fan free run Outdoor unit fan State
SC Sub-cool
SH Supper heat
Qjc(Qj(C)) Total capacity code (cool) Cooling indoor unit capacity
Qjh(Qj(H)) Total capacity code (heat) Heating indoor unit capacity
Ope Status Operation Status, Backup m Operation Status, Backup mode
ode
Start-up unit Start-up unit Start-up unit
Deference of TC Deference between target T Deference between target TC and real TC
C and real TC
Deference of ET Deference between target E Deference between target ET and real ET
T and real ET
Target TC Target high pressure saturation temp.
Target ET Target low pressure saturation temp.
Forecast TC Forecast high pressure saturation temp.
Forecast ET Forecast low pressure saturation temp.
SLEV Oil return LEV opening Adjusts the amount of liquid refrigerant and oil returned from the
accumulator
LEV1 SC coil LEV opening Adjusts refrigerant in the bypass pipe from liquid pipe in the outd
oor unit in cooling mode.
LEV2,2a,2b Refrigerant flow adjustment Adjusts refrigerant flow during heating
LEV1,2,3,4 ,5,6,7,8 LEV pulse of indoor unit 1-8 LEV pulse of indoor unit 1-8
L1 LEV1 opening Liquid level control, differential pressure control
L4 LEV4 opening Differential pressure control
21S4,21S4a 4-way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle (0:Cooling, 1:Heating)
21S4b 4-way valve Capacity control of heat exchanger
21S4c 4-way valve Capacity control of heat exchanger (Gas side)
SV1 Solenoid valve output Returns oil from the oil separator(Bypass between discharge pipe
and suction pipe)
SV1a Solenoid valve output For opening/closing the bypass circuit under the O/S.
SV2 Solenoid valve output Switches the capacity control valve inside the compressor(Capacity
control full load)
SV21,21/31 Solenoid valve output For the refrigerant control
SV22,SV32 Solenoid valve output Switches the capacity control valve Inside the compressor(Capacity
control full load)
SV2/3 Solenoid valve output For the refrigerant control
SV3 Solenoid valve output Switches the capacity control valve inside the compressor(Capacity
control unload)
SV32 Solenoid valve output Switches the capacity control valve inside the compressor
SV4,SV5 Solenoid valve output Controls capacity and restricts the high pressure (Frequency contr
ol backup) (Bypass between discharge pipe and suction pipe)
SV5B Solenoid valve output Restricts the rise in the discharge temperature and bypass circuit
at defrosting(liquid bypass)
SV6 Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
SV6a Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
SV6B Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
SV6C Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
SV6D Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
SV6E Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
228
SV6a1/CVa2 Solenoid valve output For the refrigerant control
SV6b1/CVb2 Solenoid valve output For the refrigerant control
SV6c1/CVc2 Solenoid valve output For the refrigerant control
SV7 Solenoid valve output Bypass control of heat exchanger (Heat exchanger bypass)
SV71,SV72 ,SV73 Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
SV10,11,12 Solenoid valve output For the refrigerant control
SV13,14,15 Solenoid valve output For the refrigerant control
SV13t,14t Solenoid valve output For the refrigerant control
SVM Solenoid valve output(SVM) All cool only units will be open at defrosting
SV*a Solenoid valve output(SV*a) Supply refrigerant to the cool only indoor unit
SV*b Solenoid valve output(SV*b) Supply refrigerant to the heat pump indoor unit
SV*c Solenoid valve output(SV*c) Supply refrigerant to the cool only indoor unit
F All temporary frequencies All temporary frequencies (Foc) [Hz]
Comp ON Display of compressor run (1) / compressor off (0)
72C Magnetic relay Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)
52C1 electromagnetic contactor 52C output On during indoor unit running (inverter main circuit)
52C2 Relay output Control of compressor2
CH2/3 Accumlater level detection h Accumulator level detection heater output
eater output
CH1 Crankcase heater output Control of compressor heater
52F Contactor ON/OFF switch of NO.2 fan
TH1,TH11 Thermistor Detects the discharge temperature for the high pressure protectio
n.
TH12 Thermistor Detects the discharge temperature for
the high pressure protection
TH2 Thermistor Detects saturated temperature and then, control the compressor fr
equency and liquid level in the accumulator (Detects saturated ev
aporation temperature)
TH3 Thermistor Detects the liquid level in the accumulator (Detects lower liquid le
vel in the accumulator)
TH4 Thermistor Detects the liquid level in the accumulator (Detects upper liquid le
TH5 Thermistor Controls compressor frequency, controls defrosting and detects the
liquid level in heating mode, detects the sub-cool at the heat exc
hanger exit in combination with 63 HS data, and controls LEV1
(Detects the liquid pipe temperature)
TH6 Thermistor Detects the ambient temperature and then, controls the fan freque
ncy liquid level in the accumulator, and the opening LEV pulse for
oil return. (Detects the ambient air temperature)
TH7,TH8 ,TH9 Thermistor (Controls SC) Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
7,8 and 9.
TH9 Thermistor Senses the refrigerant composition based on TH2, TH9 and 63LS
(composition sensing)
TH10 Thermistor Detects the oil temperature (Lower compressor shell)
TH10a ,TH10b Thermistor Detects outlet temperature of heat exchanger in heating mode. (G
as pipe temperature of heat exchanger)
TH10c Thermistor Detects the oil temperature (Lower compressor shell)
T1 TH11 thermistor LEV control (Controls liquid level) (Temperature at liquid entrance
area)
T2 TH12 thermistor LEV control (Superheat) (Temperature at bypass exit area)
T3 TH13 thermistor LEV control (Controls liquid level) (Temperature of heat exchanger
exit area)
T4 TH14 thermistor LEV control (Controls liquid level) (Heat exchanger entrance temp
erature)
T5 TH15 thermistor LEV control (Superheat) (Bypass exit temperature)
T6 TH16 thermistor LEV control (Subcool) (Bypass entrance temperature)
THHS Thermistor Controls the inverter cooling fan based on the THHS temperature.
(Inverter radiator plate temperature)
63HS(1) High pressure sensor Detects the discharge pressure and then, protects unit against da
mage by high pressure.
63HS2 Intermediate pressure sensor Detects the discharge pressure and then, protects unit against da
mage by Intermediate pressure. (63HS2 is not displayed according
to the unit model.)
HPS1 High pressure sensor 1 Detects high pressure of compressor discharge
HPS2 High pressure sensor 2 Detects high pressure of gas pump
MPS Middle pressure sensor Detects middle pressure of BC controller
LPS Low pressure sensor Detects low pressure
63LS Low pressure sensor Detects the suction pressure and then, senses the refrigerant com
position
A_OC Refrigerant composition(R32) Real percentage of R32
A_OC* Refrigerant composition(R32) Calculated percentage of R32
Tc Average of saturation gas te For control of compressor frequency and fan speed
mperature of high pressure
and saturation liquid tempera
229
ture of high pressure
Te Saturation temperature of lo Same as TH2
w pressure
Icomp Direct current DC of inverter compressor
SV3t Solenoid valve output For the refrigerant control
TH9b Thermistor Senses the refrigerant composition based on TH2,TH9b and 63LS.
(composition sensing)
TH18 Thermistor Detects temperature
Ope Mode1,3 Operation mode 1,3 Operation mode for outdoor unit
Ctrl Mode3 Control mode 3 Control mode for outdoor unit
Vdc Bus voltage Bus voltage
Idc COMP operation current (D Peak value [A]
C)
Iu Phase-U current Phase-U current of compressor
Iw Phase-W current Phase-W current of compressor
PF Power factor Inverter output phase angle
Vdcgain Vdcgain Vdcgain
offset_u offset_u offset_u
offset_w offset_w offset_w
vf_ofst_kido vf_ofst_kido vf_ofst_kido
vf_ofst_power vf_ofst_power vf_ofst_power
Error Code Error code Error code
Time(min.sec) Time(min.sec) Time(min.sec) before error occurred
SV4a Solenoid valve output Heat exchanger capacity control
SV4b Solenoid valve output Heat exchanger capacity control
SV4c Solenoid valve output Heat exchanger capacity control
SV4d Solenoid valve output Heat exchanger bypass ON/OFF
THHS2 Thermistor THHS2 Comp inverter2 radiator plate temperature
THHS5 Thermistor THHS5 Fan inverter of outdoor unit radiator plate temperature
T5b Thermistor TH5b Controls defrosting (start/end) in heating mode (No.1 compressor)
TS5 Thermistor THHS5 Fan inverter of heat exchanger unit radiator plate temperature
T1(BC/main BC) TH11 thermistor LEV control (Controls liquid level) (Temperature at liquid entrance
area)
T2(BC/main BC) TH12 thermistor LEV control (Superheat) (Temperature at bypass exit area)
T5(BC/main BC) TH15 thermistor LEV control (Superheat) (Temperature at LEV3 exit area)
T6(BC/main BC) TH16 thermistor LEV control (Subcool) (Temperature at LEV3 entrance area)
T2(sub BC1) TH12 thermistor of sub BC LEV control (Superheat) (Temperature at bypass exit area)
T5(sub BC1) TH15 thermistor of sub BC1 LEV control (Superheat) (Temperature at LEV3 exit area)
T2(sub BC2) TH12 thermistor of sub BC2 LEV control (Superheat) (Temperature at bypass exit area)
T5(sub BC2) TH15 thermistor of sub BC2 LEV control (Superheat) (Temperature at LEV3 exit area)
P1(BC/main BC) High pressure (63HS1) Detects the high pressure at the liquid side
P3(BC/main BC) Intermediate pressure (63HS Detects the intermediate pressure
3)
L1(BC/main BC) LEV1 opening Liquid level control, differential pressure control
L2(main BC) LEV2 opening Liquid level control, differential pressure control
L3(BC/main BC) LEV3 opening Liquid level control, differential pressure control, superheat of bypa
ss control
L3(sub BC1) LEV3 opening of sub BC1 Liquid level control, differential pressure control, superheat of bypa
ss control
L3(sub BC2) LEV3 opening of sub BC2 Liquid level control, differential pressure control, superheat of bypa
ss control
Idc1 DC trunk line current DC trunk line current of inverter1
Vdc1 Bus voltage Bus voltage of inverter1
Iu1 Phase-U current Phase-U current of compressor1
Iw1 Phase-W current Phase-W current of compressor1
PF1 Power factor Inverter output phase angle of inverter1
Vdcgain1 Vdcgain Vdcgain of inverter1
offset_u1 offset_u offset_u of inverter1
offset_w1 offset_w offset_w of inverter1
vf_ofst_kido1 vf_ofst_kido vf_ofst_kido of inverter1
vf_ofst_power1 vf_ofst_power vf_ofst_power of inverter1
Iu2 Phase-U current Phase-U current of compressor2
Iw2 Phase-W current Phase-W current of compressor2
PF2 Power factor Inverter output phase angle of inverter2
Vdcgain2 Vdcgain Vdcgain of inverter2
offset_u2 offset_u offset_u of inverter2
offset_w2 offset_w offset_w of inverter2
vf_ofst_kido2 vf_ofst_kido vf_ofst_kido of inverter2
230
vf_ofst_power2 vf_ofst_power vf_ofst_power of inverter2
FAN2 Fan Fan capacity of heat exchanger unit
FAN2 (rpm) Fan speed FAN rotation speed[rpm]
FAN2-FREE Fan free run Outdoor unit fan State
Primarity Primarity Indicates whether the unit is primary or secondary
SV5D Solenoid valve output Closes when outdoor unit stops
OC Total Freq Total Frequency of OC unit Total temporary frequency of OC unit
OS Total Freq Total Frequency of OS unit Total temporary frequency of OC unit
Total Freq Total Frequency of OC and Total temporary frequency of OC and OS units
OS units
IH IH bound power IH restricted electricity
H-Def1 Continuous Heating Heat exchanger1 defrost
231
Data before Error occurred Terminology ( Refrigerator )
TH1 Discharge pipe temperature Discharge pipe temperature of the compressor
TH2 Compressor shell oil temperature Oil temperature of the compressor shell bottom
TH4 - For Japan market model
TH6 Outside air temperature Temperature of outside air
TH7 Suction pipe temperature Suction pipe temperature of the compressor
TH8 Liquid pipe temperature Temperature of the liquid pipe
HPS High-pressure Use for controlling compressor, fan and high-pressure protection.
LPS Low-pressure Use for controlling compressor, fan and low-pressure protection.
Idc Direct current(INV DC current) Peak value of the DCCT detection
Vdc Bus voltage(INV DC voltage) DC bus voltage
Tc Condensation temperature Condensation temperature of unit module.
(Converted high-pressure
saturation temperature)
Te Evaporation temperature Evaporation temperature of unit module.
(Converted low-pressure
THHS Inverter heatsink temperature Temperature of the heatsink. for controlling the inverter cooling fan.
AL Liquid refrigerant flooding level Determine the liquid refrigerant flooding condition.
0：dry, 1：wet, 2：liquid refrigerant flooding
Tem0 - For Japan market model
Tcm Target condensation Target condensation temperature of unit module.
temperature When unit correspondencing, It doesn't show because the controlling use
representative value.
Tem Target evaporation temperature Target evaporation temperature of unit module.
Delta-Tcm Target condensation Difference between the target condensation temperature and actual
temperature difference temperature(Tcm-Tc)
Delta-Tem Target evaporation temperature Difference between the target evaporation temperature and actual
difference temperature(Tem-Te)
Coff Low-pressure cut-off value Low-pressure cutoff compressor OFF-threshold
Unit:Mpa
Con Low-pressure cut-on value Low-pressure cutoff compressor ON-threshold
Unit:Mpa
lead-in speed Compressor suction speed Rate of the low-pressure change of compressor
Unit:Mpa/10s
Discharge-SH Compressor discharge superheat Discharge superheat of the compressor（TH1-Tc）
S-TH6 Representative outside air Representative outside air temperature of the overall unit
temperature
S-HPS Representative high-pressure Representative high-pressure of the overall unit
Unit:Mpa
S-LPS Representative low-pressure Representative low-pressure of the overall unit
Unit:Mpa
S-Coff Overall Low-pressure cutoff Representative low-pressure cutoff compressor OFF-threshold of the
compressor OFF-threshold overall unit Unit:Mpa
S-Con Overall Low-pressure cutoff Representative low-pressure cutoff compressor ON-threshold of the
compressor ON-threshold overall unit
Unit:Mpa
Iu Compressor U-phase current Inverter output current value(U-phase)
value
Iw Compressor W-phase current Inverter output current value(W-phase)
value
Vunb Limit of unbalance of power Show the state of the unbalance limiting control of power supply voltage.
supply voltage 1：Under control、0：Nomal
Fm Target frequency of the Target frequency of the compressor.
compressor（unit module value）
(Hz)
FAN(AK%) Heat exchanger capacity （ Fan Variable of the motor rotation speed of the condenser fan (%)
output）
S-Fm(Hz) Target frequency of the Target frequency of the compressor of unit module.
(Hz)
X101 Auxiliary relay<X101> status Used for the bypass solenoid valve output（the primary-side power-supply
voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
232
X102 Auxiliary relay<X102> status For Japan market model
X103 Auxiliary relay<X103> status Used for the crankcase heater output （ the primary-side power-supply
voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
X104 Auxiliary relay<X104> status Used for the solenoid valve <injection> output （ the primary-side
power-supply voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
X105 Auxiliary relay<X105> status Used for the high/low pressure bypass solenoid valve output （ the
primary-side power-supply voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
X106 Auxiliary relay<X106> status The solenoid valve <oil return> output （21Q1～3）（the primary-side
1：ON, 0：OFF
X107 Auxiliary relay<X107> status Used for the output of the operating status of the compressor（auxiliary
relay<X61> drive）（the primary-side power-supply voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
X108 Auxiliary relay<X108> status Used for 52F output （the primary-side power-supply voltage）. 1：ON, 0：
OFF
X109 Auxiliary relay<X109> status -
X111 Auxiliary relay<X111> status Used for the unit operation signal output（auxiliary relay<X4>drive）（the
1：ON, 0：OFF
X112 Auxiliary relay<X112> status Used for the error alarm signal output （ auxiliary relay<X5>drive ）（ the
1：ON, 0：OFF
X172 Auxiliary relay<X172> status Used for the 72C drive source output（the primary-side power-supply
voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
72C Output of 72C for export -
Err Error output -
COMP Compressor ON/OFF output -
LEV LEV output value LEV output value of the linear expansion valve <injection>. 0～480 pulse
233
Data before Error occurred Terminology ( Outdoor Sub Unit )
Ope State 1 Display of outdoor operation (3-min restart, compressor running, pr
eliminary error, Error, warm-up mode etc)
Ope State 2 Display of outdoor operation (Power failure LEV ON/OFF)
Ctrl Liquid Display of outdoor liquid correction mode
Ope Time Comp1 Operation time( accumulated ) of comp.
Comp ON Display of compressor run (1) / compressor off (0)
52C1 electromagnetic contactor Control of compressor
CH2/3 Accumlater level detection h Accumulator level detection heater output
eater output
Akx(2) Heat exchanger capacity Variable which determine the size of outdoor heat exchanger
AL Accumulator level Liquid level in the accumulation ( 0: Undercharge, 1: Adequate, 2
:Overcharge )
LEV2 Liquid pipe LEV opening Control of refrigerant in heating mode
21S4(a) 4-way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle (0:Cooling, 1:Heating)
21S4(b) 4-way valve Capacity control of heat exchanger
SV1 Solenoid valve output Returns oil from the oil separator (Bypass between discharge pipe
and suction pipe)
SV4 Solenoid valve output Control of low pressure (evaporation refrigerant in Accumulator )
SV5B(b) Solenoid valve output Control of refrigerant amount in liquid line
TH11 Thermistor Detects the discharge temperature for the high pressure protectio
n.
TH3 Thermistor Detects the liquid level in the accumulator (Detects lower liquid le
TH4 Thermistor Detects the liquid level in the accumulator (Detects upper liquid le
liquid level in heating mode, detects the sub-cool at the heat exc
hanger exit in combination with 63 HS data, and controls LEV1
(Detects the liquid pipe temperature)
TH6 Thermistor Detects ambient temperature
TH7(8,9) Thermistor (Controls SC) Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
7,8 and 9.
TH10a Thermistor Detects outlet temperature of heat exchanger in heating mode. (G
as pipe temperature of heat exchanger)
TH10b Thermistor Detects temperature of balance pipe
position.
234
Data before Error occurred Terminology (CAHV-P500YA-HPB,CAHV-P50
0YB-HPB)
TH1 Thermistor Discharge Ref temperature 1
TH2 Thermistor Suction Ref temperature 1
TH3 Thermistor Shell Ref temperature 1
TH4 Thermistor Air hex Ref temperature 1
TH9 Thermistor Outdoor temperature 1
TH10 Thermistor Water Inlet temperature 1
TH11 Thermistor Water Outlet temperature 1
TH14 Thermistor Representative water temperature 1
THHS Thermistor IGBT temperature
HP1 Pressure sensor High pressure senser
LP1 Pressure sensor Low pressure senser
Ts Target water temperature
Twi Current inlet water temperature
Two Current outlet water temperature
Twg Main water temperature TH14 or TH15 temperature which is selected
Tout Main outdoor temperature 4-20mA2 or IT temperature which is selected
0-10IN 0-10V/2-10V External analog input for Target water temp (0-10V)
1-5IN 1-5V External analog input for Target water temp (1-5V)
4/20IN1 4-20mA1 External analog input for Target water temp (4-20mA)
Idc(Comp) DC trunk line current [A]
Iu(Comp) Phase-U current of compressor [A]
Iw(Comp) Phase-W current of compressor [A]
Vdc(Comp) COMP bus voltage [V]
4/20IN2 4-20mA2 External analog input for Outdoor temp (4-20mA2
SHs Target superheat value at the suction pipe to compressor
SH difference from suction gas temp to saturated gas temp
Shell-SH superheat value at the suction point of compressor
Td-SHs Target superheat value at the discharged pipe from compressor
Td-SH superheat value at the discharged point from compressor
COMP1 oparating frequency in main circuit
COMP2 oparating frequency in sub circuit
FAN(Hz) Outdoor unit fan output [%]
LEV1 LEV1 pulse
LEV2 LEV2 pulse at HIC circuit
235
Data before Error occurred Terminology (CRHV-P600YA-HPB)
Ver Software Version Program ROM
TH1 Thermistor Discharge Ref temp.1
TH2 Thermistor Suction Ref temp.1
TH3 Thermistor Shell Ref temp.1
TH4 Thermistor Heat exchanger wall temp.1
TH5 Thermistor Discharge Ref temp.2
TH6 Thermistor Suction Ref temp.2
TH7 Thermistor Shell Ref temp.2
TH8 Thermistor Heat exchanger wall temp.2
TH9 Thermistor Outdoor temp.1
TH11 Thermistor Water inlet temp.1
TH12 Thermistor Water outlet temp.1
TH13 Thermistor Heat source inlet temp.1
TH14 Thermistor Heat source outlet temp.1
TH15 Thermistor External Water sensor.1
TH16 Thermistor External Water sensor.2
TH17 Thermistor Hot Water inlet temp.2
TH18 Thermistor Hot Water outlet temp.2
TH20 Thermistor Heat source inlet temp.2
HP 63HS High pressure sensor
LP 63LS Low pressure sensor
Vdc - COMP bus voltage [V]
Iu - Phase-U current of compressor [A]
Iw - Phase-W current of compressor [A]
Ts - Target water temperature
Twi - Current inlet hot water temperature
Two - Current outlet hot water temperature
SHs - Target superheat value at the suction pipe to compressor
SHt - -
SHb - -
Shell-SH - Superheat value at the shell of the compressor
Td-SHs - Target superheat value at the discharge pipe
Td-SH - Superheat value at the discharge pipe
LEV1 - Electronic expansion valve(Main/Sub circuit)
LEV2 - -
LEV3 - Electronic expansion valve(Main/Sub injection circuit)
COMP1(Hz) - Operating frequency in main circuit [Hz]
COMP2(Hz) - Operating frequency in sub circuit [Hz]
4-20mA1 - External analog input for Target water temp (4-20mA1)
0-10V - External analog input for Target water temp (0-10V/2-10V)
1-5V - External analog input for Target water temp (1-5V)
4-20mA2 - External analog input for Outdoor temp (4-20mA2)
236
Data before Error occurred Terminology
(EACV-P900YA,EAHV-P900YA,EAHV-P900YA-H)
TH1 Thermistor Water inlet temp．1
TH3 Thermistor Water outlet temperature
TH5 Thermistor ACC Inlet Ref temperature
TH6 Thermistor Air hex Ref temperature
TH7 Thermistor Water hex Ref temperature
TH10 Thermistor Outdoor temperature
TH11 Thermistor Discharge Ref temperature
TH15 Thermistor External Water sensor
Twi - Current inlet water temperature
Two - Current outlet water temperature
Twg Main water temperature External water temperature
Tout - Outdoor air temperature by BMS
SHs - Target superheat value at the ACC inlet pipe
SCs - Target subcool value at the ACC inlet pipe
SH - -
SC - -
FAN1(Hz) - Operating frequency of fan moter1 [Hz]
237
Data before Error occurred Terminology (CMB-WP108V-G)
TH11 Thermistor
TH12 Thermistor
TH13 Thermistor
TH14 Thermistor
TH15 Thermistor
TH16 Thermistor
TH31a Thermistor
TH31b Thermistor
TH31c Thermistor
TH31d Thermistor
TH31e Thermistor
TH31f Thermistor
TH31g Thermistor
TH31h Thermistor
TH32 Thermistor
TH33 Thermistor
TH34 Thermistor
TH35 Thermistor
TH36 Thermistor
TH37 Thermistor
Ps1 Pressure sensor
SWgp1 SWgp1 signal
SWgp2 SWgp2 signal
SWgp3 SWgp3 signal
PS Power failure detection
Float Float SW setting value
Flcon Float SW setting value
PumpI1 Pump1 Input number of rotations
PumpO1 Pump1 Output variable for control
HB Sig Outdoor unit operation contro Outdoor unit operation control signal to OC
l
OC Sig Indoor unit operation control Indoor unit operation control signal from OC
sigmaQj(C) Total capacity code (cooling) Outdoor unit operation control signal to OC
sigmaQj(H) Total capacity code (heating) Indoor unit operation control signal from OC
21S4Ma 4-way valve Cooling indoor unit capacity
21S4Mb 4-way valve Heating indoor unit capacity
SVM1 Solenoid valve
72C Contactor
1a-1h 2 way valve MV1* "0" represents "valve opening = 85"
"1" represents "valve opening = 800"
3a-3h 3 way valve MV3*
LEV1 Linear expansion valve
Error Code Error Code Error Code
238
(CMB-WP108/1016V-GA1, CMB-WM108/1016V-AA)
TH11 Thermistor sensor Liquid-side refrigerant temp. of Heating-main heat exchanger
TH12 Thermistor sensor Liquid-side refrigerant temp. of Cooling-main heat exchanger
TH15 Thermistor sensor Bypass inlet temperature
TH16 Thermistor sensor Bypass outlet temperature
TH31a-p Thermistor sensor 1st-16th port returned water temp.
PS1 Pressure sensor PS1 Detects the high pressure at the liquid side.
PS3 Pressure sensor PS3 Detects the low pressure.
TH32 Thermistor sensor Outlet water temp. of Heating-main heat exchanger
TH33 Thermistor sensor Outlet water temp. of Cooling-main heat exchanger
TH34 Thermistor sensor Water pump 2 discharge water temp.
SH1 Superheat Superheat at bypass exit area. TH13-TH11 (only HB)
SC1 Subcool Subcool at liquid entrance area. PT1-TH11 (only HB)
PT1 Average of saturation gas te For control of LEV (LEV1,LEV2,LEV3). (only HB)
mperature of
high pressure and saturation
liquid temperature of high pr
essure
dPHM Differential pressure PS1-PS3 Pressure.(only HB)
Float Float SW
Flcon Float SW
sigmaQj(C) Total capacity code (cooling) Cooling indoor unit capacity
sigmaQj(H) Total capacity code (heating) Heating indoor unit capacity
21S4Ma 4-way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle (0:Cooling, 1:Heating)
21S4Mb 4-way valve Heat exchanger capacity control
SVM1 Solenoid valve Refrigerant flow volume control
l
VB3a-3p 3-way valve MV3* Controls the water flow path and the water flow rate
LEV1 LEV1 opening Liquid level control, differential pressure control
LEV3 LEV3 opening Liquid level control, differential pressure control, superheat of bypa
ss control
239
(CMB-WP108/1016V-GB1, CMB-WM108/1016V-AB)
Float Float SW
Flcon Float SW
VB3a-3p 3-way valve VB3* Controls the water flow path and the water flow rate
Float Float SW
Flcon Float SW
240
(RBH-P35NRA-Q-TWN/RBS-P20/202HRA-Q-TWN)
MODEL CODE (Unit code) - 06(STD08)
Ver Software Version Main program ROM version
TH1 Thermistor Room temperature (Air temperature measured by thermistor)
TH2 End of defrosting1 Defrost end(1)/Other(0)
TH4 Model(Unit) setting Model setting input
THe Analog input1 Blank
4-20 Analog input2 Blank
SET TEMP. Room temerature setting Target room temperature (Cut-off value)
RC COMMAND Remote controler command Operation(1)/Stop(0)
DATE DATE(YYMMDD) A date when abnormalities occur
TIME TIME A time when abnormalities occur
DIFF. Room temperature difference Differential of room temperature ((Cut-in value) - (Cut-off value))
SETBACK Setback value Setting value of setback operation
TEMP ALARM Difference of high temperatur Setting value of high temperature alarm
e alarm
X6 External abnormalities Condensing unit is unusual(1)/usual(0)
X7 Compressor ON/OFF One or more compressors are Running(1)/Stop(0)
IN3 External contact input Set up(1)/Unset up(0)
IN4 (Reserve) Blank
LEV Linear expantion valve Linear expantion valve output [pulse]
X1 Control source output -
X2 Solenoid valve (liquid) output -
X3 Cooler fan output -
X4 Defrost heater output1 -
X30 Alarm output1 Condensing unit is unusual(1)/usual(0)
X31 Alarm output2 High temperature alarm(1)/usual(0)
X32 Alarm output3 High temperature error (50℃)(1)/usual(0)
12-1 Driver output1 (DC12V) Warning buzzer output
12-2 Driver output2 (DC12V) Blank
241
(PUHY-P72/96/108TGMU-A, PUHY-P126/144TGMU-A, PUHY-P168/192/204/
216/234TGMU-A)
Ctrl Mode Control mode for outdoor unit
Ope Mode Operation mode for outdoor unit
Save Signal of capacity saving from system controller.
figure : % No signal : 100%
Power Power source frequency Power source frequency (Hz)
F Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control
F1 Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control
ency of No.1 Comp for calc (only for P168 type or over)
ulation
ulation
AK Heat exchanger capacity Variable which determines the size of outdoor heat exchanger
FAN Fan Fan capacity of outdoor unit
(not proportional to rotational frequency)
DEMAND ON/OFF demand Input stop signal of compressor
( ON:effective, OFF:ineffective )
DEMAND2 Intermediate demand Signal of capacity saving
DEMAND=OFF, DEMAND2=OFF: 100%
DEMAND=OFF, DEMAND2=ON : 75%
DEMAND= ON, DEMAND2=ON : 50%
DEMAND= ON, DEMAND2=OFF: 25%
SNOW Snow sensor Input run signal of outdoor unit fan
(As compressor stopped)
NIGHT Night mode Decreases frequency of outdoor unit fan
Qj(C) Total capacity code (cool) Cooling indoor unit capacity
Qj(H) Total capacity code (heat) Heating indoor unit capacity
21S4a 4-way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle
(0:Cooling, 1:Heating)
21S4b 4-way valve Capacity control of heat exchanger (Gas side)
(only for P126 type or over)
SV1 Solenoid valve output The discharge pressure control
(Bypass between discharge
pipe and suction pipe)
SV3 Solenoid valve output Protects compressor when No.2 compressor stops.
(Bypass between discharge (only for P168 type or over)
SV5b Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger (Liquid side).
52F Contactor ON/OFF switch of No.2 fan
Rep Repeater output Prohibit(0)/Permit(1) the communication with centralized control sys
tem
TH11 Thermistor Detects discharge temperature for protection of No.1 compressor.
(Detects discharge temperatu
re)
(Detects discharge temperatu (only for P168 type or over)
re)
TH5 Thermistor Controls defrosting (start/ end) in heating mode.
(Detects the liquid pipe temp
erature)
(Detects the ambient air tem ncy and liquid level in the accumulator.
perature)
TH7(8) Thermistor Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
(Controls SC) 6,7 and 8.
THHS1 Thermistor Controls the Comp inverter cooling fan based on the THHS1 temp
(Comp inverter radiator plate erature.
temperature)
THHS5 Thermistor Controls the Fan inverter cooling fan based on the THHS5 temper
(Fan inverter radiator plate t ature.
emperature)
63HS High pressure sensor Detects the discharge pressure and then protects unit against da
242
position.
Tc Average of saturation gas te For control of compressor frequency and fan speed.
Te Saturation temperature of lo For control of compressor frequency and fan speed
w pressure
SCO Sub-cool at heat exchanger Variable for control
Tc-TH5
SCC Sub-cool at SC coil exit Variable for control
Tc-TH7
SHB SC coil bypass exit supper Variable for control
heat
TH8-Te
Idc DC trunk line current DC trunk line current
243
(PUHY-P72/96/120THMU-A, PUHY-P72/96/120YHMU-A)
Attribute OC/OS identification OC/OS identification (OC/OS1/OS2)
Ctrl Mode Control Mode Outdoor unit control mode
Ope Mode Operation Status, Backup m Outdoor unit operation mode
ode
Ope Status Operation Status Operation Status, Backup mode
F All temporary frequencies All temporary frequencies (Foc+Fos) [Hz]
Foc Temporary frequency OC unit temporary frequency [Hz]
Fos Temporary frequency OS unit temporary frequency [Hz]
FAN Fan output Outdoor unit fan output [%]
DEMAND Contact point demand Input stop signal of compressor
(ON:effective, OFF:ineffective)
DEMAND2 Step demand Signal of capacity saving
NIGHT Low-noise mode (Capacity pr Decreases frequency of outdoor unit fan
iority) (ON:effective, OFF:ineffective)
NIGHT2 Low-noise mode (Quiet priori Decreases frequency of outdoor unit fan
ty) (ON:effective, OFF:ineffective)
Qj(C) Total capacity code (cooling) Cooling indoor unit capacity
Qj(H) Total capacity code (heating) Heating indoor unit capacity
LEV1 Linear expansion valve Controls refrigerant flow in dual-pipe heat exchanger in SC circuit.
LEV2 Linear expansion valve Controls refrigerant flow rate.
21S4a 4-way valve Cooling/Heating switching
21S4b 4-way valve Cooling/Heating switching
(only for P120 type)
SV1a Solenoid valve For opening/closing the bypass circuit under the O/S.
SV5b Solenoid valve Heat exchanger capacity control
SV5c Solenoid valve Heat exchanger capacity control
(only for P120 type)
SV9 Solenoid valve Auxiliary heat exchanger bypass
TH4 Thermistor (Discharge tempe Discharge temperature
rature)
TH5 Thermistor (ACC inlet pipe t ACC inlet pipe temperature
emperature)
TH3 Thermistor (Liquid pipe temp Pipe temperature
erature)
TH7 Thermistor (Ambient air temp Outside air temperature
erature)
TH6 Thermistor Subcooled liquid refrigerant temperature
TH2 Thermistor SC bypass outlet temperature
THHS Thermistor Heat sink temperature
(Comp inverter radiator plate
temperature)
THBOX Thermistor Control box internal temperature
(Detects the internal tempera
ture of control box)
63HS1 Pressure sensor High pressure
63LS Pressure sensor Low pressure
Tc Condensing temperature Condensing temperature
Te Evaporating temperature Evaporating temperature
SCO Heat exchanger outlet subco Variable for control
oling
SCC SC coil outlet subcooling Variable for control
SHB SC coil bypass outlet superh Variable for control
eat
Vdc COMP bus voltage COMP bus voltage [V]
C)
Iu U-Phase current effective val U-Phase current effective value [A]
ue
244
Iw W-Phase current effective va W-Phase current effective value [A]
lue
Rotation Timer Integrated operation time of Integrated operation time of COMP for rotation purpose[hh.mm]
COMP for rotation purpose
245
(PUHY-P72/96/120/144TJMU-A,PUHY-P72/96/120/144YJMU-A)
Ope Mode Operation Mode Outdoor unit operation mode
ode
( ON:effective OFF:ineffective )

iority) ( ON:effective OFF:ineffective )
ty) ( ON:effective OFF:ineffective )

(0:opening, 1: closing)
52F1 Magnetic contactor (FAN) ON/OFF switch of No.2 FAN
TH4 Thermistor Discharge temperature
TH5 Thermistor ACC inlet pipe temperature
TH3 Thermistor Pipe temperature
TH7 Thermistor Outside air temperature
63HS2 Pressure sensor Intermediate pressure
(63HS2 is not displayed according to the unit model.)
olin
eat
246
C)
ue
lue
247
(PUHY-P72/96/120/144TKMU-A,PUHY-P72/96/120/144YKMU-A,PUHY-P72/9
6/120/144TKMU-U,PUHY-P72/96/120/144YKMU-U)
ode
figure : %, No signal : 100%
FAN (rpm) Fan output (Adres 5) Outdoor unit fan output [rpm]
FAN2(rpm) Fan output (Adres 6) Outdoor unit fan output [rpm]
(Only for P120 type or over)
FAN -FREE Fan free run (Adres 5) Outdoor unit fan State
FAN2-FREE Fan free run (Adres 6) Outdoor unit fan State
DEMAND=OFF, DEMAND2=OFF : 100%
DEMAND=ON, DEMAND2=ON : 50%
DEMAND=ON, DEMAND2=OFF : 25%

SV2 Solenoid valve For opening/closing the the discharge suction bypass
olin
eat
248
C)
ue
lue
Rotation Timer Integrated operation time of Integrated operation time of COMP for rotation purpose [hh.mm]
249
(PUHY-P72/96/120/144/168TLMU-A,PUHY-P72/96/120/144/168YLMU-A)
Ope Status Operation Status, Backup Operation Status, Backup mode
mode
FAN Fan output (Adres 5) Outdoor unit fan output [%]
FAN2 Fan output (Adres 6) Outdoor unit fan output [%]
FAN (rpm) Fan speed (Adres 5) FAN rotation speed[rpm]
FAN2(rpm) Fan speed (Adres 6) FAN rotation speed[rpm]
IH restricted electricity
IH IH bound power (0:Stop, 1:Operate)
NIGHT Low-noise mode (Capacity Decreases frequency of outdoor unit fan
priority) (ON:effective, OFF:ineffective)
NIGHT2 Low-noise mode (Quiet Decreases frequency of outdoor unit fan
LEV2a Linear expansion valve Pressure control, Refrigerant flow rate control
LEV2b Linear expansion valve Pressure control, Refrigerant flow rate control
TH2 Thermistor Subcool bypass outlet temperature
SCO Heat exchanger outlet Variable for control
subcoolin
SHB SC coil bypass outlet Variable for control
superheat
250
Iu U-Phase current effective U-Phase current effective value [A]
value
Iw W-Phase current effective W-Phase current effective value [A]
value
251
(PUHY-P72/96/120/144ZKMU-A)
mode
FAN-FREE Fan free run (Adres 5) Outdoor unit fan State
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
subcoolin
252
superheat
value
value
253
(PURY-P72/96/108/126/144TGMU-A, PURY-P168/192/204/216/234TGMU-A)
ulation
ulation
21S4b 4-way valve Heat exchanger capacity control
SV1 Solenoid valve output Bypass between discharge pipe and suction pipe
tem
re)
re)
(Detects the pipe temperatur
e)
perature)
TH7 Thermistor For defrost control
(Detects pipe temperature)
temperature)
emperature)
254
63LS Low pressure sensor Detects the suction pressure and then, protects unit against dama
ge by low pressure.
Te Saturation temperature of lo For control of compressor frequency and fan speed.
w pressure
255
(PURY-P72/96/120THMU-A, PURY-P72/96/120YHMU-A, PURY-P72/96TJMU
-A, PURY-P72/96YJMU-A)
Attribute OC/OS identification OC/OS identification (OC/OS1)
ode
SV2 Solenoid valve For opening/closing the discharge suction bypass
SV4a Solenoid valve Heat exchanger capacity control
SV4d Solenoid valve Heat exchanger capacity control
SV5b Solenoid valve For opening/ closing the bypass circuit
SV5c Solenoid valve Closed valve (Low pressure pipe)
SV9 Solenoid valve For opening/closing the bypass circuit.
TH6 Thermistor Heat exchanger inlet pipe temperature
TH15 Thermistor Compressor shell bottom temperature

（TH15 is not displayed according to the unit model.)
TH16 Thermistor Accumulator temperature(Bottom)
TH17 Thermistor Accumulator temperature(Middle)
TH18 Thermistor Accumulator temperature(Hi)
THBOX Thermistor Control box internal temperature
(Detects the internal temperature of control box)
63HS1 High pressure sensor High pressure
63LS Low pressure sensor Low pressure
256
C)
ue
lue
ALh Accumulator level Accumulator level by heater kit
（ALh is not displayed according to the unit model.)
CH21 Belt heater Belt heater 1,2(for heating the accumulator)
(1:ON, 0:OFF)
（CH21 is not displayed according to the unit model.)
257
(PURY-P120/144TJMU-A, PURY-P120/144YJMU-A)
ode
Qj(C) Total capacity code (cooling Cooling indoor unit capacity
21S4b 4-way valve Heat exchanger capacity switching
(Only for P120 type or over) (0:opening, 1: closing)
52F1 Magnetic contactor (FAN) ON/OFF switch of No.2 FAN
C)
258
ue
lue
(1:ON, 0:OFF)
259
(PURY-P72/96/120/144TKMU-A, PURY-P72/96/120/144YKMU-A, PURY-P72/
96/120/144TKMU-U, PURY-P72/96/120/144YKMU-U)
ode
FAN(rpm) No.1 Fan FAN rotation speed[rpm]
FAN2(rpm) No.2 Fan FAN rotation speed[rpm]
FAN No.1 Fan output Outdoor unit fan output [%]
FAN2 No.2 Fan output Outdoor unit fan output [%]
FAN -Free No.1 Fan free run Outdoor unit fan State
FAN2-Free No.2 Fan free run Outdoor unit fan State
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
LEV5a Linear expansion valve For the control of evaporating temperature

LEV5b Linear expansion valve For the control of evaporating temperature
SV5b Solenoid valve Outdoor unit heat exchanger capacity control
TH4 Thermistor Discharge pipe temperaure
TH6 Thermistor Subcooled liquid refrigerant temperaure
260
ue
lue
ALｈ Accumulator level Accumulator level by heater kit
(1:ON, 0:OFF)
261
(PURY-P72/96/120/144/168TLMU-A, PURY-P72/96/120/144/168YLMU-A)
ode
FAN -FREE No.1 Fan free run Outdoor unit fan State
FAN2-FREE No.2 Fan free run Outdoor unit fan State
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
SV1a Solenoid valve For opening/closing the bypass circuit under the O/S
SV9 Solenoid valve For opening/closing the bypass circuit
262
63HS1 pressure sensor High pressure
63HS2 pressure sensor Intermediate pressure
(is not displayed according to the unit model)
63LS pressure sensor Low pressure
ue
lue
(1:ON, 0:OFF)
263
(PURY-P72/96/120/144ZKMU-A)
Ope Status Operation Status, Backup mode Operation Status, Backup mode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
NIGHT Low-noise mode (Capacity priority) Decreases frequency of outdoor unit fan
NIGHT2 Low-noise mode (Quiet priority) Decreases frequency of outdoor unit fan
(0:opening, 1: closing)"
264
Iu U-Phase current effective value U-Phase current effective value [A]
Iw W-Phase current effective value W-Phase current effective value [A]
Rotation Timer Integrated operation time of COMP for rotation purpose Integrated operation time of COMP for rotation purpose [hh.mm]
CH21 Belt heater Belt heater 1,2(for heating the accumulator) (1:ON, 0:OFF)
265
(PQHY-P72/96TGMU-A)
AK Heat exchanger capacity Variable which determines the size of outdoor
heat exchanger
LEV2 Cool down inverter LEV ope Cool down inverter
ning
(only for P400/500YSGM-A type)
UNIT_ON/OFF ON/OFF-output ON/OFF-monitor (TB8-1,2P)
tem
re)
erature)
perature)
TH9 Thermistor Detects the water heat exchanger temperature and then, carries o
(Freeze prevention sensor) ut freeze prevention control.
THINV Thermistor Controls a capacity of heat exchanger for cool down inverter depe
(Outlet of heat exchanger for nds on a temperature of THINV.
cool down inverter)
temperature)
ge by low pressure.
w pressure
266
267
(PQHY-P200/250/300YHM-A, PQHY-P72/96/120THMU-A, PQHY-P72/96/120
YHMU-A, PQHY-P200/250YHMT-A, PQHY-P200/250/300YHMC-A)
ode
Save Signal of capacity saving from system controller
AK Heat exchanger capacity Variable which determine the size of outdoor heat exchanger
DEMAND=ON , DEMAND2=ON : 50%
DEMAND=ON , DEMAND2=OFF: 25%
LEV2 Linear expansion valve Controls refrigerant flow rate
LEVINV Linear expansion valve Cool down inverter
SV9 Solenoid valve For opening or closing the bypass circuit
Unit_ON/OFF ON/OFF-output ON/OFF-monitor (TB8-1,2P)
Start-up Unit Start-up unit Start-up unit
THINV Thermistor Outlet temperature of heat exchanger for cool down inverter
TH7 Thermistor Inlet water temperature
TH8 Thermistor Outlet water temperature
Te Evaporating temperature Evaporatiting temperature
SCo Heat exchanger outlet subco Variable for control
oling
SCc SC coil outlet subcooling Variable for control
SHb SC coil bypass outlet superh Variable for control
eat
ue
lue
Rotation Timer Integrated operation time of Integrated operation time of
COMP for rotation purpose COMP for rotation purpose [hh.mm]
268
(PQHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A, PQHY-P200/250/300/
350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A1, PQHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/
600YLM-A2)
mode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
LEV6 Linear expansion valve Heat exchanger capacity control
SV4a Solenoid valve Heat exchanger capacity control (Only for PQHY-***-A type)
SV4b Solenoid valve Heat exchanger capacity control (Only for PQHY-***-A type)
SV4d Solenoid valve Heat exchanger capacity control (Only for PQHY-***-A type)
subcoolin
superheat
value
269
value
270
(PQHY-P72/96/120ZKMU-A)
ode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
olin
eat
ue
lue
271
(PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240YLMU-A, PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168
/192/216/240YLMU-A1, PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240TLMU-A, PQ
HY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240TLMU-A1)
ode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
21S4b 4-way valve Cooling/Heating switching (Only for P144 type or over)
SV7c Solenoid valve Heat exchanger capacity control (Only for P144 type or over)
olin
eat
ue
lue
272
(PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192ZLMU-A, PQHY-P72/96/120/144/168/192ZLM
U-A1)
mode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
subcoolin
superheat
value
value
273
274
(PQRY-P72/96TGMU-A)
F Temporary compressorfreque Variable for control
ncy for calculation
AK Heat exchanger capacity Variable which determines the size of outdoorheat exchanger
ning
tem
re)
(Detects the ambient air ncy and liquid level in the accumulator.
temperature)
cool down inverter)
temperature)
ge by low pressure.
w pressure
275
(PQRY-P200/250/300YHM-A, PQRY-P72/96/120THMU-A, PQRY-P72/96/120
YHMU-A，PQRY-P200/250/300YHMC-A)
ode
Start-up Unit Start-up unit Start-up unit
Te Evaporating temperature Evaporatiting temperature
ue
lue
Rotation Timer Integrated operation time of Integrated operation time of
COMP for rotation purpose COMP for rotation purpose [hh.mm]
276
(PQRY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A, PQRY-P200/250/300/
350/400/450/500/550/600YLM-A1, PQRY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/
600YLM-A2)
mode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
value
value
277
(PQRY-P72/96/120ZKMU-A)
ode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
ue
lue
278
(PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240TLMU-A, PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/
192/216/240TLMU-A1, PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240YLMU-A, PQ
RY-P72/96/120/144/168/192/216/240YLMU-A1)
mode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)


value
value
279
(PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192ZLMU-A, PQRY-P72/96/120/144/168/192ZLM
U-A1)
mode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
value
value
280
(PUHY-HP72/96THMU-A, PUHY-HP200/250YHMC-A, PUHY-HP200/250YHM
C-B)
ode
FAN Fan output Outdoor unit fan output
iority) ( ON:effective, OFF:ineffective )
ty) ( ON:effective, OFF:ineffective )
LEV1 Linear expansion valve Controls refrigerant flow in dual-pipe heat exchanger in SC circuit
LEV4 Linear expansion valve For opening or closing the injection circuit
21S4a 4-way valve Cooling/heating switching
SV6 Solenoid valve For opening/closing the SC bypass circuit
63HS2 Pressure sensor Intermediate pressure.
oling
eat
C)
Iu U-phase current effective val U-phase current effective value [A]
ue
Iw W-phase current effective val W-phase current effective value [A]
ue
281
(PUHY-HP72/96TJMU-A)
ode
LEV1 Linear expansion valve Controls refrigerant flow in dual-pipe heat exchanger
in SC circuit
21S4a 4-way valve Cooling/heating switching
63HS2 Pressure sensor Intermediate pressure.
Sco Heat exchanger outlet subco Variable for control
oling
eat
Iu U-phase current effective val U-phase current effective value [A]
ue
Iw W-phase current effective val W-phase current effective value [A]
ue
Rotation Timer Integrated operation time of Integrated operation time of COMP
COMP for rotation purpose [hh.mm]
for rotation purpose
282
(PURY-HP72/96TKMU-A-H, PURY-HP72/96YKMU-A)
ode
F All temporary frequencies All temporary frequencies (Foc?) [Hz]
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
LEV4 Linear expansion valve For opening/closing the injection circuit
SV10 Solenoid valve For opening/closing the defrost circuit
TH9 Thermistor Heat exchanger outlet pipe temperaure
TH11 Thermistor Heat exchanger outlet pipe temperaure
THHS Thermistor IPM temperature
63HS1 Pressure sensor Discharge pressure
ue
lue
283
(CMB-P104/108/1010/1013/1016NU-G, CMB-P108/1010/1013/1016NU-GA, C
MB-P104/108NU-GB)
BC Sig Outdoor unit operation contro Outdoor unit operation control signal to OC
l (only standard BC and main BC)
(only standard BC and main BC)
(only main BC)
L3 LEV3 opening Liquid level control, differential pressure control, superheat of bypa
ss control
SVM(1) Solenoid valve output(SVM Refrigerant flow volume control
(1)) (only standard BC and main BC)
SVM2 Solenoid valve output(SVM2) Liquid level control, differential pressure control
(only main BC)
SV*a Solenoid valve output(SV*a) Surply refrigerant to the cool only indoor unit
SV*b Solenoid valve output(SV*b) Surply refrigerant to the heat pump indoor unit
SV*c Solenoid valve output(SV*c) For equally pressure control
T1 TH11 thermistor LEV control (Controls liquid level)
(Temperature at liquid entran (only standard BC and main BC)
ce area)
T2 TH12 thermistor LEV control (Superheat)
(Temperature at bypass exit
area)
(Temperature at LEV3 exit a
rea)
T6 TH16 thermistor LEV control (Subcool)
(Temperature at LEV3 entran (only standard BC and main BC)
ce area)
SC1 SC11 Subcool at liquid entrance area
SC6 SC16 Subcool at LEV3 entrance area
SH2 SH12 Superheat at bypass exit area
dPHM Differential pressure P1-P3 (Pressure)
P1 High pressure(63HS1) Detects the high pressure at the liquid side.
Saturation evaporation temperature is indicated at the same time.
P3 Intermediate pressure(63HS3) Detects the intermediate pressure.
284
(PUMY-P100/125/140YHM)
Operation mode Operation mode
FAN Fan steps Out door unit fan steps

F/Hz Compressor frequency Compressor frequency
SC Sub cool Sub cool
SCm Target sub cool Target sub cool (cooling)
Pdm Target high pressure Target high pressure (heating)
ETm Target evaporation temperatu Target evaporation temperature (cooling)
re
52C electromagnetic contactor 52C output (inverter main circuit)
21S4 4-way valve 4-way valve
SV1(A) Solenoid valve 1 output The bypass of discharge gas (for pd back up)
SV1(B) Solenoid valve 1 output The bypass of discharge gas(for td back up)
SV1(C) Solenoid valve 1 output The bypass of discharge gas(for stop mode pressure equalization)
TH4 Thermistor It detects the discharge temperature to control the compressor fre
(Detects discharge temperatu quency.
re) It protects the discharge temperature.
It is used to calculate the discharge superheat temperature.
TH6 Thermistor It detects the low pressure saturation temperature to control the c
ompressor frequency.
TH3 Thermistor It is used to control LEV pulse in cooling mode.
(Pipe temperature/Defrost det It is used to start the defrost mode in heating mode.
ermination)
TH7 Thermistor It detects the ambient temperature to control outdoor fan and LEV
(Detects the ambient air tem pulse.
perature)
TH8 Thermistor It detects the power transistor radiator plate temperature for protec
(radiator plate temperature) tion of power transistor.
63HS High pressure sensor It detects the discharge pressure to control the compressor freque
ncy and protects unit against damage by high pressure.
It is used to calculate the sub cool. (Detects discharge pressure)
SC 1 Sub cool of indoor unit 1 Heating mode:Sub cool of indoor unit 1
SC10 Sub cool of indoor unit 10 Heating mode:Sub cool of indoor unit 10
SCm 1 Target sub cool of indoor un Heating mode:Target sub cool of indoor unit 1
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
it 8
it 9
SCm10 Target sub cool of indoor un Heating mode:Target sub cool of indoor unit 10
it 10
it 11
it 12
LEV 1 LEV pulse of indoor unit 1 LEV pulse of indoor unit 1 LEV pulse control from the outdoor un
it
it
285
it
it
it
it
it
it
LEV 9 LEV pulse of indoor unit 9 LEV pulse of indoor unit 10 LEV pulse control from the outdoor u
nit
LEV10 LEV pulse of indoor unit 10 LEV pulse of indoor unit 11 LEV pulse control from the outdoor u
nit
nit
nit
INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT Input current of outdoor unit.
COMP CURRENT COMPRESSOR CURRENT Compressor operating current of outdoor unit.
VDC BUS BAR VOLTAGE(V) Bus bar voltage of inverter circuit
286
(PUMY-P36/48NHMUR4)

LEV_A LEV-A pulse of outdoor unit Command value of LEV-A pulse of outdoor unit (fixed to blank)
(not implemented)
LEV_B LEV-B pulse of outdoor unit Command value of LEV-B pulse of outdoor unit (fixed to blank)
(not implemented)
demand A state of demand function Input: 1 / No input: 0
via outdoor unit input
TH4 Thermistor It detects the comp. surface temperature to control the compresso
(Detects comp. surface temp r frequency.
erature) It protects the comp. surface temperature.
ermination)
perature)
63LS Low pressure sensor (not im It detects the suction pressure to control LEV-B and LEVs of indo
plemented) or units pulse. (fixed to 0.0)
TH2 Thermistor (not implemented) It is used to control LEV-B pulse. (fixed to 0.0)
(HIC temperature)
re
I(input)(A) Input current Input current of outdoor unit.
I(comp)(A) Compressor current Compressor operating current of outdoor unit.
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
287
it 8
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
288
(PUMY-P60NKMU, PUMY-P60NKMU1)

ermination)
perature)
63LS Low pressure sensor It detects the suction pressure to control LEV-B and LEVs of indo
or units pulse.
TH2 Thermistor It is used to control LEV-B pulse.
(HIC temperature)
re
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
it 8
289
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
290
( MXZ-4C36NAHZ, MXZ-4C36NAHZ-U1, MXZ-5C42NAHZ,
MXZ-5C42NAHZ-U1, MXZ-8C48NA, MXZ-8C48NA-U1,
MXZ-8C48NAHZ, MXZ-8C48NAHZ-U1)
LEV_A LEV-A pulse of outdoor unit Command value of LEV-A pulse of outdoor unit
LEV_B LEV-B pulse of outdoor unit Command value of LEV-B pulse of outdoor unit
ermination)
perature)
or units pulse.
(HIC temperature)
re
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
291
it 8
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
292
( PUMY-P36/48NKMU1)

ermination)
perature)
or units pulse.
(HIC temperature)
re
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
it 8
293
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
294
(PUHY - 200/250YM*)
Control mode Control mode for outdoor unit
Operation mode Operation mode for outdoor unit

F/ "Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control
ency for calculation"
Hz Compressor frequency Compressor frequency
AL Accumulator level "Liquid level in the accumulation ( 0 :Undercharge, 1: Adequate, 2
:Overcharge )"
FAN Fan "Fan capacity of outdoor unit (not proportional to rotational frequen
cy)"
SHB SC coil bypass exit Variable for control
Supper heat
accumulator
21S4 4-way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle
SV1 Solenoid valve output Returns oil from the oil separator
(Bypass between discharge Restricts the rise in the discharge pressure
(Capacity control full load)
(Capacity control unload)
SV4 Solenoid valve output Controls capacity and restricts the high pressure (Frequency contr
(Bypass between discharge ol backup)
Repeater Repeater output Prohibit(0)/Permit(1) the Communication with centralized control sy
stem
n.
(Detects saturated evaporatio equency and liquid level in the accumulator
n temperature)
TH3 Thermistor Detects the liquid level in the accumulator
(Detects lower liquid level in
the accumulator)
(Detects upper liquid level in
the accumulator)
(Detects the liquid pipe temp liquid level in heating mode, detects the sub-cool at the heat exc
erature) hanger exit in combination with 63 HS data, and controls LEV1.
(Detects the ambient air tem ncy liquid level in the accumulator, and the opening LEV pulse for
perature) oil return.
TH7(8) Thermistor (Controls SC) Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
6,7 and 8.
(Inverter radiator plate tempe
rature)
295
(PUHY - 200/250YMF)

F/ "Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control
ency for calculation"
AL Accumulator level "Liquid level in the accumulation ( 0: Undercharge, 1: Adequate,
2: Overcharge )"
FAN Fan "Fan capacity of outdoor unit (not proportional to rotational frequen
cy)"
SHB "SC coil bypass exit " Variable for control
Supper heat
accumulator
SV1 Solenoid valve output "Returns oil from the oil separator "
(Bypass between discharge Restricts the rise in the discharge pressure
stem
n.
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
TH7(8) Thermistor (Controls SC) Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
6,7 and 8.
rature)
296
(PU(H)Y-P200/250YMF-B,YMC)

F Compressor frequency Compressor frequency
AL Accumulator level Liquid level in the accumulation
( 0: A little, 1: Medium, 2: Much(overcharge) )
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
SHB SC coil bypass exit supper he Variable for control
at
TH8-TH2
Qj(C) Total capacity code (Cool) Cooling indoor unit capacity
Qj(H) Total capacity code (Heat) Heating indoor unit capacity
accumulator
oor unit in cooling mode
21S4 4 way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle
(Bypass between discharge pip
e and suction pipe)
(Bypass between discharge pip ol backup)
e and suction pipe)
stem
TH1 Thermistor Detects the discharge temperature for the high pressure protection
(Detects discharge temperatur
e)
(Detects saturated evaporation equency and liquid level in the accumulator
temperature)
(Detects lower liquid level in t
he accumulator)
(Detects upper liquid level in t
he accumulator)
(Detects the liquid pipe temper liquid level in heating mode, detects the sub-cool at the heat exc
ature) hanger exit in combination with 63 HS data, and controls LEV1
(Detects the ambient air tempe ncy liquid level in the accumulator, and the opening LEV pulse for
rature) oil return
TH7(8) Thermistor(Controls SC) Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
6,7 and 8
(Composition sensing)
TH10 Thermistor Detects the oil temperature
(Lower compressor shell)
THHS Thermistor Controls the inverter cooling fan based on the THHS temperature
(Inverter radiator plate tempera
ture)
mage by high pressure
position
A-OC Refrigerant composition(R32) Real percentage of R32
A-OC* Refrigerant composition(R32) Calculated percentage of R32
Tc Average of saturation gas tem For control of compressor frequency and fan speed
perature of high pressure and
saturation liquid temperature of
high pressure
Te Saturation temperature of low Same as TH2
297
pressure
298
(PU(H)Y-200/250YMF-B,YMC)

Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-TH2
accumulator
stem
re)
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
erature) hanger exit in combination with 63 HS data, and controls LEV1
perature) oil return
6,7 and 8
rature)
299
(PU(H)Y-200/250TM-(C))
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-TH2
accumulator
stem
re)
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
6,7 and 8
rature)
300
(PU(H)Y-400/500YBM)

ency for NO.1 COMP for cal
culation
ency for NO.2 COMP for cal
culation
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-TH2
accumulator
21S4a 4 way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle
Solenoid valve output (0:Cooling, 1:Heating)
(Bypass between discharge Returns oil from the oil separator
SV22 Solenoid valve output Switches the capacity control valve Inside the compressor
SV32 Solenoid valve output Switches the capacity control valve Inside the compressor
21S4b Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
(Capacity control of heat exc
hanger)
hanger)
SV6 Solenoid valve output Hot gas bypass
stem
TH11(TH12) Thermistor Detects the discharge temperature for the high pressure protection
re)
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
TH7(8,9) Thermistor(Controls SC) Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
7,8 and 9
301
rature)
302
(PU(H)Y-315YMC)

Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-TH2
accumulator
stem
re)
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
6,7 and 8
rature)
303
(PUHY-400/500YMF-B,YMC)

ency of NO.1 COMP for cal
culation
culation
AK1 Heat exchanger capacity Variable which determine the size of outdoor heat exchanger
(Variable capacity unit)
FAN1 Fan Fan capacity of outdoor unit(Fan on a variable capacity unit)
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
SHB SC coil bypass exit super Variable for control
heat TH8-TH2
(1:effective 0:ineffective)
SNOW Snow sensor Input run signal of outdoor unit fan(As compressor stopped)
accumulator
SV5b Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
hanger)
stem
Power Power source frequency
TH11(TH12) Thermistor Detects the discharge temperature for protection of compressor.
re)
n temperature)
the accumulator)
304
the accumulator)
(Detects the ambient air tem ncy, liquid level in the accumulator, and the opening LEV pulse fo
perature) r oil return.
TH7(8,9a) Thermistor Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
(Controls SC) 7,8 and 9a.
TH10a(10b) Thermistor Detects outlet temperature of heat exchanger in heating mode.
(Gas pipe temperature of he
at exchanger)
rature)
305
(PUHY-P400/500YMF-B,YMC)

F Temporary compressor frequen Variable for control

cy for calculation
F1 Temporary compressor frequen Variable for control
cy of NO.1 COMP for calculati
on
F2 Temporary compressor frequen Variable for control
cy of NO.2 COMP for calculati
on
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
SHB SC coil bypass exit super Variable for control
heat TH8-TH2
accumulator
(Bypass between discharge pip
e and suction pipe)
SV4 Solenoid valve output Controls capacity and restricts the high pressure(Frequency control
(Bypass between discharge pip backup)
e and suction pipe)
(Capacity control of heat exch
anger)
stem

(Detects discharge temperatur
e)
(Detects saturated evaporation equency and liquid level in the accumulator
temperature)
(Detects lower liquid level in t
he accumulator)
(Detects upper liquid level in t
306
he accumulator)
(Detects the liquid pipe temper liquid level in heating mode, detects the sub-cool at the heat exc
ature) hanger exit in combination with 63 HS data, and controls LEV1.
(Detects the ambient air tempe ncy, liquid level in the accumulator, and the opening LEV pulse fo
rature) r oil return.
TH9b Thermistor Senses the refrigerant composition based on TH2,TH9b and 63LS.
(Gas pipe temperature of heat
exchanger)
TH10c Thermistor Detects the oil temperature
(Inverter radiator plate tempera
ture)
position.
A-OC Refrigerant composition(R32)
Tc Average of saturation gas For control of compressor frequency and fan speed.
Temperature of high pressure
and saturation liquid temperatu
re of high pressure
Te Saturation temperature of low same as TH2.
pressure
307
(PU(H)Y-P200/250YMF-C)
Operation mode Operation mode for outdoor

unit
figure : %
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
SHB SC coil bypass exit supper
heat Variable for control
TH8-TH2
( 1:effective 0:ineffective )
( 1:effective 0:ineffective )
accumulator
hanger)
hanger)
stem
(Detects discharge temperatu n.
re)
n temperature)
6,7 and 8.
(Controls SC)
TH9 Thermistor Senses the refrigerant composition based on TH2, TH9 and 63LS.

rature)
308
position.
mp temperature of high pres
sure and saturation liquid te
w pressure
309
(PUHY-P400/500YMF-C)

culation
culation
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
SHB SC coil bypass exit super h Variable for control
eat
TH8-TH2
accumulator
(Bypass between discharge pipe and suction pipe)
(Bypass between discharge backup)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
stem

re)
310
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
TH7(8,9a) Thermistor(Controls SC) Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
7,8 and 9a.
TH9b Thermistor(Composition sensi Senses the refrigerant composition based on TH2,TH9b and 63LS.
ng)

at exchanger)
TH10c Thermistor Detects the oil temperature
rature)
position.
Te Saturation temperature of lo same as TH2.
w pressure
311
(PUHY-400/500YMF-C)

culation
culation
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
eat
TH8-TH2
accumulator
(Bypass between discharge backup)
hanger)
hanger)
stem
re)
n temperature)
312
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
at exchanger)
rature)
313
(PUD-P200/250YMF-C)

QjC Total capacity code (cool) Cooling indoor unit capacity
accumulator
TH1 Thermistor Detects discharge temperature for protection of compressor.
re)
TH2 Thermistor
TH5 Thermistor Controls defrosting (start/ end) in heating mode
erature)
perature)
(Controls SC) 6,7 and 8
TH9 Thermistor Detects the high pressure liquid temperature
TH10 Thermistor Detects lower compressor shell and then protects compressor.
THHS Thermistor Controls the Comp inverter cooling fan based on the THHS tempe
(Comp inverter radiator plate rature.
temperature)
position
w pressure
Tc-TH5

Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-Te
A_oc Refrigerant composition(R32) Real persentage of R32
A_oc* Refrigerant composition(R32) Calculated persentage of R32
314
315
(PU(H)Y-P200/250/315Y(R)EM-A)

Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
SHB SC coil bypass exit supper heat Variable for control
TH8-TH2

DEMAND2 Signal of capacity saving
Qj(H) Total capacity code (heat) Heating indoor unit capacity damage by high pressure.
"closing": at the time of usual. "open": at the time of actuation.
accumulator
(Bypass between discharge pipe
and suction pipe)
SV2 Solenoid valve output Discharge-suction bypass
(Bypass between discharge pipe
and suction pipe)
(Capacity control of heat exchan
ger)
(Capacity control of heat exchan
ger)
Repeater Repeater output Prohibit(0)/Permit(1) the communication with centralized control sys
tem
(Detects discharge temperature) n.
TH2 Thermistor Detects saturated temperature and then, controls the compressor f
(Detects saturated evaporation te requency and liquid level in the accumulator
mperature)
TH5 Thermistor Controls compressor frequency and defrosting and detects the liqu
(Detects the liquid pipe temperat id level in heating mode and the sub-cool at the heat exchanger
ure) exit in combination with 63 HS data, and controls LEV1.
(Detects the ambient air tempera ncy and liquid level in the accumulator.
ture)
(Inverter radiator plate temperatu
re)
316
position.
Tc Average of saturation gas tempe For control of compressor frequency and fan speed
rature of high pressure and satu
ration liquid temperature of high
pressure
Te Saturation temperature of low pr Same as TH2
essure
317
(PU(H)Y-P200/250/315YEM(*)-A)

Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-TH2
( ON : effective OFF : ineffective )
hanger)
hanger)
tem
re)
TH2 Thermistor Detects saturated temperature and then, controls the compressor f
(Detects saturated evaporatio requency and liquid level in the accumulator
n temperature)
TH5 Thermistor Controls compressor frequency and defrosting and detects the liqu
(Detects the liquid pipe temp id level in heating mode and the sub-cool at the heat exchanger
erature) exit in combination with 63 HS data, and controls LEV1.
perature)

rature)
position.
318
ture of high-pressure
w pressure
319
(PU(H)Y-200/250/315YEM(*)-A)

Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-TH2
tem
re)
TH5 Thermistor Controls compressor frequency, and defrosting and detects the liq
(Detects the liquid pipe temp uid level in heating mode and the sub-cool at the heat exchanger
erature) exit in combination with 63 HS data, and controls LEV1.
perature)
rature)
position.
320
(PUHY-P700/750/800YSGM-A)

ency of No.1 Comp for calc
ulation
ulation
FAN1 Fan Fan capacity of compressor unit
FAN2 Fan Fan capacity of heat exchanger unit
SV3 Solenoid valve output Protects compressor when compressor stops.
SV5c Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger (Liquid side).
tem
re)
re)
erature)
ncy and liquid level in the accumulator.
(Detects the ambient air tem
perature)
TH7(8) Thermistor Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH7
(Controls SC) and 8.
TH10 Thermistor Detects lower compressor shell and then protects compressor.
T5b Thermistor TH5b Controls defrosting (start/ end) in heating mode
(No.1 compressor).
THHS1 Thermistor Controls the Comp inverter1 cooling fan based on the THHS1 tem
(Comp inverter radiator plate perature.
temperature)
321
THHS2 Thermistor Controls the Comp inverter2 cooling fan based on the THHS2 tem
(Comp inverter radiator plate perature.
temperature)
emperature)
TS5 Thermistor THHS5 Controls the Fan inverter cooling fan based on the TS5 temperatu
(Fan inverter radiator plate t re.
emperature)
ge by low pressure.
w pressure
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-Te
Iu1 Phase-U current Phase-U current of inverter1
Iw1 Phase-W current Phase-W current of inverter1
Iu2 Phase-U current Phase-U current of inverter2
Iw2 Phase-W current Phase-W current of inverter2
322
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350YGM-A,PUHY-P400YGM-A,PUHY-P450/500/550/60
0/650YGM-A)


ulation

ulation



SV5 Solenoid valve output



SV3 Solenoid valve output Protects compressor when compressor stops.

tem
323
re)
re)

erature)
perature)

temperature)
emperature)
position.
w pressure
324
(PUHY-P450/500/550/600/650YMM-A , PUHY-P400/650YSM-A , PUHY-P45
0/500/550/600/650YCSM-A , PUHY-P600YCSS-A)
Primality Indicates whether the unit is primary or secondary.

ency for calculation (Total frequency : Foc+Fos)
Foc Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control
ency for calculation (Total frequency of OC unit)
Fos Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control
ency for calculation (Total frequency of OS unit)
ulation
ulation
Only for PUHY-PYMM-A and PUHY-PYSM-A type
SV5d Solenoid valve output Closes when outdoor unit stops.
tem
re)
re)
TH2 Thermistor Detects the temperature of the inlet to accumlator
(Detects the heat exchanger
exit temperature)
erature)
325
perature)
temperature)
emperature)
position.
w pressure
Tc-TH5

Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-Te
326
(PUHY-200/250/300/350/400/450/500YC-A)

ency of No.1 Comp for calc (only for 400 type or over)
ulation
F2 Temporary compressor Variable for control
frequency of No.2 Comp for (only for 400 type or over)
calculation
(only for 400 type or over)
(Bypass between discharge (only for 400 type or over)
tem
re)
(Detects discharge temperatu (only for 400 type or over)
re)
erature)
perature)
temperature)
emperature)
327
position.
w pressure
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-Te

328
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550/600/650/700YC-A)

ulation
ulation
tem
re)
re)
erature)
perature)
THHS1 Thermistor Controls the Comp inverter cooling fan based on
(Comp inverter radiator plate the THHS1 temperature.
temperature)
emperature)
329
position.
w pressure
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-Te

330
(PUHY-P300/350/400YCSM-A)

ning
tem
re)
erature)
perature)
cool down inverter)
temperature)
ge by low pressure.
w pressure
331
332
(PUHY-P450/500/550/600/650YMM(C)-A, PUHY-P400/650YSM(C)-A, PUHY-
P450/500/550/600/650YCSM-A, PUHY-P450/600YCSS-A)
Primality Indicates whether the unit is primary or secondary.

ency for calculation (Total frequency : Foc+Fos)
Foc Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control
ency for calculation (Total frequency of OC unit)
Fos Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control
ency for calculation (Total frequency of OS unit)
ulation
ulation
SV5d Solenoid valve output Closes when outdoor unit stops.
tem
re)
re)
erature)
(Detects the ambient air ncy and liquid level in the accumulator.
temperature)
333
temperature)
emperature)
position.
w pressure
Tc-TH5
Tc-TH7
heat
TH8-Te
334
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350THM-A, PUHY-P400/450THM-A)
ode

(only for P400 type or over, only T power)
Start-up unit Start-up unit
(Discharge temperature)
(ACC inlet pipe temperature)

(Liquid pipe temperature)
(Ambient air temperature)
temperature)
oling
eat
C)
335
ue
lue
336
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YHM-A, PUHY-EP200/250/300/350YHM-A,
PUHZ-RP250YHM-A)
21S4c 4-way valve Heat exchanger capacity switching
(only for EP250 and P350 type or over)
63HS2 Middle pressure sensor Middle pressure
("63HS2" has the model that doesn't display it either.)
oling
eat
ue
lue
SR Stop Forced stop by System rotati 1:Forced stop by the system rotation
on 0:Except above
SR Backup unit Backup unit address Backup unit address
The value is fixed to '0' except on the control unit.
SR Timer(Hr) System rotation timer(Hr) Total stop time of the system rotation [hh]
SR Units The number of indoor units The number of indoor units on the system rotation
on the system rotation The value is fixed to '0' except on the control unit.
Dehum Ctrl Dehumidification priority contr Dehumidification priority control mode
ol ( ON:Dehumidification control , OFF:usually control )
The value is fixed to '0' when the version of the software on the
outdoor units MAIN board is earlier than 10.15.
* According to the unit model, some items are not displayed.
337
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YHC-A)
ode
DEMAND=OFF, DEMAND2=ON: 75%
DEMAND=ON, DEMAND2=ON: 50%
DEMAND=ON, DEMAND2=OFF: 25%

(only for P350 type or over, only T power)
(Discharge temperature)
(ACC inlet pipe temperature)

(Ambient air temperature)
temperature)
63HS Pressure sensor High pressure
oling
eat
ue
338
lue
339
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YJM-A, PUHY-EP200/250/300YJM-A, PUH
Y-EP200/250/300YJMS-A, PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YJMT-A, PUHY-
EP200/250/300YJMT-A)
Ope Mode Operation mode Outdoor unit operation mode
ode

21S4c 4-way valve Heat exchanger capacity switching
(0:opening, 1:closing)
(0:opening, 1:closing)
52F Magnetic contactor(FAN) ON/OFF switch of No.2 FAN
(only for P450 and EP300 types)
("63HS2" is not displayed according to the unit model.)
oling
eat
340
ue
lue
SR Stop Forced stop by System rotati 1:Forced stop by the system rotation
on 0:Except above
SR Units The number of indoor units The number of indoor units on the system rotation
on the system rotation The value is fixed to '0' except on the control unit.
Dehum Ctrl Dehumidification priority contr Dehumidification priority control mode
ol
341
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YHA.TH, PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450
YHA.TH-T, PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YJC-A)
ode
LEV2 Linear expansion valve Pressure control, refrigerant flow rate control
63HS2 Pressure sensor Middle pressure
("63HS2" is not displayed according to the unit model.)
oling
eat
ue
lue
COMP for rotation purpose[hh.mm]
342
(PUHY-P300/350/400/450YRJC-A)
ode

TH4 Thermistor Discharge pipe temperature
TH7 Thermistor OA temperature
THHS Thermistor IPM temperature
oling
eat
ue
lue
343
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YKC-A, PUHY-P350/400/450YEKC-A, PU
HY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YPKC-A, PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/45
0/500YMKC-B, PUHY-P300/350/400/450YRKC-B, PUHY-P300/350/400/450Y
DKC-B)
ode
FAN (rpm) No.1 Fan FAN rotation speed[rpm]
(Only for PUHY-P350/400/450YEKC-A, PUHY-P500YPKC-A and P
UHY-P500YMKC-B)
UHY-P500YMKC-B)
FAN -FREE No.1 Fan output Outdoor unit fan output [%]
FAN2-FREE No.2 Fan output Outdoor unit fan output [%]
UHY-P500YMKC-B)
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
(Only for PUHY-P350/400/450YEKC-A, PUHY-P300/350/400/450YK
C-A, PUHY-P300/350/400/450/500YPKC-A, PUHY-300/350/400/450/
500YMKC-B, PUHY-350/400/450YDKC-B and PUHY-350/400/450Y
RKC-B)
(Only for PUHY-P350/400/450YEKC-A, PUHY-P300/350/400/450YK
C-A and PUHY-P300/350/400/450/500YPKC-A, PUHY-300/350/400/
450/500YMKC-B, PUHY-350/400/450YDKC-B and PUHY-350/400/4
50YRKC-B)
344
olin
eat
ue
lue
345
(PUHY-RP200/250TKM,PUHY-RP200/250YKM)
mode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)


LEV2 Linear expansion valve Pressure control, Refrigerant flow rate control
SV8 Solenoid value Refrigerant charging port for auto-charge
SV2 Solenoid value For opening/closing the the discharge suction bypass
TH6 Option Thermistor This can be measured any place. However, a option sensor is
necessary.
subcoolin
superheat
Idc COMP operation current (DC) Peak value [A]
value
value
Cln Timer(min) Cleaning mode timer (min) Remaining time of auto-cleaning (min)
AF Active filter Check the AF connection.
346
(0：Not connected to AF, 1：Connected to AF)
347
(PUV-P200/250/400/500YM-A)
ode
F All temporary frequencies All temporary frequencies (=Foc) [Hz]
IH IH bound power IH restricted electricity (0:Stop, 1:Operate)
QjC Total capacity code (cooling) Cooling indoor unit capacity
TH3 Thermistor Liquid pipe temperature
oling
eat
ue
lue
348
(PUCY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YKA.TH(-T))
ode
FAN (rpm) Fan output (Inverter address Outdoor unit fan output [rpm]
5)
FAN2(rpm) Fan output (Inverter address Outdoor unit fan output [rpm]
6) (Only for P500 type)
FAN -FREE Fan free run (Inverter addres Outdoor unit fan State
s 5)
FAN2-FREE Fan free run (Inverter addres Outdoor unit fan State
s 6) (Only for P500 type)


(Only for P500 type)
SV5b 2-way valve Heat exchanger capacity control
(Only for P500 type)
oling
eat
ue
lue
349
ode
5)
6) (Only for P500 type)
350
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YKA.TH(-U/-D),PUHY-P200/250/300/35
0/400/450/500TKA.TH, PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YKAT.TH)
ode
5)
6) (Only for PUHY-P500YKA.TH(-U/-D)/PUHY-P500TKA.TH/PUHY-P45
0/500YKAT.TH)
FAN -FREE Fan free run (Inverter addres Outdoor unit fan State
s 5)
FAN2-FREE Fan free run (Inverter addres Outdoor unit fan State
s 6) (Only for PUHY-P500YKA.TH(-U/-D)/PUHY-P500TKA.TH/PUHY-P45
0/500YKAT.TH)

QjH Total capacity code (heating) Heating indoor unit capacity
(Only for PUHY-P350/400/450/500YKA.TH(-U/-D)/ PUHY-P350/400/
450/500TKA.TH/ PUHY-P300/350/400/450/500YKAT.TH)
SV5b 2-way valve Heat exchanger capacity control
(Only for PUHY-P350/400/450/500YKA.TH(-U/-D)/ PUHY-P350/400/
450/500TKA.TH/ PUHY-P300/350/400/450/500YKAT.TH)
oling
351
eat
ue
lue
AF Active filter Check the AF connection.
(0：Not connected to AF, 1：Connected to AF)
(Do not connect YKA.TH/YKAT.TH unit to AF. May cause the AF
malfunction.)
352
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YNW-A, PUHY-EP200/250/300/350/40
0/450/500YNW-A)
mode
(Only for P350,EP350 type or over)
FAN (rpm) No.1 Fan speed FAN rotation speed[rpm]
FAN2(rpm) No.2 Fan speed FAN rotation speed[rpm]
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
LEV1 Linear expansion valve HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant
flow in HIC circuit
LEV2c Linear expansion valve Pressure control, Refrigerant flow rate control
LEV9 Linear expansion valve Heat exchanger for inverter
21S4c 4-way valve Cooling/Heating switching
(Only for P500,EP500 type)
SV10 Solenoid value For continuous heating
SV11 Solenoid value For continuous heating
SV14 Solenoid value For changing refrigerant flow
(cooling/heating)
(Only for EP200/250/300/350/400/450 type)
SV15 Solenoid value For changing refrigerant flow
(cooling/heating)
(Only for EP200/250/300/350/400/450 type)
353
THHS Thermistor IPM temperature(inverter compressor)
THHS(FAN1) Thermistor IPM temperature(fan inverter(No.1 Fan))
subcoolin
superheat
value
value
H-Def1 Continuous heating Heat exchanger1 defrost
Dehum Ctrl Dehumidification priority Dehumidification priority control mode
control (ON:Dehumidification control, OFF:usually control)
SR Stop Forced stop by System 1:Forced stop by the system rotation
rotation 0:Except above
SR Units The number of indoor units on The number of indoor units on the system rotation
the system rotation
(Dehum Ctrl, SR Stop, SR Backup unit, SR Timer(Hr) and SR Units are not displayed according to the unit model.)
354
(PUHY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450YKM-A, PUHZ-RP250YKM-A)
ode
FAN (rpm) Fan output (Adres 5) Outdoor unit fan output [rpm]
FAN2(rpm) Fan output (Adres 6) Outdoor unit fan output [rpm]
(Only for EP300 type or over)

(only for EP300 type or over)
olin
355
eat
C)
ue
lue
SR Stop :Forced stop by System rotat :1:Forced stop by the system rotation
ion 0:Except above
SR Backup unit :Backup unit address :Backup unit address
SR Timer(Hr) :System rotation timer(Hr) :Total stop time of the system rotation [hh]
SR Units :The number of indoor units :The number of indoor units on the system rotation
on
the system rotation
Dehum Ctrl :Dehumidification priority cont :Dehumidification priority control mode
rol
356
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YLKC-A, PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450
YMKC-A)
ode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
"(only for P350 type or over) (0:opening, 1: closing)"
olin
eat
ue
lue
357
(PUHY-P300/350/400/450YRKC-A, PUHY-P300/350/400/450YDKC-A)
ode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
"(only for P400 type or over) (0:opening, 1: closing)"
olin
eat
ue
lue
358
(PUHY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450/500YLM-A)
ode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
SV10 Solenoid value For opening/closing the defrost circuit
SV11 Solenoid value For opening/closing the defrost circuit
TH9 Thermistor Heat exchanger outlet pipe temperature
359
olin
eat
ue
lue
360
(PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YKB-A.TH, PUHY-P200/250/300/350/400/4
50/500YKB-A1.TH)
ode
FAN Fan output (Address 5) Outdoor unit fan output [%]
FAN2 Fan output (Address 6) Outdoor unit fan output [%]
FAN (rpm) Fan speed (Address 5) FAN rotation speed[rpm]
FAN2(rpm) Fan speed (Address 6) FAN rotation speed[rpm]
FAN -FREE Fan free run (Address 5) Outdoor unit fan State
FAN2-FREE Fan free run (Address 6) Outdoor unit fan State
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
(Only for P400 type or under)
361
oling
eat
ue
lue
362
(PQHY-P200/250YEM-A)

accumulator
ning
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
UNIT ON/OFF ON/OFF-output ON/OFF-monitor (TB8-1,2P)
stem
re)
n temperature)
TH6 Thermistor Detects the ambient temperature and then, controls the liquid level
(Detects the ambient air tem in the accumulator, and the opening LEV pulse for oil return.
perature)
TH7 Thermistor Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
TH8 Thermistor Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
THHS Thermistor Detects the inverter radiator plate temperature for protection of inv
(Inverter radiator plate tempe erter.
363
rature)
cool down inverter)
position.
w pressure
364
(PQHY-P200/250YGM-A, PQHY-P400/500YSGM-A)

ning
tem
re)
erature)
perature)
cool down inverter)
temperature)
ge by low pressure.
w pressure
365
366
(PUHY-HP200/250YHM-A)
Ope Mode Operation mode Outdoor unit operation mode
ode

oling
eat
C)
ue
lue
367
(PUHY-RP200/250/300/350YJM-A)
ode
DEMAND= ON, DEMAND2=OFF: 25%"
LEV1 Linear expansion valve HIC bypass, Controls refrigerant flow in HIC circuit.
SLEV Linear expansion valve Oil flow control
SV1b Solenoid valve For opening/closing the bypass circuit.
SV3 Solenoid valve Capacity control, Refrigerant phase control in auto-cleaning.
SV8 Solenoid valve Refrigerant charging port for auto-charge
oling
eat
ue
lue
368
(PURY-200/250YM*)
Running mode Running mode for outdoor unit

Capacity save Capacity save signal from host SC
Unit: % Non receiving status: 100%
F/ Low frequency Control variable
Hz Actual frequency Compressor operating frequency
AK Heater exchange capacity Control variable to determine the size of outdoor heat exchanger
AL Accumulator level Liquid level of accumulation
(0:Insufficient 1:Proper 2:Over filling)
(not in proportion to rotation frequency)
Demand Connecting point demand Compressor stop
(1: Input 0: No input)
SNOW Snow sensor Outdoor fan forced operation input
(only during compressor off)
Night Night mode Outdoor fan max. rotational frequency reducing input
Qj(C) Total capacity code (Cool) Cool only indoor unit capacity
Qj(H) Total capacity code (Heat) Heat pump indoor unit capacity
SLEV Oil return LEV opening Adjusts the amount of liquid refrigerant(oil) returned from the accu
mulator
21S4 4 way valve 4 way valve
(discharge-suction bypass) Restricts the rise in the discharge pressure
SV2 Solenoid valve output Switches the compressor unload/full load
(Capacity control-full load)
SV3 Solenoid valve output Switches the compressor unload/full load
(Capacity control-unload)
(Discharge-suction bypass) ol backup)
SV5 Solenoid valve output Restricts the rise in the discharge temperature and bypass circuit
(liquid bypass) at defrosting
SV6A Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
hanger)
hanger)
SV6C Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
hanger)
SV6D Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
hanger)
SC6E Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
hanger)
SV7 Solenoid valve output Bypass control of heat exchanger
(Heat exchanger bypass)
Repeater Repeater Permit(1)/Prohibit(0) the communication with central control system
re)
TH2 Thermistor Detects the low pressure saturation temperature then, detects liqui
(Detects saturated evaporatio d level in the accumulator and control the frequency
n temperature)
(Detects the lower liquid leve
l in the accumulator)
(Detects the upper liquid lev
el in the accumulator)
TH5 Thermistor Frequency control
e)
TH6 Thermistor Detects the temperature outside, controls the fan and the liquid le
(Detects the outside air temp vel heater, set the opening of oil return LEV.
369
erature)
63HS High pressure sensor Detects the high pressure for high pressure protection
rature)
THBOX Thermistor Determine the TRIAC failure at outdoor fan lock
370
(PURY-200/250YMF-B)

accumulator
SV3 Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger.
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
stem
re)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
erature)
erature)
rature)
63LS Low pressure sensor Detects the suction pressure and then, controls the frequency.
w pressure
371
(PURY-P200/250YMF-B)

accumulator
ol backup)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
stem
re)
(Detects saturated evaporatio equency and liquid level in the accumulator.
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
erature)
erature)

rature)
position.
372
w pressure
373
(PURY-200/250YMF-C)

accumulator
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
stem
re)
erature)
erature)
rature)
position.
mp temperature of high pres
sure and saturation liquid te
w pressure
374
(PURY-P200/250YMF-C)

culation
F2 Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control for calculation
ency of NO.2 COMP
SNOW Snow sensor Input run signal of outdoor unit fan (As compressor stopped)
∑Qj(C) Total capacity code (cool) Cooling indoor unit capacity
∑Qj(H) Total capacity code (heat) Heating indoor unit capacity
accumulator
21S4a/b 4-way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle
SV22 Solenoid valve output Switches the capacity control valve inside the compressor (only P
(Capacity control full load) 500 type)
(Capacity control unload) 500 type)
SV4a Solenoid valve output Controls capacity and restricts the high pressure (Frequency contr
ol backup)
SV6a Solenoid valve output Hot gas bypass
SV7/8 Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
stem
TH11 Thermistor Detects the discharge temperature for protection of No.1 compress
(Detects discharge temperatu or.
re)
re)
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
e)
375
rature)
position.
Te Saturation temperature of lo same as TH2.
w pressure
376
(PURY-P400/500YMF-C)

culation
F2 Temporary compressor frequ Variable for control for calculation
ency of NO.2 COMP
SNOW Snow sensor Input run signal of outdoor unit fan (As compressor stopped)
∑Qj(C) Total capacity code (cool) Cooling indoor unit capacity
∑Qj(H) Total capacity code (heat) Heating indoor unit capacity
accumulator
21S4a/b 4-way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle
(Capacity control full load) 500 type)
(Capacity control unload) 500 type)
SV4a Solenoid valve output Controls capacity and restricts the high pressure (Frequency contr
ol backup)
SV6a Solenoid valve output Hot gas bypass
SV7/8 Solenoid valve output Capacity control of heat exchanger
stem
re)
re)
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
e)
377
rature)
position.
Tc Average of saturation gas te

ture of high pressure :For co
ntrol of compressor frequenc
y and fan speed.
Te Saturation temperature of lo
w pressure :same as TH2.
378
(PURY-200/250YEM-A)

hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
stem
re)
erature)
perature)
erature)
rature)
position.
w pressure
379
(PURY-P200/250YEM-A)

hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
stem
re)
n temperature)
erature)
perature)
erature)
rature)
position.

380
w pressure
381
(PURY-80/100TMU)

Figure : % No signal : 100%
accumulator
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
stem
re)
erature)
erature)
rature)
position.
w pressure
382
(PURY-P200/250/300/350/400YGM-A,PURY-P450/500/550/600/650YGM-A)

ulation
ulation
tem
re)
re)
e)
perature)
temperature)
383
emperature)
ge by low pressure.
w pressure
384
(PURY-P200/250/300/350/400YHM-A, PURY-EP200/250/300/350YHM-A)
ode

SV5c Solenoid valve Heat exchanger-low pressure bypass
SV9 Solenoid valve For opening or closing the bypass circuit.
("63HS2" has the model that doesn't display it either.)
ue
lue
385
(PURY-P200/250/300/350/400/450YJM-A, PURY-EP200/250/300/350YJM-A,
PURY-P200/250/300/350/400YJMC-A)
ode

only for P350 and EP250 types or over
52F Magnetic contactor (FAN) ON/OFF switch of No.2 FAN
only for P450 and EP350 types
C)
ue
lue
386
or rotation purpose
387
(PURY-EP200/250/300/350/400/450YKM-A)
ode
FAN２(rpm) No.2 Fan FAN rotation speed[rpm]
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
"(Only for EP300 type or over)
(0:Cooling, 1:Heating)"
"(Only for EP300 type or over)
(0:opening, 1: closing)"
ue
388
lue
ode
389
(PURY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YLM-A, PURY-EP200/250/300/350/400
/450/500YLM-A, PURY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500YLM-A1, PURY-EP20
0/250/300/350/400/450/500YLM-A1)
ode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)


390
ue
lue
391
(PURY-P200/250/300/350/400/450/500/550YNW-A, PURY-EP200/250/300/35
0/400/450/500/550YNW-A)
mode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
LEV2d Linear expansion valve Pressure control, Refrigerant flow rate control
21S4c 4-way valve Cooling/Heating switching
("TH16" is not displayed according to the unit model)
CH21 Belt heater Belt heater 1(for heating the accumulator)
392
("CH21" is not displayed according to the unit model)
CH22 Belt heater Belt heater 2(for heating the accumulator)
("CH22" is not displayed according to the unit model)
("ALh" is not displayed according to the unit model)
value
value
393
(PURY-M200/250/300YNW-A, PURY-EM200/250/300YNW-A)
mode
(0:Stop, 1:Operate)
LEV2d Linear expansion valve Pressure control, Refrigerant flow rate control
value
value
394
(PQRY-P200/250YMF-B)

accumulator
ning
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
stem
re)
n temperature)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
perature)

rature)
cool down inverter)
395
position.
w pressure
396
(PQRY-P200/250YMF-C)

accumulator
ning
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
hanger)
stem
re)
n temperature)
perature)
rature)
cool down inverter)
position.
397
w pressure
398
(PQRY-P200/250YGM-A, PQRY-P400/500YSGM-A)

ning
tem
re)
(Detects the ambient airtemp ncy and liquid level in the accumulator.
erature)
cool down inverter)
temperature)
ge by low pressure.
w pressure
399
(PURY-RP200/250/300YJM-A)
Attribute OC/OS identification OC/OS identification
ode
SLEV Linear expansion valve Oil flow control

SV5b Solenoid valve For opening/closing the bypass circuit.
SV5c Solenoid valve Heat exchanger low pressure bypass
SV2 Solenoid valve Discharge/suction bypass
SV6 Solenoid valve Middle pressure control
SV8 Solenoid valve Refrigerant charging port for auto-charge
ue
lue
400
(PURY-WP200/250YJM-A)
ode

only for P350 and EP250 types or over
52F Magnetic contactor (FAN) ON/OFF switch of No.2 FAN
only for P450 and EP350 types
C)
ue
lue
COMP
401
(CMB-P104/108/1010/1013/1016V-G, CMB-P108/1010/1013/1016V-GA, CMB
-P104/108V-GB)
l (only standard BC and master BC)
(only standard BC and master BC)
(only master BC)
L3 LEV3 opening Liquid level control, differential pressure control, superheat of bypa
ss control
SVM(1) Solenoid valve output(SVM Refrigerant flow volume control
(1)) (only standard BC and master BC)
SVM2 Solenoid valve output(SVM2) Liquid level control, differential pressure control
(only master BC)
SV*a Solenoid valve output(SV*a) Surply refrigerant to the cool only indoor unit
SV*b Solenoid valve output(SV*b) Surply refrigerant to the heat pump indoor unit
SV*c Solenoid valve output(SV*c) For equally pressure control
T1 TH11 thermistor LEV control (Controls liquid level)
(Temperature at liquid entran (only standard BC and master BC)
ce
area)
(Temperature at bypass exit
area)
(Temperature at LEV3 exit a
rea)
T6 TH16 thermistor LEV control (Subcool)
(Temperature at LEV3 entran (only standard BC and master BC)
ce area)
SC1 SC11 Subcool at liquid entrance area
SC6 SC16 Subcool at LEV3 entrance area
SH2 SH12 Superheat at bypass exit area
P1 High pressure(63HS1) Detects the high pressure at the liquid side.
P3 Intermediate pressure(63HS3) Detects the intermediate pressure.
l
402
(CMB-P104/108/1010/1013/1016V-G/H(A/B), CMB-P104/106/108/1012/1016V
-J, CMB-P108/1012/1016V-JA, CMB-P1016V-KA, CMB-P104/108V-KB)
l
L1 Linear expansion valve LEV1 Liquid level control, differential pressure control
L2 Linear expansion valve LEV2 Liquid level control, differential pressure control
L3 Linear expansion valve LEV3 Liquid level control, differential pressure control, superheat of bypa
ss control
L4 Linear expansion valve LEV4 differential pressure control
SVM1 Solenoid valve Liquid level control, differential pressure control

SVM2 Solenoid valve Liquid level control, differential pressure control
SVM1b Solenoid valve Liquid level control, differential pressure control
SVM2b Solenoid valve Liquid level control, differential pressure control
SV*a Solenoid valve Surply refrigerant to the cool only indoor unit
SV*b Solenoid valve Surply refrigerant to the heat pump indoor unit
SV*c Solenoid valve For equally pressure control
T1 Thermistor TH11 Liquid inlet temperature
T2 Thermistor TH12 Bypass outlet temperature
T5 Thermistor TH15 Bypass inlet temperature
SC1 Liquid-side subcooling SC11 Inlet liquid refrigerant subcooling SC11
SC6 Intermediate subcooling SC1 Outlet liquid refrigerant subcooling SC16
6
SH2 Bypass outlet superheat SH1 Bypass outlet superheat SH12
2
P1 Pressure sensor PS1 High pressure
Saturation temperature is indicated at the same time.
P3 Pressure sensor PS3 Intermediate pressure
Saturation temperature is indicated at the same time.
403
(CMB-PW202V-J)
l
L1 Linear expansion value LEV1 Liquid level control, differential pressure control
L3 Linear expansion value LEV3 Liquid level control, differential pressure control, superheat of bypa
ss control
21S4a 4-way valve Cooling/Heating switching (0:Cooling,1:Heating)

SVM1 Solenoid valve Liquid level control, differential temperature control
T12 Thermistor TH12 Bypass outlet temperature
T15 Thermistor TH15 Bypass inlet temperature
SC4 Liquid-side subcooling SC14 Inlet liquid refrigerant subcooling SC14
SC6 Intermediate subcooling SC1 Outlet liquid refrigerant subcooling SC16
6
SH2 Bypass outlet superheat SH1 Bypass outlet superheat SH12
2
dTHM Differential temperature T1-T3 or Tc-T4
404
(PUMY)
Capacity save The signal of capacity save from master system controller.
unit:％ The signal is displayed "100%" under no signal.
SLEV LEV pulse It is controlled by the sub cool at outdoor heatexchanger exit in c
ooling mode.
It is opened fully in heating mode.
It is backup when the discharge temperature raises abnormality.(C
ooling, heating mode)
SN Sub cool steps Sub cool steps
Pdm Target high pressure Target high pressure
ETm Target evaporation temperatu Target evaporation temperature
re
Demand Contact demand input The compressor is stopped when the contact is closed.
(1:ON 0:OFF)
Night Night(silent)mode The compressor maximum frequency is down when the contact of
outdoor control board is ON
Contact input (1:ON 0:OFF)
Inner Comp inner thermostat The thermostat in the compressor is ON when the motor temperat
ure abnormal rises.
Input(1:ON 0:OFF)
IPM IPM abnormal input It is detected when the overcurrent flows to the IPM, or the IPM t
emperature abnormal rises.
(1:ON 0:OFF)
52C electromagnetic contactor 52C output On during indoor unit running
(inverter main circuit)
SV1 Solenoid valve output The bypass of discharge gas
Repeater Repeater output It is permission(1) / prohibition(2) of communication with the centr
alized controllers.
TH5 Thermistor It is used to control SLEV pulse in cooling mode.
It is used to start the defrost mode in heating mode.
(Pipe temperature・Defrost determination)
perature)
THHS Thermistor It detects the power transistor radiator plate temperature for protec
tion of power transistor.
(radiator plate temperature)
It is used to calculate the sub cool.
(Detects discharge pressure)
Power factor compressor power factor dat It detects the compressor power factor to control the optimum volt
a age.
SC1 Sub cool of indoor unit 1 Heating mode Sub cool
Cooling mode :Super heat

LEV1 LEV pulse of indoor unit 1 LEV pulse of indoor unit 1
405
LEV pulse control from the outdoor unit
Cooling mode: It controls the super heat of indoor unit heatexcha
nger exit
Heating mode: It controls the sub cool of indoor unit heatexchang
er exit
nger exit
er exit
nger exit
er exit
nger exit
er exit
nger exit
er exit
nger exit
er exit
nger exit
er exit
nger exit
er exit
406
(PUMY-P100/125/140YHM-A, PUMY-P100/125/140YHM-B, PUMY-P100/125/
140VHM-A)

Pdm Target high pressure Target high pressure(heating)
ETm Target evaporation temperatu Target evaporation temperature(cooling)
re
52C electromagnetic contactor 52C output
(inverter main circuit)
SV1(Pd) Solenoid valve output The bypass of discharge gas (for pd back up)
SV1(Td) Solenoid valve output The bypass of discharge gas(for td back up)
SV1(Stop) Solenoid valve output The bypass of discharge gas(for stop mode pressure equalization)
ermination)
perature)
SC1 Sub cool of indoor unit 1 Heating mode:Sub cool
SCm1 Target sub cool of indoor un Heating mode:Target sub cool
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
it 8
LEV1 LEV pulse of indoor unit 1 LEV pulse of indoor unit 1 LEV pulse control from the outdoor un
it
it
it
it
it
it
407
it
it
408
( PUMY-P125/140VHMBR3, PUMY-P125/140YHMBR3,
PUMY-P100/125/140YHMC-C, PUMY-SP100/125/140YHMC-SD,
PUMY-P100/125/140VHMC-S, PUMY-SP100/125/140VHMC-SR)
re
ermination)
perature)
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
it 8
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
409
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
410
(PUHZ-RP**HA)
[Selecting Info.]
action Operation ON/OFF Operation running of unit
mode Running mode Running mode of unit
TO Set temperature Temperature set by remote controller
capacity save Capacity save Capacity save signal from system controller

[Indoor Info.]
TH1 Thermistor(room temperature) Detects the room temperature, for deciding ON/OFF.
TH2 Thermistor Detects the liquid side temperature.

(liquid pipe temperature)
TH5 Thermistor Detects the gas side temperature.
(gas pipe temperature)

[Outdoor Info.]
COMP Ccmp. ON/OFF Ccmp. ON/OFF
(ON:running)
(ON:Heating)
SV Solenoid valve output Solenoid valve output
(ON:Action)
FAN Fan output step Fan output step
Hz Compressor frequency Compressor frequency
49C Inner thermostat (compresso Inner thermostat (compressor) actuation state
r) "closing": at the time of usual. "open": at the time of actuation.
63H High pressure sensor Detects the discharge pressure and then protects unit against da
63L Low pressure sensor Detects the suction pressure and then, senses the refrigerant com
position.
TH3 Thermistor Detects the liquid pipe temperature
TH4 Thermistor Detects discharge temperature
TH6 Thermistor Detects saturated evaporation temperature
TH7 Thermistor Detects the ambient air temperature
TH8 Thermistor Detects radiator plate temperature
SHd Discharge superheat
SH Superheat
SC Subcool
LEV A SC coil LEV opening Adjusts refrigerant in the bypass pipe from liquid pipe in the outd
LEV B LEV opening B
411
(PUMY-P100V/YHMBR4)

(not implemented)
(not implemented)
ermination)
perature)
(HIC temperature)
re
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
412
it 8
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
413
(PUMY-P125/140VHMSR1, PUMY-P125/140YHMSR1)

(not implemented)
(not implemented)
ermination)
perature)
(HIC temperature)
re
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
414
it 8
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
415
( PUMY-P112/125/140VKM, PUMY-P112/125/140VKM1,
PUMY-P112/125/140VKM2, PUMY-P112/125/140VKM3,
PUMY-P112/125/140VKM-A, PUMY-P112/125/140YKM,
PUMY-P112/125/140YKM1, PUMY-P112/125/140YKM2,
PUMY-P112/125/140YKM3, PUMY-P112/125/140YKME3,
PUMY-P112/125/140YKM-A, PUMY-P100/125/140NKM,
PUMY-CP100/112/125/140VKM.TH, PUMY-CP100/112/125/140YKM.TH)

ermination)
perature)
or units pulse.
(HIC temperature)
re
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
416
it 5
it 6
it 7
it 8
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
417
(PUMY-P200/250YKMC-C)

ermination)
perature)
or units pulse.
(HIC temperature)
re
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
it 8
418
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
419
( PUMY-P200YKM, PUMY-P200YKM1,
PUMY-P175/200/225YKM.TH, PUMY-P175/200/225YKM1.TH,
MXZ-8C200VAM-C)
ermination)
perature)
or units pulse.
(HIC temperature)
re
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
it 7
420
it 8
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
421
( MXZ-8C140/160VAMD-A, MXZ-8C112/140/160VAMZ-C,
MXZ-6C112NAM-C1, MXZ-8C140/160NAM-C1
MXY-4C100VA, MXY-5C125VA,
MXY-6C140VA)

ermination)
perature)
or units pulse.
(HIC temperature)
re
it 1
it 2
it 3
it 4
it 5
it 6
422
it 7
it 8
it 9
it 10
it 11
it 12
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
it
nit
nit
nit
nit
423
(PUHN-200/250YMF-B,YMC)

culation
(Constant capacity unit)
FAN2 Fan Fan capacity of outdoor unit(Fan on a constant capacity unit)
(not proportional to rotational
frequency)
eat
LEV2 Liquid pipe LEV opening Controls a flow of liquid refrigerant
SV4 Solenoid valve output Protection of over down low pressure(for evaporates refrigerant in
(Bypass between discharge an accumulator)
SV5b Solenoid valve output Controls a flow of liquid refrigerant
(Liquid pipe)
TH11 Thermistor Detects the discharge temperature for protection of compressor.
re)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
(Detects the ambient air tem in the accumulator.
perature)
TH7(8,9) Thermistor Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between
(Controls SC) TH6,7,8 and 9.
TH10a Thermistor Detects outlet temperature of heat exchanger in heating mode.
at exchanger)
TH10b Thermistor Detects temperature of balance pipe.
(balance pipe)
63LS Low pressure sensor Detects the suction pressure.
424
(PUHN-P200/250YMF-B,YMC)

culation
(Constant capacity unit）
AL Accumulator level Liquid level in the accumulation( 0: A little, 1: Medium, 2: Much(o
vercharge) )
FAN2 Fan Fan capacity of outdoor unit（Fan on a constant capacity unit）
eat
SV4 Solenoid valve output Protection of over down low pressure
(Bypass between discharge (for evaporates refrigerant in an accumulator)
(Liquid pipe)
re)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
perature)
TH7(8,9) Thermistor Controls LEV1 based on the temperature differences between TH
(Controls SC) 6,7,8 and 9.
at exchanger）
TH10b Thermistor Detects temperature of balance pipe.
(balance pipe)
position.
425
(PUHN-200/250YMF-C)

culation



eat
LEV SC coil LEV opening Adjusts refrigerant in the bypass pipe from liquid pipe in the outd

(Liquid pipe)

re)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
perature)
6,7,8 and 9.
at exchanger)
TH10b Thermistor(balance pipe) Detects temperature of balance pipe.
63LS Low pressure sensor Detects the suction pressure.
426
(PUHN-P200/250YMF-C)

culation



eat

(Liquid pipe)

re)
the accumulator)
the accumulator)
perature)
6,7,8 and 9.
at exchanger)
TH10b Thermistor(balance pipe) Detects temperature of balance pipe.
position.
427
(ECOV-EN75/110/150/185/225/260/300/335MVB, ECOV-EN75/110/150/185/2
25/260/300/335VB)
TH1 Discharge pipe temperature Discharge pipe temperature of the compressor
TH2 Compressor shell oil temperature Oil temperature of the compressor shell bottom
TH6 Outside air temperature Temperature of outside air
TH7 Suction pipe temperature Suction pipe temperature of the compressor
TH8 Liquid pipe temperature Temperature of the liquid pipe
HPS High-pressure Use for controlling compressor, fan and high-pressure protection.
LPS Low-pressure Use for controlling compressor, fan and low-pressure protection.
Idc Direct current(INV DC current) Peak value of the DCCT detection
Vdc Bus voltage(INV DC voltage) DC bus voltage
Tc Condensation temperature Condensation temperature of unit module.
(Converted high-pressure
Te Evaporation temperature Evaporation temperature of unit module.
(Converted low-pressure
THHS Inverter heatsink temperature Temperature of the heatsink.
For controlling the inverter cooling fan.
AL Liquid refrigerant flooding level Determine the liquid refrigerant flooding condition.
0：dry, 1：wet, 2：liquid refrigerant flooding
Qnow - For Japan market model
Qave - For Japan market model
Tave - For Japan market model
Tem1' - For Japan market model
Tem1Shift - For Japan market model
Tcm Target condensation Target condensation temperature of unit module.
temperature When unit correspondencing, It doesn't show because the controlling use
representative value.
Tem Target evaporation temperature Target evaporation temperature of unit module.
Delta-Tcm Target condensation Difference between the target condensation temperature and actual
temperature difference temperature(Tcm-Tc)
Delta-Tem Target evaporation temperature Difference between the target evaporation temperature and actual
difference temperature(Tem-Te)
L.Cut off Low-pressure cutoff compressor Low-pressure cutoff compressor OFF-threshold Unit:Mpa
OFF-threshold
L.Cut on Low-pressure cutoff compressor Low-pressure cutoff compressor ON-threshold Unit:Mpa
ON-threshold
lead-in speed Compressor suction speed Rate of the low-pressure change of compressor Unit:Mpa/10s
Discharge-SH Compressor discharge superheat Discharge superheat of the compressor（TH1-Tc）
Esc Instantaneous value of the -
subcool coil temperature
efficiency
EscA Average value of the subcool coil -
temperature efficiency
S-TH6 Representative outside air Representative outside air temperature of the overall unit
temperature
S-HPS Representative high-pressure Representative high-pressure of the overall unit
Unit:Mpa
S-LPS Representative low-pressure Representative low-pressure of the overall unit
Unit:Mpa
S-Coff Overall Low-pressure cut-off Representative low-pressure cutoff compressor OFF-threshold of the
value overall unit
Unit:Mpa
S-Con Overall Low-pressure cut-on Representative low-pressure cutoff compressor ON-threshold of the
value overall unit
Unit:Mpa
S-Tc Representative condensation Representative value of the actual condensation temperature of the overall
temperature unit
S-Te Representative evaporation Representative value of the actual evaporation temperature of the overall
428
temperature unit
S-Tcm Representative target Representative value of the setting condensation temperature of the overall
condensation temperature unit
S-Tem Representative target Representative value of the setting evaporation temperature of the overall
evaporation temperature unit
S-Delta-Tcm Representative target S-Tcm - S-Tc
condensation temperature
difference
S-Delta-Tem Representative target S-Tem - S-Te
evaporation temperature
difference
S-Esc Representative instantaneous Minimum value of the instantaneous value of the subcool coil temperature
value of the subcool coil efficiency of the overall unit
temperature efficiency
S-EscA Representative average value of Minimum value of the average value of the subcool coil temperature
the subcool coil temperature efficiency of the overall unit
efficiency
Rst Alarm reset input(X2) Error alarm reset input.
ShiftM - For Japan market model
63H 63H Show the high-pressure switch status.
1：ON, 0：OFF
63L 63L Show the low-pressure switch (field-supplied) status.
1：ON, 0：OFF
X31 Operation input（X31) Show the contact input status of the auxiliary relay <X31>.
1：ON, 0：OFF
SW2 Unit module operation SW Show the contact input status of the unit module operation switch.
(SW21, SW2, SW23) 1：ON, 0：OFF
SW4 Operation at fixed compressor Show the contact input status of the switch <Normal-Fixed frequency>.
frequency SW(SW4) 1：ON(Fixed frequency), 0：OFF(Normal)
X1 Operation SW(X11) Show the contact input status of the operation switch (auxiliary relay
<X11>).
1：ON, 0：OFF
CN63 CN63PW input -
TYP1 TYPE1 -
TYP2 TYPE2 -
TYP4 TYPE4 -
TYP5 TYPE5 -
TYP6 TYPE6 -
Iu Compressor U-phase current Inverter output current value(U-phase)
value
Iw Compressor W-phase current Inverter output current value(W-phase)
value
Vunb Limit of unbalance of power Show the state of the unbalance limiting control of power supply voltage.
supply voltage (1：Under control、0：Nomal)
FAN-Ver Fan inverter S/W version Software version of the fan inverter
Ctrl mode Control mode Outdoor unit control mode
Ope mode Operation mode Outdoor unit operation mode
Fm Target frequency of the Target frequency of the compressor.
(Hz)
FAN(AK%) Heat exchanger capacity （ Fan Variable of the motor rotation speed of the condenser fan (%)
output）
Rpter Repeater Permit(1) /Prohibit (0) the communication with the centralized control
system.
M-Supply M-net ｐower supply Power supply to the indoor unit system. (M-net power supply)
f0 Current operating frequency of Current operating frequency of the compressor
the compressor (Hz)
S-Fm(Hz) Target frequency of the Target frequency of the compressor of overall unit.
compressor （overall value）(Hz)
（only OC）
X101 Auxiliary relay<X101> status Used for the bypass solenoid valve output（the primary-side power-supply
voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
X102 Auxiliary relay<X102> status For Japan market model
X103 Auxiliary relay<X103> status Used for the crankcase heater output （ the primary-side power-supply
voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
X104 Auxiliary relay<X104> status Used for the solenoid valve <injection> output （ the primary-side
429
1：ON, 0：OFF
X105 Auxiliary relay<X105> status Used for the high/low pressure bypass solenoid valve output （ the
1：ON, 0：OFF
X106 Auxiliary relay<X106> status The solenoid valve <oil return> output （21Q1～3）（the primary-side
1：ON, 0：OFF
X107 Auxiliary relay<X107> status Used for the output of the operating status of the compressor（auxiliary
relay<X61> drive）（the primary-side power-supply voltage）. 1：ON, 0：OFF
X108 Auxiliary relay<X108> status Used for 52F output （the primary-side power-supply voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
X111 Auxiliary relay<X111> status Used for the unit operation signal output（auxiliary relay<X4>drive）（the
1：ON, 0：OFF
X112 Auxiliary relay<X112> status Used for the error alarm signal output （ auxiliary relay<X5>drive ）（ the
1：ON, 0：OFF
X172 Auxiliary relay<X172> status Used for the 72C drive source output （the primary-side power-supply
voltage）.
1：ON, 0：OFF
72C Output of 72C for export Used for the 72C drive source output（DC12V power-supply）. 1：ON, 0：OFF
Err Error output -
COMP Compressor ON/OFF output -
LEV LEV output value LEV output value of the linear expansion valve<injection>.
0～480 pulse
SW1～4 DipSW1～4 input Show the DipSW status.
1：ON, 0：OFF
Hc1 - For Japan market model
Hc2 - For Japan market model
Hc3 For Japan market model
430
(LMAP02/03/04)
nviOnOff_n input binding Binding information of an operation input
(0:No binding 1:Binding)
nvoOnOff_n output binding Binding information of an operation output
(0:No binding 1:Binding)
IC CONNECT IC connection information State of connected indoor system
(0:Nothing 1:Connected)
SW1-1~10 SW1 setting value Standard function setting
(0:OFF setting 1:ON setting)
SW2-1~6 SW2 setting value Service function setting
SW3-1~6 SW3 setting value Special function 1 setting
SW4~8 SW4~8 setting value Special function 2 setting
SWU1~2 SWU1~2 setting value Address of Air-conditioner
(SWU1:1 position SWU2:10 position)
FLAG Control flag State of control flag
(0:Set 1:Reset)
(M:M-NET flag LON:LON flag)
ERROR Error flag State of error flag
(0:Normal 1:Abnormality)
(M:M-NET flag LON:LON flag)
PWR.FLR Detection of power failure Input of power failure detection
(0:Normal 1:power failure)
NCRESET Detection of NC's reset Input of NC reset
(0:Normal 1:Reset)
UPLINK Detection of the uplink Input of uplink
(0:Normal 1:Detection)
CN02-2~3 Function state detection Input of detection
(0:Normal 1:Detection)
Rcv St Vl Received input data LON receiving information on operation
(St :State Vl :Value)
Snd St Vl Transmitted output data LON transmitted information on an operation state
(St :State Vl :Value)
StartHrtBt nci information Start time of automatic update(second unit)
StartOutTm nci information Start time when output changes(second unit)
AnalogWidth nci information Analog change width(ｰ C unit)
MinOutTm nci information Minimum transmitting secured time(second unit)
SndHrtBt_1 nci information Send heartbeat No.1(second unit)
InitStartTm nci information Initial output start time(second unit)
InitOutTm_1 nci information Transmitting secured time No.1(second unit)
InitOutTm_2 nci information Transmitting secured time No.2(second unit)
RevHrtBT_1 nci information Receiving heartbeat setting No.1(second unit)
RevHrtBT_2 nci information Receiving heartbeat setting No.2(second unit)
PollFetch nci information Pole fetch setting(HEX value)
Time_1 nci information Time No.1(second unit)
Time_2 nci information Time No.2(second unit)
Set_1 nci information Setting No.1(HEX value)
Set_2 nci information Setting No.2(HEX value)
Dual set point mode Set point mode information Set point mode of connected indoor system
(0*:single set point mode 1:dual set point mode)
* including disconnected indoor system
431
(IC)
Qj Capacity code Capacity Code - Model Number List
Model UL-Model number Capacity Non UL-Mo
Current UL-Model Number
Code del Number
P06
3 P15 (In case of PEFY-P06NMSU-E onl
y)
P06
4 P20 (P08 in case of PEFY-P08NMSU-
E)
5 P25 P08
6 P32 P12
8 P40 P15
10 P50 P18
13 P63 P24
14 P71 P27
16 P80 P30
20 P100 P36
25 P125 P48
28 P140 P54
40 P200 P72
50 P250 P96
*"6" of UL-Model code shows in the monitor screen in case of PE

FY-P08NMSU-E.
TH1 Thermistor(room temperature) Detects the room temperature, for deciding ON/OFF.
When operating fresh air intake type, supply air temperature is ind
icated.
TH2 Thermistor Detects the liquid side temperature of indoor unit for frost preventi
(liquid pipe temperature) on and SH/SC control.
TH3 Thermistor Detects the gas side temperature of indoor unit for control sensor
(gas pipe temperature) error and SH control.
TH4 Thermistor When operating fresh master individually, attribute become IC.
(Return air temperature) When monitoring IC besides fresh master, TH1 temperature is indi
cated.
When operating fresh air intake type, outdoor air temperature is in
dicated.
SH/SC Superheat / Subcool In heating mode : Subcool / In cooling mode : Super heat
L I LEV opening pulse Indoor unit LEV opening pulse.
TO Set temperature Temperature set by remote controller
Save Capacity save Capacity save signal from system controller
(Smaller more become depression become greater)
ON/OFF Operation ON/OFF Operation running of indoor unit
Mode Running mode Running mode of indoor unit
Status Operating condition Operation status of indoor unit
Dam. Damper output Damper out put for deciding permission / prohibition of taking in fl
esh air when ventilation unit will be connected to the duct.
IC.S Operation control of the outd Operation signal of transmitting from indoor unit to outdoor unit.
oor unit
HA Humidity Relative humidity of indoor unit
Fan Fan Speed Indoor unit fan speed(Stop/Silent/Lo/Mid2/Mid1/Hi)
・Refer to “Operation Status Monitor Terminology(M-series)” for monitor display when M-series is connected
with USB/Serial conversion cable.
432
(DOAS)
TH1 Thermistor(supply air temper Detects the supply air temperature.
ature)
TO Set temperature Set value of supply air temperature.
ON/OFF Operation ON/OFF Operation running of DOAS
Mode Running mode Running mode of DOAS
Status Operating condition Operation status of DOAS
IC.S Operation control Operation signal
433
(FU : Fresh Master)
Qj Capacity code Capacity Code - Model Number List
Capacity Model Num
Code ber
6 P500
10 P800
13 P1000
TH1 Thermistor(outside temperatur
e):Detects intake temperature
TH2 Thermistor Detects liquid pipe temperature
TH3 Thermistor Detects gas pipe temperature
(Gas pipe temperature)
TH4 Thermistor(Room temperatur Detects intake temperature
e)
SH/SC Super heat/ Sub cool In heating mode: Subcool/ In cooling mode :Superheat
Li LEV opening pulse LEV opening pulse.
TO Target temperature In heating mode--- Set point of Dip-SW3,4,5
In cooling mode--- Average target temperature of connected IC
Other---- No meaning(IC mode whichever connected Target temper
ature )
Save Capacity save signal from system controller
Unit: % Non-receiving status: 100%
Mode Operation mode Operation mode
Status Running mode Running mode
Dam. Damper status Damper position (Lossnay/Bypass)
Sign Operation control of indoor u Operation status of indoor unit
nit
434
(LC:Lossnay)
G_No Group Number Group Number
Group number is the number given by Centralized Controller.
Lossnays which have the same group number are in the same gr
oup.
OA temp. Thermistor(outdoor air tempe Detects outdoor air temperature
rature)
RA temp. Thermistor(Room air tempera Detects room air temperature
ture)
SA temp. Thermistor(Supply air temper Detects supply air temperature
ature)
OA Humidity OA humidtty Detects outdoor air relative humidity
CO2 concentration CO2 concentoration Detects CO2 concentration(ppm)
SA Setting(IU) SA fan speed ordered from SA fan speed ordered from interlocked IC and AHU (Stopping/Low
interlocked IC (Extra Low)/Hi(Extra Hi))
To define fan speed [m3/h]
EA Setting(IU) EA fan speed ordered from EA fan speed ordered from interlocked IC and AHU (Stopping/Low
interlocked IC (Extra Low)/Hi(Extra Hi))
To define fan speed [m3/h]
SA Setting(RC) SA fan speed ordered from SA fan speed ordered from RC
RC (Stopping/Low (Extra Low)/Hi(Extra Hi)/Auto)
EA Setting(RC) EA fan speed ordered from EA fan speed ordered from RC
RC (Stopping/Low (Extra Low)/Hi(Extra Hi)/Auto)
SA Operation Supply fan status Supply fan status
(Stopping/Extra Low/Low/Hi/Extra Hi)
EA Operation Exhaust fan status Exhaust fan status
(Stopping/Extra Low/Low/Hi/Extra Hi)
TO Target temperature Average target temperature of connected IC when ventilation mod
e is automatic mode
O/F Operation ON/OFF Operating status (Stopping/Operating/Interlocked operation/Delayed
operatin/Error)
Ventilation mode 1 Vetnilation mode 1 Ventilation mode 1
(Ordinaly/Night purge/24hr operation)
Ventilation mode 2 Ventilation mode 2 Mode Meaning
Ordinary Ordinary operating
Intermittent stopping SA fan is stopping to avoid condensat
ion in Lossnay cores
Stopping under defr SA fan stopping because connected I
osting operation C is defrosting operation
Stopping because all device OFF sign
All device OFF
al is given by SC
Power air supply/ex
Power air supply/exhaust operating
haust
Night purge Night purge operating
Anti-freezing operati SA fan is stopping for anti-freezing in
on Lossnay cores
Delayed operating (Maximum 30 minut
Delayed operation
es)
Drying humidifire SA fan is operating to dry humidifires
Humidifiring prepara SA fan is stopping to fill humidifires w
tion ith water
High humidity inter SA fan is stopping to avoid condensat
mittent operation ein in Lossnay cores
Heater cool dowm Heater cool down operation
Ordinary Ordinary operating
Intermittent stopping SA fan is stopping to avoid condensat
ion in Lossnay cores
Stopping under defr SA fan stopping because connected I
osting operation C is defrosting operation
Humidifying Humidifier ordered Humidifier ordered from RC(ON/OFF/Auto)
Humidifier valve Humidifier status Operation of Solenoid Valve (ON/OFF)
Ventilation Damper ordered Damper ordered from RC(Lossnay/Bypass/Auro)
Damper Damper status Damper status (Lossnay/Bypass)
SW002 Setting of dip-switch 2 Setting of dip-switch 2
(Refer to Lossnay Technical Manual and Installation Instruction for
more information)
more information)
435
more information)
more information)
Monitor Output Monitor output of TM3 Monitor outoput status for TM3-7,8,9 (ON-1,OFF-0)
Actual RPM SA1 Actual RPM SA1 Actual RPM SA1 (DC Motor only)
Motor PWM SA1 Motor PWM SA1 Motor PWM SA1 (DC Motor only)
Actual RPM EA1 Actual RPM EA1 Actual RPM EA1 (DC Motor only)
Motor PWM EA1 Motor PWM EA1 Motor PWM EA1 (DC Motor only)
Actual RPM SA2 Actual RPM SA2 Actual RPM SA2 (DC Motor only)
Motor PWM SA2 Motor PWM SA2 Motor PWM SA2 (DC Motor only)
Actual RPM EA2 Actual RPM EA2 Actual RPM EA2 (DC Motor only)
Motor PWM EA2 Motor PWM EA2 Motor PWM EA2 (DC Motor only)
436
(PWFY-P100/200VM-E-AU, PWFY-P100/140/200VM-E1-AU, PWFY-P100/14
0/200VM-E2-AU, PWFY-EP100VM-E1-AU, PWFY-EP100VM-E2-AU, PWFY-
P36/72NMU-E-AU)
Ctrl Mode Control Mode Water HEX Unit control mode
Ope Mode Operation Mode Water HEX Unit operation mode
O/F Operation ON/OFF Operation running of Water HEX Unit
I/O water temp.sensor position water inlet temperature / water outlet temperature
AU S Operation control of the outd Operation signal of transmitting from Water HEX Unit to outdoor u
oor unit nit.
State Operating condition Operation status of Water HEX Unit
SV1 Solenoid valve Bypass between gas pipe and liquid pipe
DEMAND Control point demand Input stop signal of compressor.
LEV1W LEV1W opening pulse Water Hex Unit LEV1W opening pulse.
TH22 Thermistor Detects the liquid side temperature of Water HEX Unit for frost pr
evention and SH/SC control.
TH23 Thermistor Detects the gas side temperature of Water HEX Unit for control s
ensor error and SH control.
TH6 Thermistor water inlet temperature
TH8 Thermistor water outlet temperature
To Set temperature Temperature set by remote controller
SC Subcool Subcool
SH Superheat Superheat
437
(PWFY-P100VM-E-BU, PWFY-P36NMU-E-BU)
Ctrl Mode Control Mode Booster Unit control mode
Ope Mode Operation Mode Booster Unit operation mode
O/F Operation ON/OFF Operation running of Booster Unit
I/O water temp.sensor position water inlet temperature / water outlet temperature
BU S Operation control of the outd Operation signal of transmitting from Booster Unit to outdoor unit.
oor Unit
State Operating condition Operation status of Booster Unit
DEMAND Control point demand Input stop signal of compressor.
LEV1W LEV1W opening pulse Booster Unit LEV1W opening pulse.

LEV2W LEV2W opening pulse Booster Unit LEV2W opening pulse.
TH22 Thermistor Detects the liquid side temperature of Booster Unit for frost preve
ntion and SH/SC control.
TH13 Thermistor evaporator outlet temperature
TH6 Thermistor water inlet temperature
TH8 Thermistor water outlet temperature
63HSW Pressure sensor High pressure
63LSW Pressure sensor Low pressure
To Set temperature Temperature set by remote controller
Iu current effective value current effective value [A]
438
(CAHV-P500YA-HPB,CAHV-P500YB-HPB)
Operation Operation input source
Snow RC→Remote control , SW→Switch
Input
On/Off Level ON→Run , OFF→Stop
Water temp Ctrl IN→Inlet water temperature emperature control
OUT→Outlet water temperature based control
Main Water temp Ctrl ON→Built-in sensor on the unit
OFF→External water temperature sensor
Fan Mode ON→Coercion , OFF→Ordinary
Hot Water ON→Hot water , OFF→Heating
Heating Eco ON→Heating Eco , OFF→Heating
Anti Freeze ON→Anti Freeze , OFF→Off
COP/Capacity ON→COP Priority , OFF→Capacity Priority
Multi Ctrl ON→Multiple Ctrl , OFF→Individual control
Temp setting ON→Effective , OFF→Invalid

On/Off setting ON→Enable schedule setting
OFF→Disable schedule setting
Status
On/Off Ctrl Run/Stop
Fan Mode ON→Coercion , OFF→Ordinary
Mode Heating/Heating Eco/Hot Water/Anti Freeze
Defrost Mode Other/Wait/Limit/On

Demand ON→Control demand
Schedule ON→Control schedule
Restart Lim ON→Control restart
Remain（min） Restart (minute)
Pre err（cnt） Error count
Err code Error content（M-NET code）

line Refrigerant line 1,2,3
Total（hr） Total hour

439
63H1 High pressure switch
HP1 Pressure sensor High pressure senser

LP1 Pressure sensor Low pressure senser
Iu Phase-U current of compressor [A]
Iw Phase-W current of compressor [A]
Idc DC trunk line current [A]
Vdc COMP bus voltage [V]
Ts Target water temperature

Twi Current inlet water temperature
Two Current outlet water temperature

4/20IN1 4-20mA1 External analog input for Target water temp (4-20mA)
4/20IN2 4-20mA2 External analog input for Outdoor temp (4-20mA2)
0-10IN 0-10V/2-10V External analog input for Target water temp (0-10V)
1-5IN 1-5V External analog input for Target water temp (1-5V)
0-10out
LEV1 LEV1 pulse
LEV2 LEV2 pulse at HIC circuit

COMP1 oparating frequency in main circuit
COMP2 oparating frequency in sub circuit

FAN Outdoor unit fan output [%]
SHs Target superheat value at the suction pipe to compressor
SH difference from suction gas temp to saturated gas temp
Dtime Defrosting time ban

Dtemp Defrost start temperature
THc10 Water Inlet temperature compensation TH10
THc11 Water Outlet temperature compensation TH11
THc12 Water Inlet temperature compensation TH12

THc13 Water Outlet temperature compensation TH13
THc14 Representative water temperature compensation TH14
THc15 Representative water temperature compensation TH15
Schedule
Time Current Time
Demand Peak-demand control Start time - End time
On/Off1 Scheduled operation 1 Operation start time 1 - Operation end time 1
Temp chg Temperature change Time 1 , Time 2
Set temp Water temp. setting A,B,C
Thr-diff Thermo differential 1,2

Main water temp Control Sensor select(at Tar TH14 or TH15 temperature which is selected
get Setting temp)
Main water temp（2） Control Sensor select(at Tar TH14 or TH15 temperature which is selected
get Setting temp)
Main water temp（3） Control Sensor select(at Tar TH14 or TH15 temperature which is selected
get Setting temp)
L-noise（％） Capacity low noise（％）
440
Demand（％） Maximum capacity demand（％）
441
(CRHV-P600YA-HPB)
Input
Water temp Ctrl - IN→Inlet water temperature emperature control
Main Water temp Ctrl - ON→Built-in sensor on the unit
OFF→External water temperature sensor
Multi Ctrl - ON→Multiple Ctrl , OFF→Individual control
Temp setting - ON→Effective , OFF→Invalid
On/Off setting - ON→Enable schedule setting
Status
On/Off Ctrl - Run/Stop
Demand - ON→Control demand
Restart Lim - ON→Control restart
Remain（min） - Restart (minute)
Pre err（cnt） - Error count
Err code - Error content（M-NET code）
Total（hr） - Total hour
Mode - Heating/Heating Eco/Hot Water/Anti Freeze
Schedule - ON→Control schedule
Schedule
Time - Current Time
Thr-diff1 - Thermo differential 1
Demand（max%） - Maximum capacity demand [%]
Temp chg1 - Temperature change1
Temp chg2 - Temperature change2
Setting temp1 - Water temp. setting A
Setting temp2 - Water temp. setting B
Setting temp3 - Water temp. setting C
Main water temp1 Control Sensor select(at Tar TH15 or TH16 temperature which is selected
get Setting temp)
get Setting temp)
get Setting temp)
Input(CN142)
A1 RUN Run/Stop
A3 Mode Change2 Heating Eco/Heating
B3 Pump Interlock Normal/Error
C3 - -
C4 Demand ON/OFF
C5 Anti Freeze ON/OFF
C6 Capacity Capacity priority / Cop priority
D3 - -
D4 Mode Change1 Hot water/Heating
D6 Flow Switch Normal/Error
442
Output
X01 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Solenoid valve(Main injection ciruit)
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=Solenoid valve(Injection ciruit)
X02 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)
X03 MAIN BOX= MAIN BOX=Cooling Fan 1-1
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=Cooling Fan 2-1
X04 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Pump operation command output (Hot water)
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=-
X05 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Pump operation command output (Heat source)
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=Cooling Fan 2-2
X06 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Error display output
SUB BOX=- SUB BOX=-
X07 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Operation display output
SUB BOX=- SUB BOX=-
X08 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Emergency signal A(for extra heater)
SUB BOX=- SUB BOX=-
X09 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Three way valve
SUB BOX=- SUB BOX=-
12Voutput
72C - -
52C - Electromagnetic relay(Inverter main circuit)
Unit condition Unit1 to Unit16

TH1 Thermistor Discharge Ref temp．1
TH2 Thermistor Suction Ref temp．1
TH3 Thermistor Shell Ref temp．1
TH4 Thermistor Heat exchanger wall temp．1
TH5 Thermistor Discharge Ref temp．2
TH6 Thermistor Suction Ref temp．2
TH7 Thermistor Shell Ref temp．2
TH8 Thermistor Heat exchanger wall temp．2
TH9 Thermistor Outdoor temp．1
TH12 Thermistor Water outlet temp．1
TH13 Thermistor Heat source inlet temp．1
TH14 Thermistor Heat source outlet temp．1
TH15 Thermistor External Water sensor．1
TH16 Thermistor External Water sensor．2
TH17 Thermistor Hot Water inlet temp．2
TH18 Thermistor Hot Water outlet temp．2
TH20 Thermistor Heat source inlet temp．2
THc11 - Hot Water Inlet temperature compensation 1 TH11
THc12 - Hot Water Outlet temperature compensation 1 TH12
THc15 - Representative water temperature compensation TH15
THc16 - Representative water temperature compensation TH16
THc17 - Hot Water Inlet temperature compensation 2 TH17
THc18 - Hot Water Outlet temperature compensation 2 TH18
63H1 - High pressure switch
Twi - Current inlet hot water temperature
Two - Current outlet hot water temperature
SHt - -
SHb - -
443
LEV2 - -
LEV3 - Electronic expansion valve(Main/Sub injection circuit)
COMP2(Hz) - Operating frequency in sub circuit [Hz]
4-20mA2 - External analog input for Outdoor temp (4-20mA2)
444
(EACV-P900YA,EAHV-P900YA,EAHV-P900YA-H)
Input
Water temp Ctrl - IN→Inlet water temperature emperature control
Main Water temp Ctrl - ON→External water temperature sensor
OFF→Built-in sensor on the unit
Multi Ctrl - ON→Multiple Ctrl , OFF→Individual control
Temp setting - ON→Effective , OFF→Invalid
On/Off setting - ON→Enable schedule setting
Status
On/Off Ctrl - Run/Stop
Fan Mode - ON→Control fan
Defrost Mode - Other/Wait/Limit/On
Demand - ON→Control demand
Restart Lim - ON→Control restart
Remain（min） - Restart (minute)
Pre err（cnt） - Error count
Err code - Error content（M-NET code）
Detail - Detail error code
Total（hr） - Total hour
Mode - Heating/Heating Eco/Cooling/Anti Freeze
Schedule - ON→Control schedule
Schedule
Time - Current Time
Demand（max%） - Maximum capacity demand [%]
Setting temp1 - Water temp. setting 1
Input(CN142)
A1 RUN Run/Stop
A3 Fan Mode Forced/Normal
B1 Cooling/Heating switching ON→Heating/OFF→Cooling
B3 Pump Interlock Normal/Error
C5 Anti-Freeze ON/OFF
C6 Capacity ON→COP priority/OFF→Capacity priority
D3 Flow Switch Normal/Error
D4 Outlet water temp. switching ON→2nd(temp.2)/OFF→1st(temp.1)
D5 Demand ON/OFF
D6 Mode Change Heating Eco/Heating
Output
X01 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Solenoid valve(4-way valve)
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=Solenoid valve(4-way valve)
445
X02 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Case heater(for heating the compressor)
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=Case heater(for heating the compressor)
X03 MAIN BOX= MAIN BOX=-
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=-
X04 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Pump operation command output
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=-
X05 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Drain pan heater signal output
SUB BOX= SUB BOX=Supplementary heater signal output
X06 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Operation display output
SUB BOX=- SUB BOX=-
X07 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Error display output
SUB BOX=- SUB BOX=-
X08 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Defrost signal output
SUB BOX=- SUB BOX=-
X09 MAIN BOX=- MAIN BOX=Cooling/Heating operation display output
SUB BOX=- SUB BOX=-
12Voutput
52C - Electromagnetic relay(Inverter main circuit)
Unit condition Unit1 to Unit6

TH3 Thermistor Water outlet temperature
TH5 Thermistor ACC Inlet Ref temperature
TH6 Thermistor Air hex Ref temperature
TH7 Thermistor Water hex Ref temperature
TH10 Thermistor Outdoor temperature
TH11 Thermistor Discharge Ref temperature
TH15 Thermistor External Water sensor
THc1 - Water Inlet temp．1 compensation TH1
THc2 - Water Inlet temp．2 compensation TH2
THc3 - Water Outlet temperature compensation TH3
THc15 - External water temperature compensation TH15
63H1 - High pressure switch
Twi - Current inlet water temperature
Two - Current outlet water temperature
Twg Main water temperature External water temperature
Tout - Outdoor air temperature by BMS
SCs - Target subcool value at the suction pipe to compressor
SH - -
SC - -
446
(CMB-WP108V-G)
TH11 Thermistor sensor


TH31a Thermistor sensor
TH31b Thermistor sensor
TH31c Thermistor sensor

TH31d Thermistor sensor
TH31e Thermistor sensor

TH31f Thermistor sensor
TH31g Thermistor sensor

TH31h Thermistor sensor



Ps1 Pressure sensor
SWgp1 SWgp1 signal

SWgp2 SWgp2 signal
SWgp3 SWgp3 signal

Float Float SW
Flcon Float SW

l
21S4Ma 4 way valve
21S4Mb 4 way valve
SVM1 Solenoid valve
72C Contactor
Air vent operation Air vent operation The record of air vent operation
complete Air vent operation has been completed
incomplete Air vent operation has not been completed
Debris removal operation Debris removal operation The record of debris removal operation
complete Debris removal operationn has been completed
incomplete Debris removal operation has not been completed
447
3a-3h 3 way valve MV3*

448
(CMB-WP108/1016V-GA1, CMB-WM108/1016V-AA)
TH15 Thermistor sensor Bypass inlet temperature
TH16 Thermistor sensor Bypass outlet temperature
PS1 Pressure sensor PS1 Detects the high pressure at the liquid side.
PS3 Pressure sensor PS3 Detects the low pressure.
PT1 Average of saturation gas te For control of LEV (LEV1,LEV2,LEV3). (only HB)
mperature of
high pressure and saturation
liquid temperature of high pr

essure
dPHM Differential pressure PS1-PS3 Pressure.(only HB)
Float Float SW
Flcon Float SW
l
21S4Ma 4-way valve Switches the cooling/heating cycle (0:Cooling, 1:Heating)

21S4Mb 4-way valve Heat exchanger capacity control
SVM1 Solenoid valve Refrigerant flow volume control
Air vent operation Air vent operation The record of air vent operation
complete : Air vent operation has been completed
incomplete : Air vent operation has not been completed
Debris removal operation Debris removal operation The record of debris removal operation
complete : Debris removal operationn has been completed
incomplete : Debris removal operation has not been completed
VB3a-3p 3-way valve MV3* Controls the water flow path and the water flow rate
LEV3 LEV3 opening Liquid level control, differential pressure control, superheat of bypa
ss control
449
(CMB-WP108/1016V-GB1, CMB-WM108/1016V-AB)
Float Float SW
Flcon Float SW
Float Float SW
Flcon Float SW
450
(RBH-P35NRA-Q-TWN,RBS-P20/202HRA-Q-TWN)
MODEL CODE (Unit code) - 06(STD08)
Ver Software Version Main program ROM version
TH1 Thermistor Room temperature (Air temperature measured by thermistor)
TH4 Model(Unit) setting Model setting input
THe Analog input1 Blank
4-20 Analog input2 Blank
SET TEMP. Room temerature setting Target room temperature (Cut-off value)
DATE - Current Time
F Time setup flag Current Time Set up(1)/Unset up(0)
DIFF. Room temperature difference Differential of room temperature ((Cut-in value) - (Cut-off value))
SETBACK Setback value Setting value of setback operation

TEMP ALARM Difference of high temperatur Setting value of high temperature alarm
e alarm
TEMP SHIFT Temperature shift value Setting value of tenmerature shift operation
COOLING TIME Normal operation start time Time to change setback operation to normal operation
SETBACK TIME Setback operation start time Time to change normal operation to setback operation
DEFROST TIME Defrosting start time Time to start defrost cycle in the case of fixed time defrost
DEF.CYCLE Defrost cycle Defrost cycle in the case of cycle defrost [hour]
DEF.TIME Defrost time[minute] Defrost time for offcycle defrosting. For defrosting with heater, it s
hows the backup time to finish defrosting
WATER DRIP Water drip time [minute] Unit stop time after defrost mode, to prevent drain water flooding
FAN DELAY Fan start delay time [minute] Fan start delay time from the unit starts cooling after defrost cycle
[minute]
INTERVAL Restart delay time setting Restart delay time from the unit goes into Thermo-OFF [second]
INT.THERM Intelligent timer preset value Setting value of intelligence time function
RT CORRECT Room temperature correction Room temperature correction value [degree]
X6 External abnormalities Condensing unit is unusual(1)/usual(0)

X7 Compressor ON/OFF One or more compressors are Running(1)/Stop(0)
IN3 External contact input Set up(1)/Unset up(0)
IN4 (Reserve) Blank
LEV Linear expantion valve Linear expantion valve output [pulse]
UCNo. Unit controller number Unit controller number (1 to 4)
SW1 Setting of dip-switch 1 Setting of dip-switch 1 (Refer to Technical Manual and Instruction
Manual for more information)
SW2 Setting of dip-switch 2 Setting of dip-switch 2 (Refer to Technical Manual and Instruction
Manual for more information)
TEMP RANGE Unit setting Setting of temperature range (High/Low/Extra low temperature)
OPE. CODE Operation code The code of operational status
COMP START Number of compressor starts Number of compressor starts
LiqSV ON/OFF Solenoid valve (liquid) Solenoid valve (liquid) ON time/OFF time of the previous day [hou
ON time/OFF time r/hour]
HeaterON/OFF Heater ON time/OFF time Defrost heater ON time/OFF time of the previous day [hour/hour]
TH1 MAX,MIN MAX/MIN value of room tem MAX,MIN value of room temperature of the previous day [degree]
perature
X1 Control source output -
X2 Solenoid valve (liquid) output -
X3 Cooler fan output -

X30 Alarm output1 Condensing unit is unusual(1)/usual(0)
X31 Alarm output2 High temperature alarm(1)/usual(0)
X32 Alarm output3 High temperature error (50℃)(1)/usual(0)
12-1 Driver output1 (DC12V) Warning buzzer output
451
Operation Status Monitor Terminology(P-series)
action Operation state(action) Operation state of Unit
mode Operation mode Operation mode of Unit
TO Setting temperature Setting temperature of Unit
capacity save(%) Capacity save Signal of capacity saving from system controller.
TH1 Indoor room temperature Detects the room temperature and performs thermo judgment
based on the difference from the set temperature.
The display temperature varies depending on the room
temperature detect position of function selecting.
TH2 Indoor pipe temperature Indoor pipe temperature
In case of multiple indoor units connection, average value is
displayed.
TH5 Indoor 2-phase pipe temperature Indoor 2-phase pipe temperature
COMP Compressor state Compressor state
"ON" indication at compressor operation
21S4 4way valve state 4way valve state
"ON" indication at heating side
SV Solenoid valve state Solenoid valve state
"ON" indication at solenoid valve operation
FAN Fan step Fan step of Outdoor unit
Hz Target frequency Target Compressor frequency
49C Inner thermo Inner thermo(compressor) state
Normally "closed" indication, operation "open" indication
63H 63H protection state High pressure protection state
63L 63L protection state Low pressure protection state
LEV A LEV opening (A) LEV opening(A) of Outdoor unit
LEV B LEV opening (B) LEV opening (B) of Outdoor unit
LEV C LEV opening (C) LEV opening (C) of Outdoor unit
TH3 Liquid temperature Liquid temperature of Outdoor unit
TH4 Discharge temperature Discharge temperature of Outdoor unit
TH5 Indoor 2-phase pipe temperature Indoor 2-phase pipe temperature of Outdoor unit
TH7 Ambient temperature Ambient temperature of Outdoor unit
TH8 Heat sink temperature Heat sink temperature of Outdoor unit
TH32 Suction pipe temperature Suction pipe temperature
TH33 Comp. surface temperature Comp. surface temperature
SHd(SH) Discharge superheat Discharge superheat
SC Subcool Subcool
COMP(A) Secondary current Secondary current
Last Error Adrs Last Error Address Unit address where the error occurred after turn ON
(Latest value only)
Last Error Code Last Error Code Error code after turn ON(Latest value only)
*Depending on the model, the monitor Mark and display value may not match.
*Depending on the model, Monitorable data is different.
*The model name displayed on the monitor may not match the actual model name.
452
Operation Status Monitor Terminology(M-series)
Mark Official Name Unit
DiscTemp Discharge temperature ℃/°F
TgtDiscTemp Target discharge temperature ℃/°F
PrognoDiscTemp Prognostic discharge temperature ℃/°F
DefTemp Defrost temperature ℃/°F
FinTemp Fin temperature ℃/°F
PCbordTemp PC board temperature ℃/°F
AmbientTemp Ambient temperature ℃/°F
OutHEXtemp Outdoor Hexadecimal temp ℃/°F
EvaTemp Evaporation temperature ℃/°F
CoilTemp_main Coil temperature [MAIN] ℃/°F
CoilTemp_sub Coil temperature [SUB] ℃/°F
RoomTemp Room temperature ℃/°F
Set-RoomTemp Set temp - room temp ℃/°F
Compfreq Compressor frequency Hz
Compfreq_Uplim Upper limit compressor frequency Hz
Compfreq_Dnlim Lower limit compressor frequency Hz
PriCurrent Outdoor primary current A
LEV_M LEV M opening pulse
FanSPD Outdoor fan speed rpm
H/L_Bypass_St H/L bypass valve control State -
H/L_Bypass2_St H/L bypass valve control 2 State -
LEVOpening LEV opening Pulse
FanSPDCode Fan speed code -
HP_ProtecCode High pressure protection code -
Dryness_ProtecCode Dryness protection code -
Frost_PreventCode Frost prevention code -
ProtecCode(Lower) Protection code -
ProtecCode(Upper)
FaultStopInfo(Lower) Fault stop information -
FaultStopInfo(Upper)
ProtecStopInfo(Lower) Protection stop information -
ProtecStopInfo(Upper)
*Depending on the model, Monitorable data is different.
453
9 Connection table for M-series
<For USA>
fiscal_year series model Relay cable Connector
2005 MUZ-A24 RAC-A(1) MUY/MUZ-A24NA(-1/U1) Type AD CN605
MUZ-D30/36NA(-1/-U1/-U2)
2005 MUZ-D(GA) big rac Type AD CN605
GA24NA(-U1)
2005 GE small rac MUZ-GE09/12/15/18NA(-U1) Type AD CN606
MUY-D30/36NA(-1/-U1/-U2)
2005 MUZ-D(GA) big rac Type AD CN605
GA24NA(-U1)
2005 GE small rac MUY-GE09/12/15/18NA(-U1) Type AD CN606
2005 MUZ-A09/12/15/17NA small rac(1) MUZ-A09/12/15/17NA(-1/-U1/-U2) Type AD CN606
2005 MUZ-A09/12/15/17NA small rac(2) MUZ-A09/12/15/17NA(-1/-U1/-U2) Type AD CN606
2005 MUZ-A09/12/15/17NA small rac(3) MUZ-A09/12/15/17NA(-1/-U1/-U2) Type B CN606
2005 MUZ-FD09/12NA(-U1) small rac MUZ-FD09/12NA(-U1) Type B CN606
2008 SUZ-KA25NA.TH SUZ-KA25NA.TH Type AD CN605
2008 SUZ-KA35NA.TH SUZ-KA35NA.TH Type AD CN605
2008 SUZ-KA50NA.TH SUZ-KA50NA.TH Type B CN606
2009 MUY-D30NA-1 MUY-D30NA-1 Type AD CN605
2009 MUY-D36NA-1 MUY-D36NA-1 Type AD CN605
2009 MUY-GA24NA MUY-GA24NA Type AD CN605
2009 MUY-GE09NA MUY-GE09NA Type AD CN605
2009 MUZ-D30NA-1 MUZ-D30NA-1 Type AD CN605
2009 MUZ-D30NA-U2 MUZ-D30NA-U2 Type AD CN605
2009 MUZ-D36NA-1 MUZ-D36NA-1 Type B CN606
2009 MUZ-D36NA-U2 MUZ-D36NA-U2 Type B CN606
2009 FE small rac MUZ-FE09/12NA Type B CN606
2009 MUZ-FE09NA MUZ-FE09NA Type B CN606
2009 MUZ-FE12NA MUZ-FE12NA Type B CN606
2009 MUZ-GA24NA MUZ-GA24NA Type B CN606
2009 MUZ-GA24NA-U1 MUZ-GA24NA-U1 Type B CN606
2009 MUZ-GE09NA MUZ-GE09NA Type B CN606
2010 SUZ-KA09NA.TH H SUZ-KA09NA.TH H Type B CN606
2011 MUY-GE15NA-1 MUY-GE15NA-1 Type B CN606
2011 MUY-GE18NA-1 MUY-GE18NA-1 Type B CN606
2011 MUY-GE24NA MUY-GE24NA Type C CN806
2011 MUZ-FE09NA H MUZ-FE09NA H Type B CN606
2011 MUZ-FE09NA-1 MUZ-FE09NA-1 Type B CN606
2011 MUZ-FE12NA H MUZ-FE12NA H Type B CN606
2011 MUZ-FE12NA1 MUZ-FE12NA1 Type B CN606
2011 MUZ-FE18NA MUZ-FE18NA Type C CN806
2011 MUZ-GE09NA H MUZ-GE09NA H Type B CN606
454
2011 MUZ-GE15NA-1 MUZ-GE15NA-1 Type B CN606
2011 MUZ-GE18NA-1 MUZ-GE18NA-1 Type B CN606
2011 MUZ-GE24NA MUZ-GE24NA Type C CN806
2012 MUZ-FE09NAH MUZ-FE09NAH Type B CN606
2012 MUZ-FE12NAH MUZ-FE12NAH Type B CN606
2012 MUZ-GE09NAH MUZ-GE09NAH Type B CN606
2013 MUZ-FE18NA H MUZ-FE18NA H Type C CN806
2013 MUZ-FH09NA MUZ-FH09NA Type C CN606
2013 MUZ-FH09NAH MUZ-FH09NAH Type C CN606
2013 MUZ-GE24NA H MUZ-GE24NA H Type C CN806
2014 MUY-GE09NA2 MUY-GE09NA2 Type B CN606
2014 MUZ-GE09NA2 MUZ-GE09NA2 Type B CN606
2014 MUZ-GE09NAH2 MUZ-GE09NAH2 Type B CN606
2014 MUZ-HE09NA MUZ-HE09NA Type B CN606
2014 MUZ-HE15NA MUZ-HE15NA Type C CN606
2015 MUY-GL18NA-U1 MUY-GL18NA-U1 Type C CN806
2015 MUY-GL24NA-U1 MUY-GL24NA-U1 Type AD CN605
2015 MUZ-FH18NA MUZ-FH18NA Type AD CN605
2015 MUZ-FH18NA2 MUZ-FH18NA2 Type AD CN605
2015 MUZ-FH18NAH MUZ-FH18NAH Type AD CN605
2015 MUZ-FH18NAH2 MUZ-FH18NAH2 Type C CN605
2015 MUZ-GL18NAH-U1 MUZ-GL18NAH-U1 Type AD CN605
2015 MUZ-GL18NA-U1 MUZ-GL18NA-U1 Type C CN605
2015 MUZ-GL24NAH-U1 MUZ-GL24NAH-U1 Type C CN605
2015 MUZ-GL24NA-U1 MUZ-GL24NA-U1 Type C CN605
2015 MUZ-HM24NA-U1 MUZ-HM24NA-U1 Type C CN606
2015 MXZ-2B20NA MXZ-2B20NA Type AD CN806
2015 MXZ-2B20NA-1 MXZ-2B20NA-1 Type AD CN806
2015 MXZ-2B20NA-2 MXZ-2B20NA-2 Type AD CN806
2015 MXZ-2C20NAHZ MXZ-2C20NAHZ Type C CN806
2015 MXZ-2C20NAHZ2-U1 MXZ-2C20NAHZ2-U1 Type C CN806
2015 MXZ-3B24NA MXZ-3B24NA Type C CN606
2015 MXZ-3B24NA-1 (a) MXZ-3B24NA-1 (a) Type C CN606
2015 MXZ-3B24NA-1 (b) MXZ-3B24NA-1 (b) Type C CN806
2015 MXZ-3C24NA MXZ-3C24NA Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-3C24NA2-U1 MXZ-3C24NA2-U1 Type C CN605
455
2015 MUZ-GL18NAH MUZ-GL18NAH Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-HM24NA2-U1 MUZ-HM24NA2-U1 Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-HM09NA-U8 MUZ-HM09NA-U8 Type B CN606
2016 MUZ-HM09NA2-U8 MUZ-HM09NA2-U8 Type B CN606
2016 MUZ-HM12NA-U8 MUZ-HM12NA-U8 Type B CN606
2016 MUZ-HM12NA2-U8 MUZ-HM12NA2-U8 Type B CN606
2016 MUZ-HM24NA-U1 MUZ-HM24NA-U1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-FH09NA-1 MUZ-FH09NA-1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-FH09NAH-1 MUZ-FH09NAH-1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-FH12NA-1 MUZ-FH12NA-1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-FH12NAH-1 MUZ-FH12NAH-1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-GL09NAH-U1 MUZ-GL09NAH-U1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUY-GL09NA-U1 MUY-GL09NA-U1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-GL09NA-U1 MUZ-GL09NA-U1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-HM09NA-U1 MUZ-HM09NA-U1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUY-HM09NA-L1 MUY-HM09NA-L1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-HM09NA2-U1 MUZ-HM09NA2-U1 Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-FH06NA MUZ-FH06NA Type C CN606
PIMS2016 MUZ-FH06NAH MUZ-FH06NAH Type C CN606
456
<For Europe>
2005 CN606
MUZ-FA GA KA small RAC(1) MUZ-FA GA25/35VA(H) GB/HA/GC35VA(H) SUZ25 Type AD
2005 MUZ-FA GA KA small RAC(2) MUZ-FA GA25/35VA(H) SUZ25 Type AD CN606
2005 MUZ-FA GA KA small RAC(3) MUZ-FA GA25/35VA(H) SUZ25 Type AD CN606
2005 MUZ-FD25/35VABH MUZ-FD25/35VABH-E1 Type B CN606
2005 MUZ-FD50 MUZ-FD50VA(BH)-E1 Type AD CN605
MUZ-GA50VA-E1/GA60VA-E1,E2/GA71VA-E1
2005 MUZ-GA GB big RAC-A(1) CN605
,E2/GB50VA-E1,E2 Type AD
2005 MUZ-GA50VA-E1/GA60VA-E1,E2/GA71VA-E1, CN605

MUZ-GA GB big RAC-A(2) E2/GB50VA-E1,E2 Type AD
2005 MUZ-GA50VA-E1/GA60VA-E1,E2/GA71VA-E1, CN605

MUZ-GA GB big RAC-A(3) E2/GB50VA-E1,E2 Type AD
2005 MUZ-GA60VA big RAC-B MUZ-GA60VA-E3 Type AD CN605
2005 MUZ-GB50/FB35/GE MUZ-GB50VA/FB35VAH/GE25/35/42/50VA(H) Type B CN606
2005 SUZ-KA25VA.TH SUZ-KA25VA.TH Type AD CN606
2005 SUZ-KA25VAH.TH SUZ-KA25VAH.TH Type AD CN606
2005 SUZ-KA35VAH.TH SUZ-KA35VAH.TH Type AD CN606
2007 MUZ-GA71VA-E2 MUZ-GA71VA-E2 Type AD CN605
2007 MUZ-GC25VA-E1 MUZ-GC25VA-E1 Type B CN606
2007 MUZ-GC35VA-E1 MUZ-GC35VA-E1 Type AD CN606
2007 MUZ-HC25VA-E1 MUZ-HC25VA-E1 Type B CN606
2007 SUZ-KA50VA#1.TH SUZ-KA50VA#1.TH Type AD CN605
2008 MUZ-FD25VABH-E1 MUZ-FD25VABH-E1 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-FD25VA-E1 MUZ-FD25VA-E1 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-FD25VAH-E1 MUZ-FD25VAH-E1 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-FD35VABH-E1 MUZ-FD35VABH-E1 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-FD35VA-E1 MUZ-FD35VA-E1 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-FD35VAH-E1 MUZ-FD35VAH-E1 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-FD50VABH-E1 MUZ-FD50VABH-E1 Type AD CN605
2008 MUZ-GA60VA-E3 MUZ-GA60VA-E3 Type AD CN605
2008 MUZ-GB50VA-E3 MUZ-GB50VA-E3 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-HC35VAB-E2 MUZ-HC35VAB-E2 Type B CN606
2008 SUZ-KA25VAHR1.TH SUZ-KA25VAHR1.TH Type B CN606
2008 SUZ-KA25VAR1.TH SUZ-KA25VAR1.TH Type B CN606
2008 SUZ-KA35VAHR1.TH SUZ-KA35VAHR1.TH Type B CN606
2008 SUZ-KA60VAR2.TH SUZ-KA60VAR2.TH Type AD CN605
2009 MUZ-FD50VA-E1 MUZ-FD50VA-E1 Type AD CN605
2009 MUZ-GE25VA-E1 MUZ-GE25VA-E1 Type B CN606
2009 MUZ-GE25VAH-E1 MUZ-GE25VAH-E1 Type B CN606
2010 MUZ-GE60VA-E1 MUZ-GE60VA-E1 Type C CN806
2010 MUZ-GE71VA-E1 MUZ-GE71VA-E1 Type C CN806
2010 SUZ-KA25VA2.TH SUZ-KA25VA2.TH Type B CN606
457
2010 SUZ-KA60VA2.TH SUZ-KA60VA2.TH Type AD CN605
2010 SUZ-KA71VA2.TH SUZ-KA71VA2.TH Type C CN806
2011 MUZ-EF25VE-E1 MUZ-EF25VE-E1 Type C CN606
2011 MUZ-EF25VEH-E1 MUZ-EF25VEH-E1 Type C CN606
2012 MUZ-FH25VE-E1 MUZ-FH25VE-E1 Type C CN606
2012 MUZ-FH25VEHZ-E1 MUZ-FH25VEHZ-E1 Type C CN606
2012 MUZ-GF60VE-E1 MUZ-GF60VE-E1 Type C CN806
2012 MUZ-SF25VE-E1 MUZ-SF25VE-E1 Type C CN606
2012 MUZ-SF25VEH-E1 MUZ-SF25VEH-E1 Type C CN606
2013 MUFZ-KJ25VE-E1 MUFZ-KJ25VE-E1 Type C CN606
2013 MUFZ-KJ25VEHZ-E1 MUFZ-KJ25VEHZ-E1 Type C CN606
2013 MUZ-HJ25VA-E1 MUZ-HJ25VA-E1 Type C CN606
2013 SUHZ-SW45VA.TH SUHZ-SW45VA.TH Type C CN606
2013 SUHZ-SW45VAH.TH SUHZ-SW45VAH.TH Type C CN606
2013 SUZ-KA25VA4.TH-ER SUZ-KA25VA4.TH-ER Type C CN606
2014 MUFZ-KJ25VE-ER1 MUFZ-KJ25VE-ER1 Type C CN606
2014 MUFZ-KJ25VEHZ-ER1 MUFZ-KJ25VEHZ-ER1 Type C CN606
458
2014 MUZ-EF25VE-ER3 MUZ-EF25VE-ER3 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-EF25VE-ET4 MUZ-EF25VE-ET4 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-EF25VEH-ER2 MUZ-EF25VEH-ER2 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-EF25VEH-ET3 MUZ-EF25VEH-ET3 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-FH25VE-ER1 MUZ-FH25VE-ER1 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-FH25VEHZ-ER1 MUZ-FH25VEHZ-ER1 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-GF60VE-ER1 MUZ-GF60VE-ER1 Type C CN806
2014 MUZ-HJ25VA-ER1 MUZ-HJ25VA-ER1 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-SF25VE-ER2 MUZ-SF25VE-ER2 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-SF25VE-ET3 MUZ-SF25VE-ET3 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-SF25VEH-ER1 MUZ-SF25VEH-ER1 Type C CN606
2014 MUZ-SF25VEH-ET2 MUZ-SF25VEH-ET2 Type C CN606
2015 MUZ-DM25VA-E1 MUZ-DM25VA-E1 Type C CN606
2015 MUZ-DM25VA-ER1 MUZ-DM25VA-ER1 Type C CN606
2015 MUZ-DM25VA-ET1 MUZ-DM25VA-ET1 Type C CN606
2015 MUZ-DM35VA-E1 MUZ-DM35VA-E1 Type C CN606
2015 MUZ-DM35VA-ET1 MUZ-DM35VA-ET1 Type C CN606
459
2015 MUZ-FH25VE-ET2 MUZ-FH25VE-ET2 Type C CN606
2015 MUZ-FH25VEHZ-ET1 MUZ-FH25VEHZ-ET1 Type C CN606
2015 MUZ-GF60VE-ET1 MUZ-GF60VE-ET1 Type C CN806
460
2015 MUZ-HJ25VA-ET1 MUZ-HJ25VA-ET1 Type C CN606
2015 MXZ-2B30VA-E1 MXZ-2B30VA-E1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2C30VA-E1 MXZ-2C30VA-E1 Type AD CN606
461
2015 MXZ-2D33VA-E1 MXZ-2D33VA-E1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D33VA-ER2 MXZ-2D33VA-ER2 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D33VA-ET2 MXZ-2D33VA-ET2 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D42VA2-E3 MXZ-2D42VA2-E3 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D42VA2-ER3 MXZ-2D42VA2-ER3 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D42VA2-ET3 MXZ-2D42VA2-ET3 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D53VA2-E3 MXZ-2D53VA2-E3 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D53VA2-ER3 MXZ-2D53VA2-ER3 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D53VA2-ET3 MXZ-2D53VA2-ET3 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D53VAH2-E3 MXZ-2D53VAH2-E3 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D53VAH-E1 MXZ-2D53VAH-E1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D53VAH-ER2 MXZ-2D53VAH-ER2 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D53VAH-ER3 MXZ-2D53VAH-ER3 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2DM40VA-E1 MXZ-2DM40VA-E1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2DM40VA-ER1 MXZ-2DM40VA-ER1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2DM40VA-ET1 MXZ-2DM40VA-ET1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2E53VAHZ-E1 MXZ-2E53VAHZ-E1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-2E53VAHZ-ER1 MXZ-2E53VAHZ-ER1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-2HJ40VA-E1 MXZ-2HJ40VA-E1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2HJ40VA-ER1 MXZ-2HJ40VA-ER1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2HJ40VA-ET1 MXZ-2HJ40VA-ET1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-3D54VA2-E2 MXZ-3D54VA2-E2 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3D54VA2-ER2 MXZ-3D54VA2-ER2 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3D54VA2-ET2 MXZ-3D54VA2-ET2 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3D54VA-E1 MXZ-3D54VA-E1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3D68VA-ER2 MXZ-3D68VA-ER2 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3D68VA-ET2 MXZ-3D68VA-ET2 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3DM50VA-E1 MXZ-3DM50VA-E1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3DM50VA-ER1 MXZ-3DM50VA-ER1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3DM50VA-ET1 MXZ-3DM50VA-ET1 Type C CN861
462
2015 MXZ-3E54VA-E1 MXZ-3E54VA-E1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3E54VA-ER1 MXZ-3E54VA-ER1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3E54VA-ET1 MXZ-3E54VA-ET1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3HJ50VA-E1 MXZ-3HJ50VA-E1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3HJ50VA-ER1 MXZ-3HJ50VA-ER1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-3HJ50VA-ET1 MXZ-3HJ50VA-ET1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-4C80VA2-E1 MXZ-4C80VA2-E1 Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-4C80VA-E1 (a) MXZ-4C80VA-E1 (a) Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-4C80VA-E1 (b) MXZ-4C80VA-E1 (b) Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-5C100VA2-E1 MXZ-5C100VA2-E1 Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-5C100VA-E1 (a) MXZ-5C100VA-E1 (a) Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-5C100VA-E1 (b) MXZ-5C100VA-E1 (b) Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-6C120VA-E1 MXZ-6C120VA-E1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-6C122VA-ER1 MXZ-6C122VA-ER1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-6C122VA-ER2 MXZ-6C122VA-ER2 Type C CN861
2016 MUZ-LN25VG-E1 MUZ-LN25VG-E1 Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-LN25VG-ER1 MUZ-LN25VG-ER1 Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-LN25VG-ET1 MUZ-LN25VG-ET1 Type C CN606
463
2016 MUZ-LN25VGHZ-E1 MUZ-LN25VGHZ-E1 Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-LN25VGHZ-ER1 MUZ-LN25VGHZ-ER1 Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-LN25VGHZ-ET1 MUZ-LN25VGHZ-ET1 Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-WN25VA-E1 MUZ-WN25VA-E1 Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-WN25VA-ER1 MUZ-WN25VA-ER1 Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-WN25VA-ET1 MUZ-WN25VA-ET1 Type C CN606
2016 MUZ-WN35VA-ET1 MUZ-WN35VA-ET1 Type C CN606
2017 MUZ-HC35VAB-E1 MUZ-HC35VAB-E1 Type B CN606
2017 MUZ-WN35VA-E1 MUZ-WN35VA-E1 Type C CN606
464
<For Australlia>
2005 FB50VA MUZ-FB50VA(H)-A1 Type AD CN605
2005 FB50VA MUFZ-FB50VA(H)-A1 Type AD CN605
2005 GB50/FB35/GE MUZ-GB50VA-A2/FB35VAH/GE25/35/50 Type B CN606
2005 MUZ-FA GA KA small RAC(1) MUZ-GA25/35VA(H) GB25/35VA(H) SUZ25 Type AD CN606
2005 MUZ-FA GA KA small RAC(2) MUZ-GA25/35VA(H) SUZ25 Type AD CN606
2005 MUZ-FA GA KA small RAC(3) MUZ-GA25/35VA(H) FA25/35VA-A1 SUZ25 Type AD CN606
2005 MUZ-FB25/35 MUZ-FB25VA(H)/35VA-A1 GC25/35VA Type B CN606
2005 MUZ-FB35VAH MUZ-FB35VAH-A1 Type B CN606
MUZ-GA50VA-A1/GA60VA-A1,A2
2005 MUZ-GA GB big RAC-A(1) Type AD CN605
/GA71VA-A1/GA80VA-A1/GB50VA-A1
2005 MUZ-GA60VA big RAC-B MUZ-GA60VA-A3 Type AD CN605
2005 SUZ-KA25VA.TH-A SUZ-KA25VA.TH-A Type AD CN606
2007 SUZ-KA50VA#1.TH-A SUZ-KA50VA#1.TH-A Type AD CN605
2008 MUZ-FB25VA-A1 MUZ-FB25VA-A1 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-FB35VA-A1 MUZ-FB35VA-A1 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-FB35VAH-A1 MUZ-FB35VAH-A1 Type B CN606
2008 MUZ-FB50VA-A1 MUZ-FB50VA-A1 Type AD CN605
2008 MUZ-FB50VAH-A1 MUZ-FB50VAH-A1 Type AD CN605
2008 SUZ-KA25VAR1.TH-A SUZ-KA25VAR1.TH-A Type B CN606
2008 SUZ-KA60VAR2.TH-A SUZ-KA60VAR2.TH-A Type AD CN605
2009 MUFZ-FB50VAH-A1 MUFZ-FB50VAH-A1 Type AD CN606
2009 MUY-GC25VA-A1 MUY-GC25VA-A1 Type B CN606
2009 MUY-GC35VA-A1 MUY-GC35VA-A1 Type B CN606
2009 MUY-GC71 MUY-GC71VA-A1 Type AD CN605
2009 MUZ 09model MUZ-GE60/71/80VA-A1 Type C CN806
2009 MUZ-GE25VA-A1 MUZ-GE25VA-A1 Type B CN606
2010 MUZ-GE60VA-A1 MUZ-GE60VA-A1 Type C CN806
2010 SUZ-KA25VA2.TH-A SUZ-KA25VA2.TH-A Type B CN606
2010 SUZ-KA60VA2.TH-A SUZ-KA60VA2.TH-A Type AD CN605
2010 SUZ-KA71VA2.TH-A SUZ-KA71VA2.TH-A Type C CN806
2012 MUZ-GE35VA2-A1 MUZ-GE35VA2-A1 Type B CN606
2012 MUZ-GE35VA2-A2 MUZ-GE35VA2-A2 Type B CN606
2012 MUZ-GE50VA2-A1 MUZ-GE50VA2-A1 Type C CN806
2012 MUZ-GE80VA2-A1 MUZ-GE80VA2-A1 Type C CN806
465
2013 MUZ-EF25VE-A1 MUZ-EF25VE-A1 Type C CN606
2013 MUZ-GE60VAD-A1 MUZ-GE60VAD-A1 Type C CN806
2014 MUFZ-KJ25VE-A1 MUFZ-KJ25VE-A1 Type C CN606
2014 MUFZ-KJ50VEHZ-A1 MUFZ-KJ50VEHZ-A1 Type C CN806
2014 MUZ-GE25VAD-A1 MUZ-GE25VAD-A1 Type B CN606
2015 MUZ-FH25VE-A1 MUZ-FH25VE-A1 Type C CN606
2015 MUZ-FH25VEHZ-A1 MUZ-FH25VEHZ-A1 Type C CN606
2015 MUZ-GL25VGD-A1 MUZ-GL25VGD-A1 Type C CN606
2015 MXZ-2B52VA-A1 MXZ-2B52VA-A1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2C52VA-A1 MXZ-2C52VA-A1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D52VA-A1 MXZ-2D52VA-A1 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-2D52VA-A2 MXZ-2D52VA-A2 Type AD CN606
2015 MXZ-3D54VA-A1 MXZ-3D54VA-A1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-4C80VA-A1 (a) MXZ-4C80VA-A1 (a) Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-4C80VA-A1 (b) MXZ-4C80VA-A1 (b) Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-5C100VA-A1 (a) MXZ-5C100VA-A1 (a) Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-5C100VA-A1 (b) MXZ-5C100VA-A1 (b) Type C CN605
2015 MXZ-6C120VA-A1 MXZ-6C120VA-A1 Type C CN861
2015 MXZ-6C120VA-A2 MXZ-6C120VA-A2 Type C CN861
2017 MUY-GN25VF-A1 MUY-GN25VF-A1 Type C CN606
466
10 Trademark and license
© 2010 (2018) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
SQL Server Compact

Version 3.5 SP2
Copyright © Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
DotNetZip
Version 1.9.1.5
Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL)
Copyright © Dino Chiesa 2006 - 2010.
Maintenance Tool for .NET contains software that is based on the Microsoft Public License
(Ms-PL) and other licenses.
These open source components are provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, including, but not
limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Distributed DotNetZip library according to Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL)is used for data export and
import in the Maintenance Tool.
The DotNetZip source code is available at http://dotnetzip.codeplex.com/.
467
Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL)
This license governs use of the accompanying software. If you use the
software,
you accept this license. If you do not accept the license, do not use the
software.
1. Definitions
The terms "reproduce," "reproduction," "derivative works," and "distribution" have the same
meaning here as under U.S. copyright law.
A "contribution" is the original software, or any additions or changes to the software.
A "contributor" is any person that distributes its contribution under this license.
"Licensed patents" are a contributor's patent claims that read directly on its contribution.
2. Grant of Rights
(A) Copyright Grant- Subject to the terms of this license, including the license conditions and
limitations in section 3, each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
copyright license to reproduce its contribution, prepare derivative works of its contribution, and
distribute its contribution or any derivative works that you create.
(B) Patent Grant- Subject to the terms of this license, including the license conditions and
limitations in section 3, each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
license under its licensed patents to make, have made, use, sell, offer for sale, import, and/or
otherwise dispose of its contribution in the software or derivative works of the contribution in
the software.
3. Conditions and Limitations

(A) No Trademark License- This license does not grant you rights to use any contributors' name,
logo, or trademarks.
(B) If you bring a patent claim against any contributor over patents that you claim are infringed
by the software, your patent license from such contributor to the software ends automatically.
(C) If you distribute any portion of the software, you must retain all copyright, patent, trademark,
and attribution notices that are present in the software.
(D) If you distribute any portion of the software in source code form, you may do so only under
this license by including a complete copy of this license with your distribution. If you distribute
any portion of the software in compiled or object code form, you may only do so under a license
that complies with this license.
(E) The software is licensed "as-is." You bear the risk of using it. The contributors give no express warranties,
guarantees, or conditions. You may have additional consumer rights under your local laws which this license
cannot change. To the extent permitted under your local laws, the contributors exclude the implied
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement.
468
・ MS, Microsoft, Microsoft logo, and Windows are registered trademarks and trade names of Microsoft
Corporation. Each company may use as registered trademarks and trade names the product names used in
this manual.
469

Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mitsubishi Electric Air-conditioner Network System

1.1 Introduction of Maintenance Tool

* “G(B)-50A / GB-24A / AG-150A / GB-50ADA / PAC-YG50ECA / EB-50GU / AE-200 / AE-50 / EW-50 /

(1) In case for local connection (via RS-232C)

(2) In case for local connection (via USB) (CMS-MNG-E)

(1) In case for local connection

Maintenance HUB Centralized

(2)-1 In case for remote connection (Dialup connection mode)

*Image of the [Operation monitor - mail communication mode]

Operation monitor mail

MODEM etc Operation monitor data

1.1.5 Wide area access mode

[Remote access method]

1.2.1 Hardware Requirements

(1) In case of routing via MN converter

(2) In case of routing via Centralized Controller

(3) In case of routing via USB/Serial conversion cable.

1.3.1 Setting Up the Maintenance Tool (New setup)

(1)Starting the setup program

* To stop setting up, click on [Cancel] button.

(3)Ready to the installation start

* Clicking on [Cancel] button stops installation.

・Click [Remove] with the next screen, click on [Finish],

・Install the Maintenance Tool program.

Now the installation of the Maintenance Tool is complete.

After completing installation, restart your computer.

Store the CD-ROM in a safe place.

(5)Setting up other software (Only using USB/Serial conversion cable)

1) Install rewriting software for USB/Serial conversion cable

2) Install Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable for Visual Studio 2015

3) Install USB driver

It explains the method of uninstalling the Maintenance Tool as follows.

[ In the case of Windows 7]

(1) Confirm the ending of Maintenance Tool.

(2) Start [Add/Remove Programs].

(3) Select [Maintenance Tool for .NET] and

(4) Ending the [Add/Remove Programs].

(1) Confirm the ending of Maintenance Tool.

(2) Open [Uninstall a program]

(b) From the touch panel

(3) Select [Maintenance Tool for .NET]

(4) Exit [Uninstall a program].

(1) Confirm the ending of Maintenance Tool.

(2) Open [Control Panel]

(3) Open [Uninstall a program]

(4) Select [Maintenance Tool for .NET]

Maintenance Tool for .NET

(5) Exit [Uninstall a program].

1.3.4 USB Serial driver installation

1.3.4.1 For MN Converter

Windows7 Windows8.1 Windows10

(2) A window appears asking you to install the driver.

This completes USB serial driver (CMS-MNG) installation.

1.3.4.2 For USB/Serial conversion cable

1.4.1 Starting the Maintenance Tool

(4) The Title Screen will soon appear.

(5) The “Select units of measurement” screen is displayed.

(6) Thereafter, the selection screen of Monitor mode is displayed.

(1) Clicking "MN CONVERTER" on the selection screen of